A guide to using

WinGLink

By GEOSYSTEM SRL

WinGLink User's Guide, Release 2.20.12

This Manual is produced solely for WinGLink Users Reference and circulation is restricted to
registered WinGLink Users.
Reproduction of the Users Manual in any form is strictly forbidden.
Copyright 1998-2011 by:
GEOSYSTEM SRL - All rights reserved.
Printed in Milan, August 30, 2011
WinGLink is a registered Trademark of:
GEOSYSTEM SRL
Via Clericetti 42a, 20133 MILAN, Italy
Tel :++39-02-266279.1, Fax:++39-02-266279.279
www.geosystem.net
Whilst every effort has been made to ensure the provision of correct information in the
Manual, GEOSYSTEM does not accept responsibility for any errors or use of the
information given.

End-User Licensing Agreement for WinGLink

Software
1. End-User Licensing Agreement for WinGLink Software
This Geosystem End-User License Agreement is a legal agreement
between you (either an individual or a single entity) and Geosystem srl,
for the software product WinGLink, which includes computer software,
associated media, hardware key and printed materials.
IMPORTANTREAD CAREFULLY
WinGLink software will only work at full performance when a
hardware key (DONGLE) is installed on the parallel or USB port of your
PC.
By installing and using WinGLink in conjunction with its DONGLE, you
agree to be bound by the terms of this Agreement. If you do not agree to the
terms of this Agreement, return the DONGLE(S) to us for a full refund
within 10 days from the date you received them.
2. WinGLink LICENSE
WinGLink software is protected by copyright laws and international
copyright treaties, as well as other intellectual property laws and treaties.
The WinGLink software is licensed, not sold.
GEOSYSTEM grants to you a non-transferable and non-exclusive license
to:
1. use the WinGLink Program for your own purposes but only in
machine readable form.
2. utilize the Support Materials and test data in support of the authorized
use of the WinGLink Program;
Other than the limited license above, title and all intellectual property
rights in and to the WinGLink Program, Support Materials and test data,
including, without limitation, copyright, trade secrets, patents and trade
marks, shall remain with GEOSYSTEM. You agree not to copy,
distribute, sell, modify, transfer, decompile, reverse engineer,
disassemble or create derivative works from any parts of WinGLink .
You agree not to assign this agreement or any part thereof or sub-license
the rights granted herein without the prior consent of GEOSYSTEM.
You agree not to raise any objection or challenge to such intellectual
property rights, or to assist, cause or permit other(s) to do so, during the
term of the Agreement and thereafter.
3. Services provided by GEOSYSTEM
GEOSYSTEM shall perform the services, and grant you a nontransferable, non-exclusive license to use the WinGLink Program,
Support Materials, and test data, subject to the Terms and Conditions
herein contained. You agree to accept responsibility for the selection,
installation, and use of the appropriate programs to achieve your intended
results, and for the results obtained from use of the WinGLink Program.
You therefore accept complete responsibility for any decision made
based on your use of the WinGLink Program.

4. Definitions:

In this Agreement the

term:
Agreement
Effective Date
Fees
WinGLink Program

User License(s)

Dongle
Service charge(s)

Support Materials

Termination

means:
this Agreement
The date when you can legally start to
use the WinGLink program
(i) The one-time initial User(s) License
Fee, (ii) The User(s) Maintenance Fee,
the version of the licensed data
processing program , and any
modifications, improvements, or updates
provided to you by GEOSYSTEM,
collectively of any of them;
the right to use the WinGLink Program
by one user per Section 1. This may
include the use on field computers at
temporary sites for projects directly
subordinate to the Licensed Office.
the hardware , needed to run the
WinGLink Program.
GEOSYSTEMs service charges relating
to the services, in accordance with
GEOSYSTEMs current fee schedule;
any machine-readable or printed
material describing or embodying the
WinGLink Program provided to you by
GEOSYSTEM under this agreement,
including flow charts and applications
manuals
means the occurrences contemplated by
Section 0.

5. Term
The Term of this Agreement shall commence on the Effective Date and
terminate upon Termination.
6. Maintenance Services
1. GEOSYSTEM is committed to offer you, subject to the
applicable Service Charge(s), program upgrades and continuing
support in the form of telephone and e-mail advice and other
assistance in problem diagnosis and the correction of errors or
faults in the WinGLink Program during the life of this
License.
2. When a problem occurs, which you believe is related to the
errors or faults in the WinGLink Program, you may contact
GEOSYSTEM at the address given on our World Wide Web at
http://www.geosystem.net. GEOSYSTEM will make an honest
effort to solve your problem; however, GEOSYSTEM cannot
guarantee service results or represent or warrant that all errors
or program defects will be corrected.

3. Further, if your request for service relates to modifications of

the WinGLink Program, to meet your particular needs or
conform with your particular operating environment,
GEOSYSTEM may, at its discretion, modify the WinGLink
Program to meet your particular needs at your request, subject
to Applicable Service charge. However all intellectual property
or other rights which may arise from such modification, shall
reside with GEOSYSTEM.
4. A quotation of the Maintenance and Support Charges for each
year will be provided to you prior to the expiry date at the then
applicable update subscription charge(s). GEOSYSTEMs
current policy is to maintain the cost of a 12-months
subscription at about 15% of the software License Fee; if you
decide not to renew the Upgrade and Maintenance Contract,
you will still be entitled to use the version of the software you
have installed, but your dongle will not be recognized by new
versions released after the M & S expiry date.
7. Protection and security of the WinGLink Program and Support
Materials
You acknowledge that all copies of the WinGLink Program, and the
Support Materials provided by GEOSYSTEM or made by you pursuant
to this Agreement, are proprietary, and the property of GEOSYSTEM,
and may not be distributed by you to any other person, without
GEOSYSTEMs prior written consent. You will not provide or otherwise
make the WinGLink Program or the Support Materials available to
anyone in any form without GEOSYSTEMs prior written consent,
except to your employees, or to other persons on your premises for
purposes specifically related to your authorized use of the WinGLink
Program.
8. Termination
This Agreement may be terminated by you only upon thirty-days prior
written notice to GEOSYSTEM. GEOSYSTEM may terminate this
Agreement upon prior written notice, effective immediately if you fail to
comply with any of the terms and conditions of this Agreement.
9. Events upon termination
You shall forthwith discontinue use of the WinGLink Program, Support
Materials and test data on the day Termination shall occur and you agree
not to resume such use in the future without written authorization from
GEOSYSTEM.
Within 30 days after termination, you shall return to GEOSYSTEM, at
your expense, the WinGLink Program, Dongles, Support Materials, test
data and other material received from GEOSYSTEM or copies permitted
to be made in connection with this Agreement. This obligation relates,
without limitation, to all copies in any form, including translation,
compilation, derivatives and updated materials, whether partial or
complete, and whether or not modified or merged into other materials, as
authorized herein.
10. Warranty

GEOSYSTEM does not warrant that the functions contained in the

WinGLink Program will meet your requirements or that the operations
of the WinGLink Program will be uninterrupted or error free, or that all
program defects will be corrected. Each WinGLink Program shall be
furnished to you in accordance with the terms of this Agreement.
GEOSYSTEM DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.
11 Limitation of remedies
IN NO EVENT SHALL GEOSYSTEM BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF PROFITS, OR LOSS OF
DATA, WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT, TORT
(INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO NEGLIGENCE), OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT OF OR IN ANY WAY CONNECTED
WITH THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, WinGLink Program OR THE
MATERIALS CONTAINED IN, OR ACCESSED THROUGH, THIS
SOFTWARE WinGLink Program, EVEN IF GEOSYSTEM HAS
BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR
FOR ANY CLAIM AGAINST YOU BY ANY OTHER PARTY.
12. General
You agree that this Agreement is a complete and exclusive statement of
the Agreement between you and GEOSYSTEM and can only be
modified by written instrument executed by both parties. GEOSYSTEM
is not responsible for failure to fulfill its obligations under this
Agreement due to causes beyond its control.
The relationship between the parties is that of independent contractors.
Nothing contained in this Agreement shall be deemed to constitute or
create between you and GEOSYSTEM a partnership, association, jointventure, or agency.
The provision of this Agreement shall be binding upon you and
GEOSYSTEM and your respective successors and permitted assigns.
This Agreement will be governed by the laws of Italy.
Should you have any questions concerning this License Agreement, or if
you desire to contact us for any reason, please use the address
information given on our World Wide Web at http://www.geosystem.net

Table of Contents
End-User Licensing Agreement for WinGLink Software...................................................... iii
1:

INTRODUCTION................................................................................................... 1-1

Overview of the Manual Structure........................................................................................... 1-1

WinGLink: An Overview .......................................................................................................... 1-1
2:

GETTING STARTED WITH WINGLINK ............................................................... 2-1

Minimum Hardware and Software Requirements ................................................................. 2-1

Contents of the Shipping Package ............................................................................................ 2-1
Whats on the CD..................................................................................................................... 2-2
Installing WinGLink.................................................................................................................. 2-2
Installing WinGLink ................................................................................................................ 2-2
Uninstalling WinGLink ........................................................................................................... 2-3
Cleaning Up After an Old Version of WinGLink.................................................................... 2-3
Installing the WinGLink Dongle .............................................................................................. 2-3
Installing the Dongle Driver .................................................................................................... 2-4
Downloading New Releases and Documentation .................................................................... 2-4
Using the Support Portal:......................................................................................................... 2-4
Installation Troubleshooting..................................................................................................... 2-8
Common Warning Messages ................................................................................................... 2-8
Optimizing the Graphic System Settings................................................................................. 2-9
What To Do If Program Will Only Run in Demo Mode ....................................................... 2-10
Starting WinGLink.................................................................................................................. 2-10
Using WinGLink in Tools Mode ........................................................................................... 2-11
Using WinGLink in Database Mode...................................................................................... 2-12
The Users Guide...................................................................................................................... 2-13
Where To Find the Manual .................................................................................................... 2-13
How To Read and Print the Manual ...................................................................................... 2-13
Acrobat Reader Installation ................................................................................................... 2-13
3:

WORKFLOW ........................................................................................................ 3-1

Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 3-1

A guide to using WinGLink

Table of Contents 1-1

MT DATA................................................................................................................................... 3-2
TDEM DATA ............................................................................................................................. 3-5
DC DATA ................................................................................................................................... 3-7
GRAVITY | MAGNETIC DATA ............................................................................................. 3-9
WELLS ..................................................................................................................................... 3-11
4:

TIME SERIESMT .................................................................................................... 4-1

Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 4-1

Supported Formats .................................................................................................................... 4-1
Getting Started with the Time Series Tool .............................................................................. 4-1
Opening the Tool ..................................................................................................................... 4-1
Equipment Selection ................................................................................................................ 4-2
Band Selection ......................................................................................................................... 4-2
Time Series Selection .............................................................................................................. 4-3
Displaying Time Series .............................................................................................................. 4-3
Changing the Channels to be Plotted ....................................................................................... 4-4
Working with Frames .............................................................................................................. 4-5
Info Window ............................................................................................................................ 4-6
AutoScale Function.................................................................................................................. 4-6
# of Points ................................................................................................................................ 4-6
Exporting Time Series ............................................................................................................. 4-6
Printing Time Series ................................................................................................................ 4-7
Time Series Tools ....................................................................................................................... 4-7
Filtering.................................................................................................................................... 4-7
Time Shifting ......................................................................................................................... 4-10
Extracting Segments .............................................................................................................. 4-11
Inverting Polarity ................................................................................................................... 4-12
Computing Differences.......................................................................................................... 4-13
Correlation ............................................................................................................................. 4-14
Spectra.................................................................................................................................... 4-16
Spectrogram ........................................................................................................................... 4-18
Batch Functions........................................................................................................................ 4-19
Decimation............................................................................................................................. 4-20
Extraction............................................................................................................................... 4-20
MultiChannel Time Shift ....................................................................................................... 4-21
MultiChannel Extract Segment.............................................................................................. 4-21
MultiChannel Extraction Table.............................................................................................. 4-21
5:

CASCADE DECIMATION MT................................................................................. 5-1

Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 5-1

1-2 Table of Contents

A guide to using WinGLink

About Command Files ............................................................................................................. 5-1

Getting Started with Cascade Decimation............................................................................... 5-2
Opening Cascade Decimation.................................................................................................. 5-2
Creating a New Command File................................................................................................ 5-3
Processing Data...................................................................................................................... 5-12
6:

CROSS-POWER EDITOR MT ................................................................................ 6-1

Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 6-1

Supported Formats .................................................................................................................... 6-1
Getting Started with the Cross-Power Editor ......................................................................... 6-1
Starting the Cross-Power Editor .............................................................................................. 6-1
Loading a Cross-Power File..................................................................................................... 6-2
Editing a Cross-Power File ...................................................................................................... 6-3
Saving the Edited Results ........................................................................................................ 6-4
7:

DATA ANALYSIS MT............................................................................................. 7-1

Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 7-1

Supported Formats .................................................................................................................... 7-1
Getting Started With the Data Analysis Program .................................................................. 7-1
Opening the Program ............................................................................................................... 7-1
File Selection ........................................................................................................................... 7-1
Saving Data.............................................................................................................................. 7-3
Data Rotation & Decomposition.............................................................................................. 7-3
Correcting Spectra ................................................................................................................... 7-4
Viewing Data and Plot Parameters .......................................................................................... 7-4
The Data Analysis View Form ................................................................................................ 7-4
Data Display Options............................................................................................................... 7-5
View Options ........................................................................................................................... 7-6
Spectral Analysis ..................................................................................................................... 7-6
Editing Data................................................................................................................................ 7-7
Selecting Data Points ............................................................................................................... 7-8
Zooming in on the Curve ......................................................................................................... 7-8
Saving Editing Changes........................................................................................................... 7-9
Editing Data Points .................................................................................................................. 7-9
Swapping................................................................................................................................ 7-10
Static Stripping....................................................................................................................... 7-10
Static Shifting......................................................................................................................... 7-11
Calculating Smoothed Curves................................................................................................ 7-12
Adding 360 to Phase ......................................................................................................... 7-13
Batch Commands ..................................................................................................................... 7-13

A guide to using WinGLink

Table of Contents 1-3

8:

EDI UTILITIES MT .................................................................................................. 8-1

Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 8-1

Getting Started With the EDI Tools......................................................................................... 8-1
Opening the EDI Tools ............................................................................................................ 8-1
Convert to EDI ........................................................................................................................... 8-2
Converting Files to EDI Format .............................................................................................. 8-2
Split Multi-Site/EDI Files .......................................................................................................... 8-3
Splitting Multi-Site/EDI Files.................................................................................................. 8-4
Combine EDI.............................................................................................................................. 8-4
Combining EDI Files ............................................................................................................... 8-4
Dump EDI to Text File .............................................................................................................. 8-6
9:

TEMMERGE TDEM.................................................................................................. 9-1

Overview: The TemMerge Program ........................................................................................ 9-1

Getting Started ........................................................................................................................... 9-1
Starting the Program ................................................................................................................ 9-1
Importing System Dump Files ................................................................................................. 9-2
Importing Free-Format Text Files ........................................................................................... 9-2
The Data Records Selection Dialog Box ................................................................................. 9-3
Selecting and Merging Soundings ........................................................................................... 9-4
Saving Merged Soundings ....................................................................................................... 9-5
Display Options .......................................................................................................................... 9-6
Editing......................................................................................................................................... 9-7
Editing Sounding Records ....................................................................................................... 9-7
Editing Sounding Curves ......................................................................................................... 9-8
Polarity Inversion..................................................................................................................... 9-8
Timing ......................................................................................................................................... 9-8
Output Format ........................................................................................................................... 9-9
Using TEM Files....................................................................................................................... 9-11
10:

GRAVITY TOOLS ........................................................................................... 10-1

Overview ................................................................................................................................... 10-1

Getting Started With Gravity Tools....................................................................................... 10-1
Opening Gravity Tools .......................................................................................................... 10-1
The Gravity Reduction Program............................................................................................ 10-1
Creating a Survey Database ................................................................................................... 10-2

1-4 Table of Contents

A guide to using WinGLink

Entering Observed Gravity Values for Base Stations............................................................ 10-2

Defining a Set of Available Meters ....................................................................................... 10-3
Creating and Opening Loops ................................................................................................. 10-3
Computing Observed Gravity Values.................................................................................... 10-4
Exporting Observed Gravity Values...................................................................................... 10-4
Plotting Tide Corrections ........................................................................................................ 10-4
11:

THE WINGLINK SHELL ................................................................................. 11-1

Overview ................................................................................................................................... 11-1

WinGLink Databases and Projects ........................................................................................ 11-1
WinGLink Databases ............................................................................................................. 11-1
WinGLink Projects ................................................................................................................ 11-1
Using WinGLink in Database Mode ...................................................................................... 11-2
WinGLink Databases .............................................................................................................. 11-3
Creating Databases................................................................................................................. 11-3
Database-Specific Menu Commands..................................................................................... 11-7
Database Sharing ................................................................................................................... 11-8
WinGLink Projects.................................................................................................................. 11-9
Adding Projects to a Database ............................................................................................... 11-9
Deleting Projects from a Database......................................................................................... 11-9
Editing Project Properties .................................................................................................... 11-10
Setting a Project as the Source for the Topography............................................................. 11-11
Combining Projects.............................................................................................................. 11-12
12:

DATA IMPORT................................................................................................ 12-1

Overview ................................................................................................................................... 12-1

Getting Started with Data Import .......................................................................................... 12-1
Importing Station Coordinates............................................................................................... 12-3
Importing MT Data ................................................................................................................. 12-7
Importing Single-Site EDI Files ............................................................................................ 12-8
Importing Text Files ............................................................................................................ 12-12
Importing MT 2D Forward Responses ................................................................................ 12-15
Importing 3D Meshes .......................................................................................................... 12-17
Importing TDEM Data.......................................................................................................... 12-21
Importing Temix Datasets.................................................................................................... 12-23
Importing Zonge AVG Files................................................................................................ 12-23
Importing USF Files ............................................................................................................ 12-24
Importing Gravity / Magnetic Data ..................................................................................... 12-25

A guide to using WinGLink

Table of Contents 1-5

Importing Well Data.............................................................................................................. 12-28

About Layer Data................................................................................................................. 12-32
Generally Applicable Import Methods ................................................................................ 12-35
Importing a Project from a WinGLink Database................................................................. 12-35
Importing TGF Files ............................................................................................................ 12-36
Importing Data from a Geolink 6.0 Project ......................................................................... 12-36
Importing Stations Referenced to a Different Coordinate System ...................................... 12-37
13:

COMMON FUNCTIONS .................................................................................. 13-1

Overview ................................................................................................................................... 13-1

The Display Area...................................................................................................................... 13-1
Zoom and Pan Functions ....................................................................................................... 13-1
Setting the View Area............................................................................................................ 13-2
Managing Color Fill................................................................................................................. 13-3
Enabling Color Fill ................................................................................................................ 13-3
Color Scale............................................................................................................................. 13-3
The Range Editor ................................................................................................................... 13-3
Editing Color Palettes ............................................................................................................ 13-6
Contour Lines........................................................................................................................... 13-8
Displaying Contour Lines ...................................................................................................... 13-8
Setting Contour Lines ............................................................................................................ 13-8
Formatting Contour Lines...................................................................................................... 13-9
Setting Decimals in Contour Annotation............................................................................... 13-9
Gridding.................................................................................................................................. 13-10
Copying Display Parameters ................................................................................................ 13-11
Copying Screen Contents ...................................................................................................... 13-12
Editing and Formatting Stations .......................................................................................... 13-12
Setting the Display Options for the Stations of a Project .................................................... 13-12
Applying the Same Display Options to the Stations of All Projects in Maps and X-sections 1313
Formatting the Appearance of the Station Names, Symbols and Posted Values for Each Project
.............................................................................................................................................. 13-13
The Category and Pattern Editors ....................................................................................... 13-14
Printing ................................................................................................................................... 13-17
Overview.............................................................................................................................. 13-17
Setting the Printer ................................................................................................................ 13-18
Setting up the Page............................................................................................................... 13-18
Modifying the Print Layout ................................................................................................. 13-19
Moving and Resizing Items on the Print Layout ................................................................. 13-19
Editing the Textual Print Items ............................................................................................ 13-20

1-6 Table of Contents

A guide to using WinGLink

Changing the Scale .............................................................................................................. 13-21

Splitting the Printout Over Several Pages............................................................................ 13-22
Saving a Layout ................................................................................................................... 13-22
Loading a Layout ................................................................................................................. 13-22
Printing to File ..................................................................................................................... 13-22
14:

MAPS .............................................................................................................. 14-1

Overview ................................................................................................................................... 14-1

Getting Started with the Maps Program ............................................................................... 14-1
Creating a New Map .............................................................................................................. 14-1
Creating and Using Profile Traces......................................................................................... 14-3
Adding Stations to a Profile Trace......................................................................................... 14-4
Creating Maps.......................................................................................................................... 14-6
Items Displayed in a Map ...................................................................................................... 14-6
Parameter Values Used to Generate Maps............................................................................. 14-7
Creating Standard Maps......................................................................................................... 14-7
Creating New Map Definitions.............................................................................................. 14-8
Creating Maps by Merging Data from Different Projects ................................................... 14-11
Loading an Existing Map..................................................................................................... 14-11
Map Grids............................................................................................................................... 14-11
Gridding a Map .................................................................................................................... 14-11
Regridding a Map Using Different Parameters ................................................................... 14-12
Extracting Station Values From Grids................................................................................. 14-13
Importing External Grids ..................................................................................................... 14-13
Exporting grids..................................................................................................................... 14-14
Adding and Editing stations.................................................................................................. 14-15
Importing Stations From a Text File.................................................................................... 14-15
Importing New Values for Existing Stations ....................................................................... 14-16
Using the Datasheet to Add, Delete or Edit Stations ........................................................... 14-16
Using the Interactive Graphic Editor to Add, Delete and Edit Stations .............................. 14-17
Inserting New Stations Along a Profile Trace ..................................................................... 14-18
Profile Traces and Value Profiles......................................................................................... 14-19
Viewing Profile Values and Displaying the Frequency Spectrum ...................................... 14-19
Constructing Sections Along Profile Traces........................................................................ 14-20
Exporting Profiles ................................................................................................................ 14-21
MT Maps................................................................................................................................. 14-21
Mapping MT Parameters ..................................................................................................... 14-21
Extracting Parameter Values from Station Datasets or Models........................................... 14-23
Extracting a Map from 3D Meshes...................................................................................... 14-24
Displaying 3D Meshes......................................................................................................... 14-25
TDEM Maps ........................................................................................................................... 14-26
Extracting Parameter Values From Station Datasets or Models.......................................... 14-26

A guide to using WinGLink

Table of Contents 1-7

Gravity and Magnetic Maps ................................................................................................. 14-27

Gravity and Magnetic Station Anomalies ............................................................................ 14-27
Gravity and Magnetic Field Transformation ....................................................................... 14-29
Terrain Correction Maps (Gravity) ..................................................................................... 14-33
Creating a Terrain Correction Map...................................................................................... 14-33
Calculating the Inner Terrain Correction............................................................................. 14-34
Calculating the Outer Terrain Correction ............................................................................ 14-36
Total Terrain Correction ...................................................................................................... 14-37
Importing and Exporting Terrain Correction Data .............................................................. 14-38
Well Maps ............................................................................................................................... 14-40
Creating a New Map from Numeric Well Data ................................................................... 14-40
15:

WELLS ............................................................................................................ 15-1

Overview ................................................................................................................................... 15-1

Using the Well Data Editor ..................................................................................................... 15-1
To Start the Well Data Editor: ............................................................................................... 15-1
To View and Edit Well Courses ............................................................................................ 15-2
To Import Well Courses......................................................................................................... 15-3
To View and Edit Layered Data ............................................................................................ 15-4
To View and Edit Numerical Data......................................................................................... 15-5
To Display Sectional Views of Well Data............................................................................. 15-6
Working with Well Data in WinGLink: An Overview ........................................................ 15-7
16:

MT SOUNDINGS............................................................................................. 16-1

Overview ................................................................................................................................... 16-1

About Editing......................................................................................................................... 16-1
Sounding Data Which are Saved in the Database.................................................................. 16-2
Opening, Saving and Printing Sounding Data ...................................................................... 16-3
To Open Soundings from the Station List ............................................................................. 16-3
To Open Soundings on the Station Map ................................................................................ 16-3
Viewing Parameter Curves .................................................................................................... 16-4
Setting Diagram Ranges and Scale ........................................................................................ 16-5
Printing Curves and 1D Models............................................................................................. 16-5
Importing Sounding Data....................................................................................................... 16-6
To Export MT Data to an EDI File........................................................................................ 16-9
Activating / Deactivating Stations ....................................................................................... 16-10
Analyzing MT Data................................................................................................................ 16-10
The MT Soundings View Form ........................................................................................... 16-10
Editing Sounding Data .......................................................................................................... 16-13
The Edited Curve ................................................................................................................. 16-13
Editing Sounding Data in the Spreadsheet........................................................................... 16-13
Interactive Sounding Editing Form...................................................................................... 16-14

1-8 Table of Contents

A guide to using WinGLink

Common Problems in MT sounding Editing ....................................................................... 16-19

Reloading Original Curves .................................................................................................. 16-20
1D Inversion ........................................................................................................................... 16-20
1D Inversion: Overview....................................................................................................... 16-20
The 1D Inversion Window................................................................................................... 16-21
Graphic Editor for 1D Layered Models ............................................................................... 16-25
Batch Commands ................................................................................................................... 16-25
Special Menu Commands...................................................................................................... 16-26
Quick View .......................................................................................................................... 16-27
Quick Edit ............................................................................................................................ 16-27
Miniature Curves ................................................................................................................. 16-27
Polarization Maps ................................................................................................................ 16-28
17:

MT PSEUDO-SECTIONS................................................................................ 17-1

Overview ................................................................................................................................... 17-1

Creating a New Pseudo-Section.............................................................................................. 17-1
Gridding the Profile Data....................................................................................................... 17-3
Displaying Station Dataset Values......................................................................................... 17-4
Displaying Profile Intersections............................................................................................. 17-4
Deleting Pseudo-Sections ...................................................................................................... 17-5
Exporting Grids...................................................................................................................... 17-5
Editing Data Points .................................................................................................................. 17-5
Creating a New Difference Pseudo-Section ........................................................................... 17-8
18:

MT 2D INVERSION ......................................................................................... 18-1

Overview ................................................................................................................................... 18-1

Preparing the Input for the MT 2D Inversion Program ......................................................... 18-1
Creating and Loading Models ................................................................................................ 18-2
Elements of a Model .............................................................................................................. 18-2
Creating and Loading Models................................................................................................ 18-3
Creating Marine / Amphibious Models ................................................................................. 18-4
Default Mesh Generation....................................................................................................... 18-6
Extracting a Mesh from an Existing Resistivity Section ....................................................... 18-7
Filling a Mesh with Values Extracted from a 3D MT Mesh ................................................. 18-7
Editing a Mesh.......................................................................................................................... 18-8
Adding Rows or Columns to a Mesh..................................................................................... 18-8
Deleting Rows or Columns from a Mesh .............................................................................. 18-9
Sizing Rows or Columns ....................................................................................................... 18-9
Changing Cell Resistivities.................................................................................................... 18-9
Locking/Unlocking Cell Resistivity .................................................................................... 18-10
Defining Tear Areas............................................................................................................. 18-12

A guide to using WinGLink

Table of Contents 1-9

Editing a Sharp Boundary Model ........................................................................................ 18-13

Editing Sharp Boundary Interfaces...................................................................................... 18-13
Setting Interface Resistivity Nodes...................................................................................... 18-14
Locking Interface Vertices and Resistivity Nodes............................................................... 18-14
Inversion Settings................................................................................................................... 18-15
Overview.............................................................................................................................. 18-15
Main Inversion Parameters .................................................................................................. 18-15
Specifying the Data for Which the Inversion is to be Performed ........................................ 18-16
Smooth Inversion Parameters .............................................................................................. 18-17
Error Floor ........................................................................................................................... 18-19
Static Shift............................................................................................................................ 18-19
Data Errors ........................................................................................................................... 18-21
Fixed Parameters.................................................................................................................. 18-21
Sharp Boundary Inversion Parameters................................................................................. 18-21
Running the Inversion ........................................................................................................... 18-22
Running a Smooth Inversion ............................................................................................... 18-22
Running a Sharp Boundary Inversion.................................................................................. 18-22
Running an Inversion Using CS/AMT Data........................................................................ 18-23
Computing Synthetic Forward Modeling Results .............................................................. 18-23
Presentation of Results .......................................................................................................... 18-24
Displaying Models as Sections ............................................................................................ 18-24
Displaying Response Curves ............................................................................................... 18-24
Displaying Pseudo-Sections................................................................................................. 18-25
Displaying Multiple Models for Comparison ...................................................................... 18-26
Displaying and Exporting Sensitivity Maps ........................................................................ 18-26
Displaying Model Roughness .............................................................................................. 18-26
Displaying Model Development .......................................................................................... 18-26
Displaying 1D Models for Stations...................................................................................... 18-27
Displaying Well Courses ..................................................................................................... 18-28
Displaying Inversion Reports .............................................................................................. 18-28
Taking Notes........................................................................................................................ 18-28
Batch inversion....................................................................................................................... 18-29
Executing Batch Inversions ................................................................................................. 18-29
Exporting and Importing Models and Interfaces ............................................................... 18-29
Exporting Models and Interfaces ......................................................................................... 18-29
Importing Models and Interfaces ......................................................................................... 18-30
19:

MT 3D MODELING ......................................................................................... 19-1

Overview ................................................................................................................................... 19-1

How WinGLink Handles 3D Models .................................................................................... 19-1
About 3D Meshes ..................................................................................................................... 19-2
The 3D Mesh Definition ........................................................................................................ 19-2
3D Meshes in WinGLink ....................................................................................................... 19-2

1-10 Table of Contents

A guide to using WinGLink

Using the MT 3D Modeling Program..................................................................................... 19-3

Selecting a Mesh .................................................................................................................... 19-3
Importing Meshes .................................................................................................................. 19-4
Creating Meshes..................................................................................................................... 19-5
Exporting Meshes ................................................................................................................ 19-10
The Mesh Navigator ............................................................................................................ 19-11
About Views ........................................................................................................................ 19-13
Editing Meshes..................................................................................................................... 19-16
Editing Meshes: Differences Between the MT 2D Inversion and MT 3D Modeling Programs
.............................................................................................................................................. 19-22
Additional edit functions: the Edit menu ............................................................................. 19-23
Station Data Options ............................................................................................................ 19-26
Additional Display Functions .............................................................................................. 19-27
Mesh Properties ................................................................................................................... 19-28
Swap Mesh Function............................................................................................................ 19-29
Printing Mesh Views............................................................................................................ 19-30
Forward Model Calculation.................................................................................................. 19-31
Overview.............................................................................................................................. 19-31
Forward Calculation............................................................................................................. 19-31
Time Requirements.............................................................................................................. 19-33
Starting the Forward Calculation ......................................................................................... 19-33
Exporting EDI Files ............................................................................................................. 19-33
Exporting 3D Grid Files....................................................................................................... 19-35
Randy Mackie 3D Mesh Specification ................................................................................. 19-36
20:

TDEM SOUNDINGS ........................................................................................ 20-1

Overview ................................................................................................................................... 20-1

About Editing......................................................................................................................... 20-1
Sounding Data Which are Saved in the Database.................................................................. 20-2
Opening, Saving and Printing Sounding Data ...................................................................... 20-2
To Open Soundings from the Station List ............................................................................. 20-2
To Open Soundings on the Station Map ................................................................................ 20-3
Display Options ..................................................................................................................... 20-4
Setting Diagram Ranges and Scale ........................................................................................ 20-4
Sounding Properties ............................................................................................................... 20-4
Printing Curves and 1D Models............................................................................................. 20-5
Exporting TEM-Format Files ................................................................................................ 20-5
Editing Sounding Data ............................................................................................................ 20-6
The Edited Curve ................................................................................................................... 20-6
Interactive Sounding Editing Form........................................................................................ 20-6
Reloading Original Curves .................................................................................................... 20-7
1D Inversion ............................................................................................................................. 20-8
1D Inversion: Overview......................................................................................................... 20-8
The 1D Inversion Window..................................................................................................... 20-8
Graphic Editor for 1D Layered Models ............................................................................... 20-11

A guide to using WinGLink

Table of Contents 1-11

Batch Commands & Quick View.......................................................................................... 20-11

Running Operations in Batch Mode .................................................................................... 20-11
Quick View .......................................................................................................................... 20-12
21:

DC SOUNDINGS............................................................................................. 21-1

Overview ................................................................................................................................... 21-1

About Editing......................................................................................................................... 21-1
Sounding Data Which are Saved in the Database.................................................................. 21-2
Opening, Saving and Printing Sounding Data ...................................................................... 21-2
To Open Soundings from the Station List ............................................................................. 21-2
To Open Soundings on the Station Map ................................................................................ 21-3
Display Options ..................................................................................................................... 21-4
Setting Diagram Ranges and Scale ........................................................................................ 21-4
Printing Curves and 1D Models............................................................................................. 21-4
Importing Sounding Data....................................................................................................... 21-5
Editing Sounding Data ............................................................................................................ 21-6
The Edited Curve ................................................................................................................... 21-6
Interactive Sounding Editing Form........................................................................................ 21-6
Reloading Original Curves .................................................................................................... 21-8
1D Inversion ............................................................................................................................. 21-8
1D Inversion: Overview......................................................................................................... 21-8
The 1D Inversion Window..................................................................................................... 21-9
Graphic Editor for 1D Layered Models ............................................................................... 21-11
Batch Commands & Quick View.......................................................................................... 21-12
Running Operations in Batch Mode .................................................................................... 21-12
Quick View .......................................................................................................................... 21-12
22:

EM/DC PSEUDO-SECTIONS ......................................................................... 22-1

Overview ................................................................................................................................... 22-1

Creating a New EM or DC Pseudo-Section........................................................................... 22-1
Gridding the Profile Data....................................................................................................... 22-2
Displaying Station Dataset Values......................................................................................... 22-3
Editing Data Points .................................................................................................................. 22-3
23:

X-SECTIONS................................................................................................... 23-1

X Sections.................................................................................................................................. 23-1
Overview................................................................................................................................ 23-1
Creating a New X-Section ....................................................................................................... 23-2
Gridding the Station Datasets ................................................................................................ 23-3
Activating/Deactivating Stations ........................................................................................... 23-4
Displaying Features and Parameter Values ........................................................................... 23-5

1-12 Table of Contents

A guide to using WinGLink

Displaying the Profile Location Map..................................................................................... 23-5

Profile Intersections ............................................................................................................... 23-6
Section Topography ............................................................................................................... 23-6
Viewing Well Courses and Well Layer Data in X-Sections ................................................. 23-6
Working with Vertically Distributed Data in X-Sections ................................................... 23-7
24:

GRAVITY AND MAGNETIC 2.75D MODELING ............................................. 24-1

Overview ................................................................................................................................... 24-1

Observed Anomaly Values .................................................................................................... 24-2
Selecting the Anomaly........................................................................................................... 24-3
Changing the Vertical Shift ................................................................................................... 24-3
Displaying a Section in the Background................................................................................ 24-4
Creating and Defining Models................................................................................................ 24-4
Creating a New Model ........................................................................................................... 24-4
Opening a Model.................................................................................................................... 24-6
Deleting a Model.................................................................................................................... 24-6
Editing Models ......................................................................................................................... 24-7
Editing Commands and Icons ................................................................................................ 24-7
Adding Bodies to a Model ..................................................................................................... 24-7
Deleting Bodies...................................................................................................................... 24-8
Moving Bodies....................................................................................................................... 24-8
Splitting a Body ..................................................................................................................... 24-8
Editing Bodies in a Model ....................................................................................................... 24-9
To Add Vertices to a Body: ................................................................................................... 24-9
To Delete Vertices from a Body ............................................................................................ 24-9
To Move the Vertices of a Body:........................................................................................... 24-9
To Clip Two or More Vertices: ........................................................................................... 24-10
Setting the Properties of a Body .......................................................................................... 24-10
Moving Body Labels............................................................................................................ 24-11
Formatting Body Labels ...................................................................................................... 24-11
25:

INTERPRETED VIEWS AND MONTAGE ....................................................... 25-1

Overview ................................................................................................................................... 25-1

Document Types .................................................................................................................... 25-1
Plate Mode ............................................................................................................................. 25-2
Getting Started with IVM ....................................................................................................... 25-3
Understanding How IVM Works ........................................................................................... 25-5
The Document Window......................................................................................................... 25-5
Layer Navigator: .................................................................................................................... 25-6
Mouse Locator ....................................................................................................................... 25-8
Zoom ...................................................................................................................................... 25-8
Vertical Exaggeration ............................................................................................................ 25-9

A guide to using WinGLink

Table of Contents 1-13

Crossing Traces...................................................................................................................... 25-9

Toolbars ................................................................................................................................. 25-9
Legends ................................................................................................................................ 25-11
Creating and Working with Layers ..................................................................................... 25-12
Grids..................................................................................................................................... 25-12
Stations................................................................................................................................. 25-17
Profiles ................................................................................................................................. 25-21
Cultural Data........................................................................................................................ 25-21
Interpretation Areas ............................................................................................................. 25-34
GEOTiff Maps ..................................................................................................................... 25-37
Tools: Pattern and Category Editors .................................................................................... 25-38
The IVM Plates Module: Preparing Documents for Printing ........................................... 25-41
Getting Started with the Plates Module ............................................................................... 25-41
Printing Plates ...................................................................................................................... 25-47
26:

APPENDIX A: TGF FILES ............................................................................ 26-49

The TFG Format.................................................................................................................... 26-49

Organizing Station Data in TGF-Format Files .................................................................... 26-49
Valid Tags............................................................................................................................ 26-50
Importing TGF Files into WinGLink................................................................................... 26-54
27:

INDEX ....................................................................................................................I

1-14 Table of Contents

A guide to using WinGLink

1: Introduction

Overview of the Manual Structure

This edition of the WinGLink manual differs considerably from previous
editions. Instead of taking a module-oriented approach, the manual now
follows the workflow a user might typically follow when working with a
specific type of data.
For example, the description for magnetotelluric data guides the user
from the various quality control elements of data processing and analysis,
e.g. use of the Time Series program and data editing, to data import, map
and profile creation, 1D modeling, the creation of pseudo-sections and
cross-sections, to 2D modeling, 3D modeling, and finally, provides
information on how to prepare data for presentation.
As a result of this approach, some modules appear in the manual multiple
times, once for each specific data type. For example, separate chapters
are dedicated to MT Soundings and TDEM Soundings.
Graphical overviews of the typical workflow followed for each type of
data handled by WinGLink are provided in the Workflow chapter of
this manual. In addition to illustrating a step-by-step approach to working
with the respective data types, the diagrams also include references to the
corresponding chapters of the manual.
Program features which are identical throughout WinGLink, e.g. printing,
gridding, color ranges, are discussed in the Common Functions chapter
of this manual.

WinGLink: An Overview
This section gives a general overview of the main processing steps you
will go through when using the WinGLink program. At the same time,
the basic concepts and elements of the application will be introduced.
WinGLink tools are used to perform quality control, editing and data
processing of the raw data in order to produce data which are suitable for
further analysis. MT time series data, for example, can be examined for
quality in the Time Series program, processed using WinGLinks
Cascade Decimation tool, and the results edited with the CrossPower and
Data Analysis tools

A guide to using WinGLink

Introduction 1-1

WinGLink tools are used for

preliminary data analysis,
quality control and data
processing.

A WinGLink database contains the data for all surveys carried out in
the area of interest. Information on the central meridian, the projection
used for the station coordinates, and the linear units used for distances
and depths is stored in the database properties.
The database area can be as
wide as desired

Central Meridian

Area of
exploration

WinGLink projects consist of surveys carried out in the database area.

Stations are added to projects by entering the given station's name,
coordinates and elevation. This may be performed either manually or by
importing station data from external files.
Parameter values, datasets
and 1D models are
attached to each station
for the construction of
maps and sections.

Proj 1: gravity
Proj 2: towns
Proj 3: MT

Maps are produced by gridding station values.

1-2 Introduction

A guide to using WinGLink

Parameter values can be

automatically extracted
from the station datasets or
models

Profile traces are defined as open polygonal lines added to the area.
Stations are added to the traces to construct sections.

Profile traces are used to

construct sections. The
same trace can be used for
all types of surveys.
Proj 1: gravity
Proj 2: towns
Proj 3: MT

Sections are plotted using station datasets (pseudosections), 1D models,

2D models (cross sections) or extracted from 3D models.

A guide to using WinGLink

Introduction 1-3

2: Getting Started with WinGLink

Minimum Hardware and Software Requirements

To install and use WinGLink, your system must satisfy the following
requirements:

Item

Minimum requirement

Machine type

IBM PC or compatible

CPU type

Pentium processor

RAM

512 MB

Color board

SVGA with at least 256 KB memory

Fixed disk space

100 MB for installation, and an average of 20

MB for each database

Non-fixed disk drive

CD-ROM drive

Operating system

Recommended:
Windows
XP;
Windows
98/2000/ NT 4.0 with latest service pack also
supported.

Internet connection

A high-speed Internet connection is needed to

download new releases of the software as they
are made available.

Note: The above hardware does not represent the best configuration for
running WinGLink. Adding more RAM or using a higher speed
processor will substantially improve WinGLink performance.
Furthermore, a high-speed Internet connection is recommended for
downloading new releases as they are made available.

Contents of the Shipping Package

To make sure that your package is complete, check its contents against
the list below:

A guide to using WinGLink

Getting Started with WinGLink 2-1

Item

Description

Installation CD-ROM

The WinGLink application and its setup program.

WinGLink dongle
(one for each license)

Each license of WinGLink comes with a hardware

copy protection dongle. The dongle is needed to
run WinGLink with full performance.

Users guide

This manual with instructions on how to use

WinGLink programs and its applications.

Whats on the CD
The CD-ROM provided with each license contains

Directory

Contents

Winglink\Setup

Installation files and

program for WinGLink

Winglink\Sentinel

Installation program for

WinGLink dongle driver

Winglink\Manual\Pdfdocs

This manual in Acrobat format

Winglink\Manual\Acroread

Acrobat
program

Reader

setup
the

installation

Installing WinGLink
This section contains instructions for installing and uninstalling
WinGLink on a stand-alone computer system. This is the default
installation mode for WinGLink programs. Should your machine be
connected to a networked environment, we suggest that you copy all of
the installation files to a directory on the network server. The same
installation procedure can then be followed from each connected
peripheral station, specifying the server directory as the source of
installation programs.

Installing WinGLink
To begin, start your Windows operating system, then:
1. Close any application still running.
2. Use the Windows Explorer to select the CD-ROM directory,
then browse to the WinGLink\Setup folder, which contains the
installation files.
3. Double-click the Setup.exe file.
4. Follow the instructions on the screen. Should any messages
appear during this process, click the OK button to
acknowledge.

2-2 Getting Started with WinGLink

A guide to using WinGLink

Uninstalling WinGLink
To remove WinGLink from your computer.
1. Click the
button on the task bar, point to Settings,
and then select Control Panel.
2. Double-click the Add/Remove Programs button.
3. Select WinGLink from the listed programs.
4. Click the Remove button.
Note: The uninstall program will remove only those files placed on your
hard disk by the installation program. It will not remove the databases
and data files you have created using WinGLink. These are stored as
permanent files on your computer and can only be removed manually.

Cleaning Up After an Old Version of WinGLink

The WinGLink setup routine automatically removes earlier versions prior
to installing a new release.
If, for some reason, you must install a WinGLink release (preceding
1.61.01), you must uninstall WinGLink to remove earlier versions before
installing. You can check the directory Program Files\WinGLink to
make sure that all files have been deleted from this directory. If not,
delete all files manually and then install the new release of the program.
Note: Should you encounter problems following a new installation,
contact us at support@winglinksoftware.com

Installing the WinGLink Dongle

Each WinGLink license comes with a hardware copy-protection dongle
which must be plugged into either a USB port or the parallel (printer)
port of your PC. When installing a parallel port dongle, connect the
dongle between the PC and the printer cable.
Note: Licenses purchased as of mid-December 2002 may be supplied
with a USB dongle. When installing the USB dongle, proceed following
the same instructions provided for the parallel port dongle, connecting the
dongle to the USB port instead of the parallel port.
The USB dongle is NOT supported for the Window NT operating
system. If you intend to run WinGLink under Windows NT and you have
been provided with a USB dongle, please contact Geosystem for a
replacement parallel port dongle.
The USB dongle is supported for the Windows 98, ME, 2000 and XP
operating systems.
W/hen installing a USB dongle driver, you must remove the dongle
prior to running the driver installation program!

A guide to using WinGLink

Getting Started with WinGLink 2-3

To Install the Parallel Port Dongle:

1. Turn off your computer.
2. If a printer or another device is connected to the parallel port,
turn it off and disconnect it from the computer port.
3. If installing a parallel port dongle, connect the dongle. Do not
connect the USB dongle prior to running the driver installation
program.
4. Reconnect the printer cable to the PC by plugging it into the
free end of the dongle.
5. If installing a parallel port dongle, turn on the printer, otherwise
the dongle may not be detected.
6. Turn on your computer to reboot the system.

To Install the USB Dongle:

1. Install the dongle driver as described below
2. Plug the USB dongle into a free USB port.

Installing the Dongle Driver

Open the \Winglink\Sentinel folder on the installation CD ROM and
double-click the file <Sentinel.exe>. This will install the dongle driver
and enable your PC to recognize the dongle.
Note: The dongle does not affect any of the standard operations of the
system; any device connected to the parallel/USB port via the dongle will
work as it did before inserting the dongle.

Downloading New Releases and Documentation

Beginning July 4, 2011, new WinGLink releases and documentation can
be downloaded from the Schlumberger Support Portal. The WinGLink
Downloader previously used for this purpose is no longer active.
The Schlumberger Support Portal is a single online location for all
petrotechnical support needs. WinGLink customers have access to:
- Software download: installation packages
- Release documents: installation guides, release notes, release
announcements.
- Technical documents: case studies.
- New content alerts: RSS feeds, news alert subscription, forum
subscription.
The Support Portal provides rapid access to expert answers 24/7.

Using the Support Portal:

The Support Portal can be accessed from: http://support. slb.com.
The Portal opens with a screen prompting your for your user name and
password:

2-4 Getting Started with WinGLink

A guide to using WinGLink

This login information was provided to the person on file as the contact
for your WinGLink license. If you are not this person and would like to
set up your own account:
- Click the Register button
- Complete the Registration Information pages; here, you must create a
password and agree to the Terms of Service
Note: if your email address is already known in the system, you will need
to enter your Customer ID when prompted. Approval will follow within
48 hours, provided there is an active Maintenance and Service Agreement
associated with your license.
After you have successfully logged in, the main Support Portal screen
opens:

A guide to using WinGLink

Getting Started with WinGLink 2-5

Here, you can modify your user information, learn more about the
Support Portal and access other areas of the system.
The area directly relevant to WinGLink can be accessed by selecting the
Non-Seismic Methods item on the Products/Disciplines menu as shown
above.
In the Non-Seismic methods focus page that then opens, you can access a
range of information relevant to WinGLink, including discussion forums,
the release information and software/documentation downloads:

In the area at the right side of the screen, you will find links to the
knowledge base, support and WinGLink downloads:

2-6 Getting Started with WinGLink

A guide to using WinGLink

Select the Software Download Center link to open a screen from which
the latest WinGLink release, dongle drivers, and documentation can be
downloaded:

Note that once you access the Support Portal, you can see all the products
on the Portal itself.
Documentation can alternatively be downloaded from the Non-Seismic
methods focus page by selecting the Documentation link:

A guide to using WinGLink

Getting Started with WinGLink 2-7

To learn more about the Schlumberger Support Portal, click the "Getting
Started" icon on the Support Portal home page.

Installation Troubleshooting
Common Warning Messages
Warning messages may pop-up during the installation depending on the
system settings of your PC. Here are the most common messages and the
correct actions to undertake:

2-8 Getting Started with WinGLink

A guide to using WinGLink

Message

Action

"Setup cannot continue

because some system files are
out of date on your system.
Click OK if you would like to
update these files for you now.
You will need to restart
Windows before you can run
setup again. Click Cancel to
exit setup without updating
system files

Click OK to proceed with the

installation of WinGLink. This also
means that the system will have to
be rebooted. A new message will be
displayed:

"Do you want to restart

Windows now ? If you choose
No, you will not be able to run
setup again until after the
system is rebooted at a later
time"

Click YES; the setup process will

be terminated and the system will be
automatically rebooted. You will
need to restart the setup procedure

"A file being copied is older

than the file currently on your
system. It is recommended that
you keep your existing file"

Click YES to proceed

When starting WinGLink, a

dialog box displaying "You are
running WinGLink in Demo
mode" is displayed.

Make certain that the WinGLink

dongle is correctly connected and
that the dongle driver has been
installed.
If the dongle is connected and the
driver has been installed, your
computer has not detected the
dongle.
It is possible that the parallel port on
your computer has not been enabled
(a problem frequently reported by
owners of Toshiba laptops). To
correct, please refer to section What
to do if program will only run in
demo mode of this chapter.

Optimizing the Graphic System Settings

These operations are needed to optimize your system for the use of
WinGLink.
1. Click the
Control Panel.

button, point to Settings, and then click

2. Double-click the Display button; select the Settings tab.

3. In Color Palette, select High Color (16-bit) or higher.
4. In Font Size, select Small fonts.

A guide to using WinGLink

Getting Started with WinGLink 2-9

What To Do If Program Will Only Run in Demo

Mode
If a message is displayed when launching WinGLink indicating that the
program is being run in Demo mode, despite having installed the dongle
driver and having correctly connected the dongle, it is quite likely that
your computer has not detected the dongle. A common cause of this
problem is that the parallel port has not been enabled (when using a
parallel port dongle). This may be the case even if the printer functions!

To Check Whether Your Parallel Port Dongle Is Enabled:

1. Launch C:\Program Files\Rainbow Technologies\Sentinel
System Driver\SetupSysDriver.exe
2. Click Configure Driver and make sure you see a physical
address and port type for the parallel port. If you do not see
one, the parallel port is not enabled! Follow the instructions
below to enable the parallel port. Note that Windows XP will
still allow the printer to work even though the port is not
enabled.
3. Uninstall the Sentinel System Driver using the Add/Remove
Programs wizard in the Windows Control Panel.
4. Reboot your computer and hold down the ESC key while
tapping the F1 button to enter BIOS.
5. Find the parallel port mode setting and enable it.
6. Save changes and exit BIOS.
7. Reinstall the Sentinel System Driver.
If, after enabling the parallel port, WinGLink continues to run in demo
mode only, please contact WinGLink technical support at
support@winglinksoftware.com.

What To Do If Using a USB Dongle

If using a USB dongle, you may need to uninstall the dongle driver if the
dongle was connected when the driver was installed. In this case, remove
the dongle, uninstall the driver, then reinstall the driver.

Starting WinGLink
After successfully installing WinGLink on your PC, installing the dongle
driver and plug-in in the dongle, you are ready to start the program.

To Start WinGLink:
1. Click the

button on the Windows Task Bar.

2. Select Programs, and then click the WinGLink entry.

2-10 Getting Started with WinGLink

A guide to using WinGLink

3. The following dialog box is displayed:

Select the options listed in the Database frame if you would

like to use WinGLink in Database Mode, or click "Enter Tools
Mode" to run WinGLink in Tools Mode. See below for
information on WinGLinks two operating modes.

Using WinGLink in Tools Mode

The field data collected during a survey often require preliminary
treatment and must undergo a certain amount of quality control in order
to produce processed data which are suitable for further analysis. This is
the case, for instance, of meter readings for gravity surveys or time series
for MT soundings.
WinGLink is equipped with a suite of programs (Tools) which handles
data reduction and quality control (QC). These tools produce output files
that can be imported into a WinGLink database for further processing and
interpretation.
These include programs for

MT tools

Function

MT field processing

Time series display (MT & MCSEM)

Cascade decimation processing
Cross-power editing
Data analysis

EDI files
conversion/manipulation

Conversion to EDI format of

Stratagem/Imagem z*.* files
Splitting multi-site EDI files
Combining EDI files

A guide to using WinGLink

Getting Started with WinGLink 2-11

GR tools

Function

Gravity reduction

Data reduction for Scintrex and

Lacoste-Romberg g-meters

Tide corrections

Plots of tide corrections and output of

values at user-assigned time intervals

EM tools

Function

TemMerge

Import, edit and merge raw data from

field dump files (Geonics, Zonge,
Sirotem and text files).

To Use WinGLink in Tools Mode:

-

Select the Enter Tools Mode option in the starting dialog box or

When in Database Mode, select the File | Tools menu command on

the main menu.

WinGLink then opens in a view from which all tools supplied with your
license can be selected:

Detailed instructions on the use of the individual Tools programs can be

found in the respective chapters of this manual.

Using WinGLink in Database Mode

The bulk of WinGLinks power is accessed while in Database Mode.
Here, databases and projects can be created and managed, data imported
and the individual program modules opened:

2-12 Getting Started with WinGLink

A guide to using WinGLink

To Use WinGLink in Database Mode

To use the program in Database Mode, select one of the options in the
Database frame of the initial dialog box, i.e. select either an existing
databases, the demo database or create a new database. Detailed
information on working with WinGLink in Database Mode is provided in
the WinGLink Shell chapter of this manual.

The Users Guide

This users guide is provided in printed form and as a PDF (Portable
Documents Format) file which can be viewed and printed using Acrobat
Reader version 3.0 or later. This is supplied with the installation CDROM.

Where To Find the Manual

The Acrobat PDF file with the WinGLink users guide can be found in
the \Winglink\Manual\Pdfdocs directory on the installation CD-ROM.
Using Acrobat Reader, you can load the file from this directory or you
can copy it to a directory on a hard disk and load it from there for faster
access.

How To Read and Print the Manual

Use Acrobat Reader 3.0 or higher to open the manual.pdf file. Refer to
Acrobats online help to learn how to view and print the manual.

Acrobat Reader Installation

To install Acrobat Reader 3.0 on your Windows 95/98 or NT4.0/2000/XP
computer:
1. Move to the \Winglink\Manual\Acroread directory on the
WinGLink installation CD-ROM.

A guide to using WinGLink

Getting Started with WinGLink 2-13

2. Double-click the Setup.exe program and follow the

instructions.

2-14 Getting Started with WinGLink

A guide to using WinGLink

3: Workflow

Overview
Presented on the following pages are typical workflows for each of the
data types supported by WinGLink. There are provided, in particular, for
users new to WinGLink. Each of the typical work steps includes a
reference to the corresponding WinGLink module and the chapter in this
manual where detailed instructions on the given module can be found.
The information is presented in tabular form, with the flowchart
information in the left-hand column, the program module in the center
and the manual reference at the right.
For most data types, the workflow is divided into three main steps:
-

Quality Control

Interpretation

Presentation

Within each of these steps, two different flowchart elements are used:

A guide to using WinGLink

Parallelogram: Used to indicate the type of data used in the next

operation, e.g. EDI file or well course.

Rectangle: A description of the given operation, e.g. data import or

MT 2D inversion.

Workflow 3-1

MT DATA
Operation

Module

Chapter

Input:
Time Series

Quality Control

Time Series Tool

Chapter 4

Input: Edited
Time Series

Data Processing

Cascade Decimation

Chapter 5

Input: XPowers, EDI

Data Editing

Cross Power Editor

Data Analysis Tool

Chapter 6
Chapter 7

WinGLink Shell

Chapter 11

Input:
Edited EDI

Interpretation

Database Creation

3-2 Workflow

A guide to using WinGLink

Input:
Edited EDIs

Data Import

WinGLink Shell

Chapter 11

Input: Project
Stations

Creation of Profiles,
Assignment of Stations

Maps

Chapter 14

ID Modeling,
Creation of Smooth Curves,
Further Editing

MT Soundings

Chapter 16

MT 2D Inversion

Chapter 18

Maps

Chapter 14

Input:
Station Data,
Map Profile

2D Modeling, Inversion,
Creation of Synthetic Data

Input: 2D
Models, Station
Responses,
Synthetic Data

Maps

A guide to using WinGLink

Workflow 3-3

Creation of Pseudosections

MT Pseudo-Sections

Chapter 17

Creation of X-Sections

X-Sections

Chapter 23

3D Modeling, 3D Forward
Calculation

MT 3D Modeling

Chapter 19

Interpreted Views and Montage

Chapter 25

Presentation

3-4 Workflow

A guide to using WinGLink

TDEM DATA
Operation

Module

Chapter

Raw System
Files

Quality Control,
Editing, Merging

TemMerge

Chapter 9

Interpretation

Database Creation

WinGLink Shell

Chapter 11

WinGLink Shell

Chapter 11

Maps

Chapter 14

EM Soundings

Chapter 20

Input:
TemMerge files

Data Import

Input: Project
Stations

Creation of Profiles,
Assignment of Stations

Further Editing,
ID Modeling

A guide to using WinGLink

Workflow 3-5

Input:
Station Data,
Map Profile

Data Analysis

EM Pseudo-Sections

Chapter 22

Input: 1D
Models, Station
Data

Maps

Maps

Chapter 14

Creation of X-Sections

X-Sections

Chapter 23

Interpreted Views and Montage

Chapter 25

Presentation

3-6 Workflow

A guide to using WinGLink

DC DATA
Operation

Module

Chapter

WinGLink Shell

Chapter 11

WinGLink Shell

Chapter 11

Maps

Chapter 14

DC Soundings

Chapter 21

Input:
Schlumberger
Soundings

Interpretation

Database Creation

Input:
TemMerge files

Data Import

Input: Project
Stations

Creation of Profiles,
Assignment of Stations

Further Editing,
ID Modeling

Input:
Station Data,
Map Profile

A guide to using WinGLink

Workflow 3-7

Data Analysis

DC Pseudo-Sections

Chapter 22

Input: 1D
Models, Station
Data

Maps

Maps

Chapter 14

Creation of X-Sections

X-Sections

Chapter 23

Interpreted Views and Montage

Chapter 25

Presentation

3-8 Workflow

A guide to using WinGLink

GRAVITY | MAGNETIC DATA

Operation

Module

Chapter

Input: Gravity
Values

Gravity Reduction

Gravity Reduction Tool

Chapter 10

Interpretation

Database Creation

WinGLink Shell

Chapter 11

WinGLink Shell

Chapter 11

Maps

Chapter 14

Input: Station
Coords,
Grav/Mag. Data

Data Import

Input: Project
Stations

Creation of Profiles,
Assignment of Stations

Input:
Station Data,
Map Profile

A guide to using WinGLink

Workflow 3-9

Modeling

Presentation

3-10 Workflow

2.5D Modeling

Interpreted Views and Montage

Chapter 24

Chapter 25

A guide to using WinGLink

WELLS
Operation

Module

Chapter

Database Creation

WinGLink Shell

Chapter 11

WinGLink Shell

Chapter 11

Maps

Chapter 14

Wells Editor

Chapter 15

Input: Well
Coords, Well
Traces

Data Import

Input: Wells
Courses

Creation of Profiles,
Assignment of Wells

Input:
Well Courses

Edit Well Courses, Import

Layer Data

Presentation

A guide to using WinGLink

Interpreted Views and Montage

Chapter 25

Workflow 3-11

4: Time Series

MT

Overview
WinGLinks Time Series tool is generally used as an initial quality
control step during an MT survey in order to analyze the acquired time
series. This tool provides a variety of functions which are useful for
evaluating the data quality in both time and frequency domains as well as
a number of powerful tools for handling time series such as filtering,
spectrographs, time shifting, extraction and others.

Supported Formats
The Time Series tool provides support for most of the leading acquisition
systems including:
-

EMI MT-1

EMI MT-24

EMI MMT-24

Metronix ADU-06

Phoenix V5

Phoenix V5-2000

Phoenix V8

Getting Started with the Time Series Tool

Opening the Tool
After opening WinGLink in Tool Mode, select MT in the left panel of
the tool form, select Field Processing in the left frame, and click the
arrow to the left of

A guide to using WinGLink

Time SeriesMT 4-1

Note: For information on starting WinGLink in Tool Mode, refer to the

Getting Started With WinGLink chapter of this manual.

Equipment Selection
The Time Series tool opens with a dialog box prompting you to select a
type of equipment, e.g. E.M.I. MT24. Make the appropriate selection and
click OK.

This window is opened automatically when the Time Series tool is started
and can also be opened by selecting the File | New menu command.
Note: It is possible to view time series either as raw data, where only the
AD conversion factor (mV/digitalized-unit) is applied, or as signal data.

Band Selection
After selecting the data type, the program prompts you to select the band
extension of the acquired time series, i.e. t05 for 50Hz sampling rate. It is
also possible to select decimated time series by entering the appropriate
band extension.

4-2 Time SeriesMT

A guide to using WinGLink

This window can also be opened with the Settings | Band Selection
menu command

Time Series Selection

In the Time Series Selection form, use the left combo boxes to select the
drive and folder containing the time series files to be opened. In the
middle window, select the check box associated with a specific file. After
selecting, a brief description (receiver ID, channel type, sampling
frequency) of the files contents appears in the right window. Channels
for which the check box is selected in the panel at the right are displayed
after the OK button is pressed.

This window can also be opened with the Settings | Plot Selection
menu command

Displaying Time Series

At this point, the selected time series are displayed in the main window.
One time series is plotted in each frame. The plotted series reflect the
number of samples specified by the # of Points drop-down list in the
upper left part of the main window. By changing the value in this menu,
it is possible to change the number of plotted samples from a minimum of
64 to a maximum of 131,072.

A guide to using WinGLink

Time SeriesMT 4-3

Click the arrow buttons located in the scroll bar

at the
bottom of the main window to scroll through the time series, i.e. move
forwards and backwards along the time axis.

The status bar, located at the bottom of the window, is used to display
information corresponding to the current cursor location:
Time: Number of seconds from the acquisition start time
Amp: Amplitude value and specific unit of measure
Site: Station/receiver ID
Channel: Type(e.g. Ex, Ey,)
Date: Absolute date and time (e.g. 01/May/2006 22:30:05), if available.
The information bar at the top of the window is used to display two
general pieces of information regarding the time series: the sampling
frequency and the band ID.

Changing the Channels to be Plotted

Use the mouse to click the frame number at the far left edge of the
window:

4-4 Time SeriesMT

A guide to using WinGLink

The Plot Selection window opens. Enter the necessary information and
click OK to apply the new selections.

Working with Frames

Band & Plot Selection
The Band & Plot Selection windows, familiar from Time Series startup,
can be accessed directly with the Settings | Band Selections and
Settings Plot Selections menu commands, respectively. These two
functions can be used to add time series to the current display.

Clearing Frames
Use the Settings | Clear Selections menu command to clear all currently
displayed time series from the main window. Prior to clearing the
display, the Time Series tool displays a confirmation window which must
be acknowledged before the operation is performed.

Adding or Removing Frames

By default, the program makes seven frames available. It is possible,
however, to add additional frames to the display and compare many
channels of different time series in the same plot. Likewise, frames can
also be deleted from the display.
On the Settings menu, choose Add Frame or Remove Frame.
All channels must be of the same band and must be synchronized.
Note: Frames are added or deleted at the bottom of the plot.

A guide to using WinGLink

Time SeriesMT 4-5

Info Window
Click the
icon to open an info window in which the following
information for each of the time series is displayed:

Site: Station/receiver ID
Channel: Data component
Start Time: Date and time of the first sample
End Time: Date and time of the last sample
File: Time-series file name

AutoScale Function
Click the Autoscale icon
to enable or disable the autoscale function,
which automatically sets the range of the vertical scale of each frame to
include all points from the minimum to the maximum value for the
displayed samples.
Note: When auto-scale is off, the vertical scale of each frame can be
adjusted manually by clicking the two buttons at the top and bottom
left of each frame. Use the up and down buttons to increase or decrease
the value of the scale endpoints.

# of Points
Use this drop-down list to select the number of samples currently
displayed. The number of samples is also used in the spectra and
correlation computations.

Exporting Time Series

Use the File | Export menu command to open the Export Time Series to
ASCII window, which is used to export the selected files to external text
files:

4-6 Time SeriesMT

A guide to using WinGLink

Printing Time Series

Select the File | Print menu command to open WinGLinks familiar
Print interface. Details on using this window can be found in the
Common Functions chapter of this manual.

Time Series Tools

Filtering
As described below, the Time Series Tool provides a number of filtering
functions, including adaptive filtering, wavelet filtering and notch
filtering.

Adaptive Filtering
This tool, accessed with the Tools | Adaptive Filtering menu
command, applies an adaptive filter (normalized least mean square filter)
to the selected signals in order to notch a subset of desired frequencies,
adopting an approach similar to that of echo cancellation.

A guide to using WinGLink

Time SeriesMT 4-7

In the Adaptive Filtering dialog box, shown above, set the parameter
values in the Filters Settings frame for:
Filter Order: The number of coefficient used for filtering (>0).
Forgetting Factor: Weighting factor used in signal power estimation
between new and current estimate (0< x <1).
Convergence Parameter: The adaptation step, which controls the
convergence time and adaptation quality
(0<= x <1).
Enter the frequencies to be notched in the upper right frame and click the
Add button.
In the Apply To frame, select the signals to be filtered by clicking the
appropriate check boxes. To run the filter, click the OK button.
Note: A backup of each original file is created for each filtered channel.
These backup files are stored in the same folder as the original. A popup
message appears following the filtering operation indicating the new file
name.

Wavelet Filtering
This tool, accessed with the Tools | Wavelet Filtering menu
command, provides a filter that operates in the wavelet domain leaving
good data sections unchanged. Data in the wavelet domain are analyzed
through scale levels, allowing separation of noise from signals. Noisy
elements of impulsive nature, either in time or frequency domain, are
filtered out.

4-8 Time SeriesMT

A guide to using WinGLink

In the Filter Settings frame, select the parameters to be used in the

filtering:
Wavelet type: The wavelet prototype function (e.g. Daubechies)
Wavelet order: Number of coefficients used to specify the set of
wavelets
Kind of weight: Weight function for anomalous data
(i.e.Huber/Thomson)
Threshold: Threshold level for identifying anomalous data
In the Domain frame, specify the domain for the wavelet filtering by
clicking the corresponding checkbox.
In the Apply To frame in the lower left, select the signal to be filtered by
clicking the corresponding check box. To run the filter, click the OK
button. Only one channel can be filtered at a time.
Note: The filtered data are displayed in a new frame as a new time series.
Select the File | Save menu command to save this time series into a new
file. The suffix _sav is appended to the name of the new time series file,
but before the file extension.

Notch Filtering
This tool, accessed with the Tool | Notch Filtering menu command,
provides a recursive (IIR) filter for notch filtering a subset of frequency
components from the observed data. The filter is applied in the forward
and reverse direction in order to avoid the application of a phase shift to
the data.

A guide to using WinGLink

Time SeriesMT 4-9

In the Notch Settings frame, enter the bandwidth value of the notch. In
the right frame, enter a subset of frequency values to be notched. Enter
the value and then click the Add button.
In the Apply To frame, select the signals to be filtered by clicking the
appropriate check box. To run the filter, click the OK button.
Note: A backup of each original file is created for each filtered channel.
These backup files are stored in the same folder as the original. A popup
message appears following the filtering operation indicating the new file
name.

Time Shifting
This tool is useful for synchronizing different signals. To open the Time
Shifting window, select the Tools | Time Shifting menu command:

In the Time Shift field, enter a value in seconds (decimal) for the shift
which is to be applied.

4-10 Time SeriesMT

A guide to using WinGLink

Note: The shift value can also be negative; in this case, a random signal
is added to the beginning of the time series. The random signal samples
are calculated by adding to the first sample of the time series its own
value times a pseudo-random number which is uniformly distributed
between -0.001 and 0.001.
In the Apply To frame, select the signals to be shifted by clicking the
appropriate check box. To shift the series, click the OK button.
Note: A backup of each original file is created for each shifted channel.
These backup files are stored in the same folder as the original. A popup
message appears following the shifting operation indicating the new file
name.

Extracting Segments
Extracting Segments from Time Series
The Extract Segments function, accessed with the Tools | Extract
Segment menu command, is used to extract a segment from a time
series using the number of seconds from the first sample as the limit for
the extraction:

Enter the start and end times of in the respective fields at the top of the
window.
To update the header with the new acquisition times, select the checkbox
provided for this purpose.
In the Apply To frame, select the signals from which time series are to be
extracted by clicking the appropriate check boxes. Click the OK button
to extract the time series.
Note: The extracted data are displayed in new frames as new time series.
Select the File | Save menu command to save the new time series to a
new file. The suffix _sav is appended to the name of the new time series
file, but before the file extension.

A guide to using WinGLink

Time SeriesMT 4-11

Extracting Segment from Date

This tool differs from the previous one in the format of the limits used in
the extraction. In this case, the absolute date and time are used as the start
time and end time.
To open the tool, select the Tools | Extract Segment from Date menu
command:

Enter the start and end dates and times of in the respective fields at the
top of the window.
To update the header with the new acquisition times, select the checkbox
provided for this purpose.
In the Apply To frame, select the signals from which time series are to be
extracted by clicking the appropriate check boxes. Click the OK button
to extract the time series.
Note: The extracted data are displayed in new frames as new time series.
Select the File | Save menu command to save the new time series to a
new file. The suffix _sav is appended to the name of the new time series
file, but before the file extension.

Inverting Polarity
The Invert Polarity tool, accessed with the Tools | Invert Polarity
menu command, changes the sign of the selected data signals, i.e. the
signal is rotated by 180 degrees:

4-12 Time SeriesMT

A guide to using WinGLink

In the Apply To frame, select the signals to be inverted by selecting the

appropriate check boxes. To invert the time series, click the OK button.
Note: A backup of each original file is created for each inverted channel.
These backup files are stored in the same folder as the original. A popup
message appears following the shifting operation indicating the new file
name.

Computing Differences
Channel Difference
This tool, accessed with the Tools | Channel Difference menu
command, provides a useful function for data quality control for
homogeneous signals. It is used to compute the difference between two
channels. The result can be treated like a new time series.

In the Apply To frame, select the two signals for which the difference is
to be calculated by selecting the desired check boxes. To compute the
difference between the two selected time series, click the OK button.
Note: The new time series generated with the tool is displayed in the first
free frame and can be saved by selecting the File | Save menu command.

A guide to using WinGLink

Time SeriesMT 4-13

First Difference
This tool, accessed with the Tools | First Difference menu command,
computes the first difference of a channel, subtracting each sample from
the previous one.

In the Apply To frame, select the signal to be processed by clicking the

appropriate check boxes. To run the tool, click the OK button
Note: The new time series generated with the tool is displayed in the first
free frame and can be saved by selecting the File | Save menu command.

Correlation
Raw Correlation
The Raw Correlation tool provides a powerful function for evaluating
the information shared by two channels (e.g. it can be used to test the
synchronization of signals). The correlation function can be applied to a
single channel (auto-correlation) or to a pair (cross-correlation).
If the maximum in the cross-correlation between two signals occurs at
sample number 0, the two signals are perfectly synchronized; the shape
of the cross-correlation is dependent on their spectral content (e.g. the
auto-correlation of a white random signal is an impulse).
Access the Raw Correlation tool with the Tools | Raw Correlation
menu command:

The Raw Correlation tool computes the auto- or cross-correlation of the

selected signals using the number of samples displayed in the main

4-14 Time SeriesMT

A guide to using WinGLink

window. In order to compute the raw correlation over a wider range of

samples, change the value in the # of Points drop-down list in the upper
left area of the main window.
In the Apply To frame, select one (auto-correlation) or two (crosscorrelation) signals to be processed by selecting the appropriate check
boxes. To perform the correlation calculation, click the OK button.
A new window containing the auto- or cross-correlation curve now
opens. The value and position of the maximum are displayed in the lower
right; the value and position at the current mouse position are displayed
in the lower left.

Stacked Correlation
This tool differs from Raw Correlation in that it computes auto- and
cross-correlation over the entire signals. The signals are divided into
windows of size equal to the number of samples set in the # of points
drop-down list. The correlation is computed for each window and the
results averaged to output a stacked correlation.
Access the tool with the Tools | Stacked Correlation function:

A guide to using WinGLink

Time SeriesMT 4-15

In the Apply To frame, select one or two signals to be processed by

enabling the appropriate check boxes. To compute the stacked
correlation, click the OK button.
A new window containing the auto- or cross-correlation curve opens. The
value and position of the maximum is displayed in the lower right area of
the window; the value and position at the current mouse position are
displayed in the lower left area of the window.

Spectra
Raw Spectra
Select the Display | Raw Spectra menu command to compute and
display the frequency domain spectra of the displayed channel samples
based on the currently displayed data.
The spectra are calculated using the settings set with the Settings |
Spectra Options menu command:

The default spectra settings are 50% overlap and Hanning window.
at the of the main window to
Click the scroll buttons
scroll through the time series in the frequency domain in steps equal to
the value set in the # of Points drop-down list:

4-16 Time SeriesMT

A guide to using WinGLink

This tool provides a useful instrument for locating frequency domain

outliers in MT time series.
Select the Display | Time Series menu command to visualize the time
series segment which corresponds to the current raw spectra.
Note: The spectra are computed using the number of points set in the # of
Points drop-down list.

Stacked Spectra
Select the Display | Stacked Spectra menu command to compute and
display spectra over the entire time series using the spectra parameters set
using the Settings | Spectra Settings menu command:
To find spectral peaks, the user can move the cursor over the spectra
curves: Current frequency and amplitude values are displayed in the
lower left.

A guide to using WinGLink

Time SeriesMT 4-17

Spectrogram
The Spectrogram tool is a powerful utility for checking the temporal
variations of the spectral content of a signal because, in a spectrogram,
the horizontal scale is the time axis and the vertical scale is the frequency
axis.
The time domain signal is divided into n windows of sample length equal
to the value set in the # of Points drop-down list; the spectra of all
windows are computed and displayed side by side.
Select Tools | Spectrogram to open a new window which displays the
spectrogram:

4-18 Time SeriesMT

A guide to using WinGLink

As explained in the following, the number of points used in each spectra

computation is, in the frequency domain, equal to one half the number of
values set in the # of Points drop-down list. This is due to the following:
Because the time series contains real values, the transformation is even
(symmetric with respect to the y axis) for the amplitude and odd
(symmetric with respect to the origin) in phase. Because the spectrogram
is a representation of the power spectra (i.e. the power of the amplitude),
only half the number of points are needed - those for the positive axis of
the frequencies.
Select the channel to be displayed in the upper left menu of the
spectrogram window.
To change the number of points used for each spectrum, select a different
value in the # of Points drop-down list (the number of samples used in
the FFT is two times this value).
Click the
button to edit the color range used in the display. Select
the check box in the bottom right to reverse the frequency scale.
The frequency value, and date and time at the current mouse position are
displayed in the lower left part of the window.
As with the other spectra options, the window function and overlap used
in the spectra calculation can be set in the Spectra Settings window,
opened with the Settings | Spectra Options menu command.

Batch Functions
The Time Series tool offers a number of batch functions which can be
used to simultaneously perform any of a number of different functions on
multiple time series. To access the batch functions, close any open times
series with the File | Close menu command. The Batch menu item then
appears in the main menu:

A guide to using WinGLink

Time SeriesMT 4-19

The arrows to the right of each menu item open a drop-down list from
which the desired data type can be selected:

Note: Not all functions are available for all data types.

Decimation
This tool generates new decimated time series files from the original one.
A decimation factor of 2 is repeatedly applied to the signal until the 10th
level of decimation is reached.
In the left part of the window, select the drive and folder that contains the
time series files. To the right of the drop-down list for the drive, select
the time series format of the files that are to be selected in the field in the
center of the window. Click the OK button to start decimation of the
selected files.

Extraction
Use this tool to extract time series segments which cover a given time
interval from a subset of time series. The limits used for the extraction
are the absolute date and time. The extracted time series are written to
new files.
Select the appropriate equipment type in the Select Equipment frame.

4-20 Time SeriesMT

A guide to using WinGLink

In the Select Files frame, choose the drive and folder, then select the
desired file extension and the list of original files by clicking the
appropriate check boxes. A brief description (file name, start date and
time, end date and time) of the selected files is displayed in the upper left
window.
In the lower left fields, enter the desired values for start and end times.
Click the OK button to extract the data.

MultiChannel Time Shift

Use the Batch File | MultiChannel Time Shift menu command to
perform a shift operation on selected EMI MT1 and Phoenix V8 time
series files.

MultiChannel Extract Segment

Use the Batch File | MultiChannel Time Shift menu command to
perform a shift operation on selected EMI MT1 and Phoenix V8 time
series files.

MultiChannel Extraction Table

A guide to using WinGLink

Time SeriesMT 4-21

5: Cascade Decimation

MT

Overview
WinGLinks Cascade Decimation program uses the cascade decimation
processing method to generate cross-powers from MT time series files.
The program also provides an option for using coherence robust
processing to further improve data quality, though this option
considerably lengthens processing times.
Execution of the actual processing routines occurs in batch mode using
parameter files which are created using a Wizard interface, which is an
integral part of the Cascade Decimation program.

Input Data
The program supports the following time series formats:

EMI MT-1, EMI MT-24

Metronix (ADU-06)

Phoenix (V5)

Output Data
Processed data are output both as binary weighted cross-power files
(*.bxp), which can then be edited using WinGLinks Cross Power tool, as
well as standard EDI files, which can be directly imported into
WinGLink or opened in WinGLinks Data Analysis tool.

About Command Files

A single RCD command file may be used to process a maximum of two
sites, i.e. local and remote and, depending on the data source, up to three
different frequency bands. The names of the sites, the corresponding time
series paths, and the relevant parameters to use are all saved in the textbased command file. The processing routine, which is implemented as an
external executable file, accesses the command files during program
execution.

A guide to using WinGLink

Cascade Decimation MT 5-1

Getting Started with Cascade Decimation

Opening Cascade Decimation
After opening WinGLink in tool mode, select MT in the left panel of the
tool form, select Field Processing in the left frame, and click the arrow
to the left of

Note: For information on starting WinGLink in Tool Mode, refer to the

Getting Started With WinGLink chapter of this manual.
The program opens with a message alerting you to the fact that an RCD
command must be created for each set of sites:

Confirm with OK to acknowledge the info box and open the main
program interface:

5-2 Cascade Decimation MT

A guide to using WinGLink

This main program interface is used to select the command files to be

used for data processing. Use the path navigation controls provided in the
upper part of the window to select the folders which contain the desired
command files. Any RCD files found in a given folder are listed in the
Parameter Files field. Use the arrow button to select a file for
processing. Files can be removed from the Selected for Batch Run field
with the Delete key.
Note: It is not necessary that all RCD files to be processed be located in
the same folders. To select files from different folders, after selecting one
RCD file, use the navigation controls to navigate to the folder which
contains the next.

Creating a New Command File

If working with the Cascade Decimation program for the first time or to
create a new RCD command file, first use the path navigation controls
provided in the upper part of the window to specify the folder in which
the file is to be created. Then click the New button to open the RCD File
Wizard, which will guide you through the file creation process:

A guide to using WinGLink

Wizard window 1: File type and processing parameters

Wizard window 2: Weighting and processing types

Wizard window 3: Time series selection

Wizard window 4: Channel mapping

Cascade Decimation MT 5-3

Wizard Window 1: File Type and Processing Parameters

In the Parameters File field, enter the name of the RCD file which is to
be created. The selection made in the Time Series Type drop-down list
determines what other options are displayed on this first window:
-

For E.M.I. MT-1 and MT-24 data, options are provided for
specifying the number of sites to be processed as well as the number
of frequency bands as shown above.

For Phoenix V5 data, only the number of sites must be specified.

For Metronix ADU06 data, in addition to the number of sites to be

processed and the number of frequency bands, specify whether a
default set of calibration files should be used if the calibration file
specified in the file headers is sensor.cal:
According to the system manufacturer, there is generally very little
difference between sensors. The standard calibration files, which
were provided by the manufacturer, generally provide accurate
results for most coils. For maximum accuracy, however, we
recommend using the calibration files provided with the coils.

After making the desired selections, click the Next button to advance to
the second window of the Parameters File Wizard:

5-4 Cascade Decimation MT

A guide to using WinGLink

Wizard Window 2: Weighting and Processing Types

In the Weighting Type frame, specify the type of weighting to be

performed.
In the Robust Processing frame, enable or disable robust processing for
the site(s) being processed.
The Robust Maximization Type drop-down list offers a number of
different maximization types for selection:

These maximization types differ as follows:

A guide to using WinGLink

Type

Method

1)-MCOH local E-local H

Combine the weighting factor of scheme 2

with that of scheme 3

2)-MCOH local Ex-local H

Use MULTIPLE COHERENCE of Ex with

the total MAGNETIC field

3)-MCOH local Ex-local H

Use MULTIPLE COHERENCE of Ey with

the total MAGNETIC field

4)-MCOH local H-remote

Use the combined weighting factor of the

MULTIPLE COHERENCE of Rx with the
total MAGNETIC field with the
MULTIPLE COHERENCE of Ry with the
total MAGNETIC field.

5)-MCOH local E-remote

Use the combined weighting factor of the

MULTIPLE COHERENCE of Rx with the
total ELECTRIC field with the MULTIPLE
COHERENCE of Ry with the total
ELECTRIC field.

Cascade Decimation MT 5-5

6)-PCOH local E-local H

Combine the weighting factor of scheme 7

with that of scheme 8

Note: If robust processing is enabled for either of the two sites, the time
series of both sites must be synchronized.
After setting the weighting type and robust processing options, click the
Next button to advance to the next window of the wizard:

Wizard Window 3: Time Series Selection

The third window of the wizard, which is used to select the data to be
processed, varies depending on the type of equipment selected in the first
window. The windows associated with each of the four equipment types
currently supported are described below:
EMI MT-1

Click the Add Files button to open the EMI MT-1 time series selection
window. Note that when clicking the Add Files button, you must
select from the drop-down list which appears the time series set to which
the data are to be added:

5-6 Cascade Decimation MT

A guide to using WinGLink

Select the time series for each data set and for each band. Select the band
using the drop-down list in the upper left corner of the time series
selection window. The path to the sensor calibration files for all coils
used in the sounding must be specified in the Sensors Path field at the
bottom of the window.

EMI MT-24
The main window of the EMI-24 time series selection interface is nearly
identical to that for EMI-MT1 data shown above. Unlike EMI-MT1 time
series files, which contain all data associated with a given sounding, each
component of an MT24 sounding is stored in a separate file. Thus,
instead of selecting a single time series file, it is necessary to select an
entire set. This is accomplished using an .SRE (survey) file. An SRE file
is nothing more than a list of file names with their respective absolute file
paths. Shown below are the contents of a sample SRE file:
E:\Survey_01\RX01\rx01_1.t05
E:\Survey_01\RX01\rx01_2.t05
E:\Survey_01\RX01\rx01_3.t05

A guide to using WinGLink

Cascade Decimation MT 5-7

E:\Survey_01\RX01\rx01_4.t05
E:\Survey_01\RX01\rx01_5.t05

Note: SRE files must be manually created for each set of time series data.
To select the SRE file for a given time series set and band, select the
desired band from the Band drop-down list and then click the Add
Files button, selecting the desired time series set in the process:

Repeat this process for each band and data set. Specify the sensor path to
complete the file selection process:

Phoenix V5
As it is not necessary to specify a frequency band when processing
Phoenix V5 data, time series selection is limited to the selection of the
time series files, one file for each site:

5-8 Cascade Decimation MT

A guide to using WinGLink

Metronix ADU06
Metronix files, like EMI MT24 files, each contain data associated with a
separate channel. For Metronix files, however, the Cascade Decimation
program automatically generates a survey file which contains the paths of
the respective files. As with the other file types, click the Add Files
button to open the TS Selector window:

This window contains four frames:

-

Folders: Contains all sites which have been added by the user

ADU ID: Station ID of the selected site

Run: Run number of the selected site

Band: Frequency band of the selected site

Next, click the Add folder site button to add time series files to the
selector window:

A guide to using WinGLink

Cascade Decimation MT 5-9

Navigate to the folder which contains the desired time series files. Click
the OK button to accept the selection and close the window. In the TS
Selector window, now click the folder which was just added: all time
series contained in the folder are now listed by station ID, run number
and frequency band:

Select time series for each site and band. Note that the time series added
to the TS Selector window are retained for future use until cleared with
the Delete Selection button.

5-10 Cascade Decimation MT

A guide to using WinGLink

File sets can be removed from the Survey File Set fields by clicking the
respective field with the right mouse button and selecting the Clear Time
Series Set shortcut menu.
After selecting the time series, click the Next button to advance to the
fourth Wizard window:

Wizard Window 4: Channel Mapping

The fourth and final window of the wizard is used define station mapping
and specify the site names. In the example shown below, the program has
automatically used the magnetic channels from the 2nd site as the remote
channels for the 1st site and vice versa.

Channel mapping can be changed by clicking a component name and

dragging it to the new position in the Reference Fields section of the
window. Channels can either be selected from the lists located under the
Time Series Channels heading, or channels which have already been
assigned a field in the Reference Fields area of the window can be
moved from one field to another.
The program responds to unexpected settings, e.g. placing an Hy
component on an Hz field with, a warming message:

A guide to using WinGLink

Cascade Decimation MT 5-11

Such reference field assignments may be necessary under certain

circumstances, e.g. when using non-standard field configurations.
Use the Band drop-down list to switch between the bands which have
been selected for processing. After assigning the reference fields for each
band, click the Finish button to complete the Wizard.

Processing Data
Upon completion of the Wizard, the Cascade Decimation program
returns to the main window. The just-created RCD file, as well as any
other RCD files present in the current folder, are available for selection.
Use the button to move the RCD files to be used to process data to the
Selected for Batch Run frame of the window:

Click the Run button to begin processing of all selected RCD files.
Depending on the set processing parameters, the size of the time series
files and the number of bands to be processed, processing time may be
considerable. During processing, a DOS command window will appear
on the screen; once processing has completed, the program window
closes. Closing this window with the mouse will prematurely terminate
data processing.
Upon successful completion of processing, an EDI file and a BXP (crosspower) file are output to the same folder as the RCD file. BXP files can
be opened in WinGLinks Cross-Power Editor program; EDI files can
either be edited in WinGLinks Data Analysis program or imported
directly into a WinGLink database.

5-12 Cascade Decimation MT

A guide to using WinGLink

6: Cross-Power Editor

MT

Overview
WinGLinks Cross-Power Editor provides an easy-to-use interface for
editing the cross powers generated by WinGLinks Cascade Decimation
program. The resistivity and phase values at a given frequency typically
consist of a number of samples. The Cross-Power Editor is used to edit
the individual samples. Upon completion of editing, the average values at
each frequency are used to generate an EDI file which can then be
opening in the Data Analysis tool for MT data or imported directly into
WinGLink as station data.

Supported Formats
The Cross-Power Editor can be used to edit the BXP files generated by
the Cascade Decimation program. In addition, the program can also edit
.MT and .AMT files generated by the Phoenix V5 processing software.

Getting Started with the Cross-Power Editor

Starting the Cross-Power Editor
After opening WinGLink in tool mode, select MT in the left panel of the
tool form, select Field Processing in the left frame, and click the arrow
to the left of

A guide to using WinGLink

Cross-Power Editor MT 6-1

Note: For information on starting WinGLink in Tool Mode, refer to the

Getting Started With WinGLink chapter of this manual.
The Cross-Power Editor opens:

The program window is divided into four panels. The two panels on the
left side are used to display the average rho and phase values at each
frequency; the two on the right are used to display all samples at a given
frequency.

Loading a Cross-Power File

1. Click the
button to open the dialog box for selecting the
cross-power files to be opened.
2. Click the
button in the Files of Type dropdown list to
display the supported input file formats. Make the appropriate
selection:
3. Use the file navigation controls in the left part of the window to
browse the directory structure until the files you wish to edit are
displayed in the File | Site frame of the window.
4. Select the check box to the left of each file you wish to open.

Note: The Cross-Power Editor can be used to open more than

one file at the same time. If you do so, the opened files will be
merged into a single file when the results are saved. This option

6-2 Cross-Power Editor MT

A guide to using WinGLink

should be used only to merge cross-powers for the same station

contained in different input files.
5. If desired, specify an angle for spectra rotation in the
appropriate field.
Note that the rotation is returned to the principle axis when the
file is saved regardless of any setting made here. Rotation
options are provided in the Data Analysis tool, the Soundings
module and when importing EDI files into a WinGLink
database.
6. Click the Open button to open the cross-power file
for editing.

Editing a Cross-Power File

To begin editing, select a frequency from the left side of the Cross-Power
Editor by clicking the mouse anywhere in the average resistivity panel of
the editor, i.e. the upper left panel. The data sample at the frequency
closest to the mouse location is selected. The currently selected frequency
is displayed in red in both the resistivity as well as the phase panels; the
blue bars correspond to the yx component, the green bars to the xy
component:

Masking/Unmasking Components
1. In the left window, use the mouse to click the resistivity or
phase of the frequency to edit. The color of the error bars for
the selected frequency changes to red. All components
associated with a given frequency, i.e. resistivity and phase of
both xy and yx components, are masked/unmasked together.
2. Click the
button on the toolbar to mask/unmask individual
component in the right window, or
3. Click the
button to mask/unmask a group of adjacent
individual components in the right window.

A guide to using WinGLink

Cross-Power Editor MT 6-3

4. The disabled components are displayed in gray. The results of

the editing are shown in real time in the left window:

Saving the Edited Results

Click the

button to save the edits.

Files can be saved either as BXP or EDI files:

6-4 Cross-Power Editor MT

BXP files
Contain all original file information, i.e. information about
which samples have been disabled. These files can be read
into the Cross-Powers Editor at a later time for further
editing.

EDI files
Contain the final averaged results in EDI format. These files
are used as the input source for the "Data Analysis" program,
an MT Tools program, and can also be imported directly into
WinGLink as station data.

A guide to using WinGLink

7: Data Analysis

MT

Overview
The Data Analysis program is used to edit and analyze individual stations
as standalone datasets. The user interface is very similar to that of the MT
Soundings module, which can be accessed while in Database Mode, and
offers many of the same functions. Because this program is intended for
performing quality control and editing operations, however, the menu
commands available in Tools Mode are somewhat limited, i.e. this tool
does not include 1D modeling.

Supported Formats
The Data Analysis program can only be used to import standard EDI
files.

Getting Started With the Data Analysis Program

Opening the Program
After opening WinGLink in Tool Mode, select MT in the left panel of
the tool form, select Field Processing in the left frame, and click the
arrow to the left of

Note: For information on starting WinGLink in Tool Mode, refer to the

Getting Started With WinGLink chapter of this manual.

File Selection
On program startup, the Data Analysis program opens with a dialog box
prompting you to choose either individual station mode or batch mode.
This second option, as will be described later, can be used to perform a
specific function on multiple stations. To get started wit the program,
select the Open stations option and click the OK button:

A guide to using WinGLink

Data Analysis MT 7-1

The program opens the File Selection window. This can be used to select
any EDI files accessible from the computer:

In the Plot Parameter area of the window, you can specify whether the
plot parameters should be recalculated, and, if so, whether impedances or
spectra, if present, are to be used. The options function as follows:

Plot Param.
Option

When to use

No recalculation

To import the plot parameters saved in the EDI file

without recalculating them from existing impedances
or spectra
If plot parameters are missing, the program calculates
them from existing impedances.
If impedances also are missing, plot parameters and
impedances are calculated from existing spectra.

Recalculate from
existing
Impedances

To compute plot parameters from existing impedances

without recalculating impedances from spectra.

Recalculate from
existing spectra

To recalculate plot parameters and impedances from

spectra.

Rotation
In the Rotation area of the window, specify how impedances and tipper
are to be rotated upon import. In doing so, note the following:

7-2 Data Analysis MT

A guide to using WinGLink

If there is a ZROT block in the EDI file, the data are first back rotated
to 0 degrees. Thus, to match the rotation in the EDI file, you must use the
User Defined field to specify the angle to which the impedances are to be
rotated. The angle specified here is used for all frequencies for the given
file.
When rotating to the principle axis, the program rotates the impedance
matrix to the maximum and minimum values of Zxy and Zyx,
respectively.
If there are tipper data present in the EDI file, these data are likewise
back rotated to 0 degrees from the angle specified in the TROT block.
If there is no TROT block, it is assumed that the data are already at 0
degrees and no back rotation is performed. The ZROT block is NOT used
to specify the tipper rotation in the case that no TROT block is present.
The EDI files of stations which were rotated contain ZROT and TROT
fields with values corresponding to the station rotations.
Note: When using the Data Analysis program, tipper should be rotated to
strike.

Saving Data
Edited station data can be saved to EDI files from the main window of
the Data Analysis program with the File | Save As or File | Save All
menu commands. To prevent the accidental overwriting of the original
data files, the Save All command saves files with the extension EDE.

Data Rotation & Decomposition

Should it be necessary to rotate a station after the EDI file has been
opened in the Data Analysis program, the Curves Recalculation window,
which contains the same rotation options as the File Selection window
described above, can be opened by selecting the Rotate menu command
on the main menu:

In addition to standard rotation, this window provides an option for

performing LaTorraca decomposition.

A guide to using WinGLink

Data Analysis MT 7-3

Correcting Spectra
WinGLink reads and writes stacked spectra from/to EDI files using a
[Real+Imaginary] spectral conjugation structure. If stacked spectra are
packed in an EDI file using a different structure, the MT parameters may
be incorrectly displayed.
When spectra are packed properly, the phase components are displayed
by WinGLink in the correct quadrants, i.e. +45 for one component, and 135 for the other, and predicted coherencies will be consistent. This may
not be the case when the spectra packing is made using a different
conjugation structure.
The Fix Spectra function, accessed with the menu command by the same
name, allows the user to correct the spectral set by swapping or
conjugating the spectra packing:

The options in the upper part of the window serve the following function:

Option

Result

Swap

changes (A+B) into (-B+A)

Conjugation

changes (A+B) into ( A-B)

The proper spectra packing is achieved by combining these corrections in

an appropriate sequence.

Viewing Data and Plot Parameters

The Data Analysis View Form
The following figure shows the Data Analysis view form:

7-4 Data Analysis MT

A guide to using WinGLink

TE/TM mode
selector

Click this button to change which curve corresponds to

TE mode. In the above example, the xy curve is selected
for TE mode (therefore, the yx is for TM mode)

1D model
validation

This text is displayed whenever the 1D model of the

station needs to be recalculated because a change was
made on the curve.

Invariant
display

If this option is checked, the invariant curves for

resistivity and phase are shown. The invariant resistivity
is calculated as the geometric mean of rhoXY and
rhoYX; the invariant phase is calculated as the arithmetic
mean of the two.

Smooth type

Indicates the algorithm used to calculate the smoothed

curves.

Current
rotation

Indicates the rotation (if any) applied to the impedances.

XY, YX
curves

The original curves are displayed in gray, the edited

curves in red (the XY) or blue (YX); the continuous
curves represent the smoothed data.

Static
stripping

If present, this text indicates that the edited curves have

been static stripped.

Data Display Options

The options available under the View menu can be used to select from
various displays:

A guide to using WinGLink

Resistivity and phase

Resistivity, phase and strike

Interpretational quantities

Polar diagrams

Resistivity, phase and polar diagrams

Data Analysis MT 7-5

Resistivity, phase and induction arrows

Data quality

Tzx and Tzy

Each of the above selections made under the View menu applies to the
current window. The selection can be applied to all open windows with
the View | Update All View menu command.

View Options
Display parameters, e.g. ranges, axes, curve types, can be set in the
Settings window, opened with the View | View Options menu
command:

Settings made here are applied not only to all open windows, but are also
used the next time the Data Analysis program is started.

Spectral Analysis
The Spectral Analysis function, which is only available for soundings
which have spectral data, is opened with the View | Spectral Analysis
menu command. This function, used to compare a number of spectral
characteristics between two channels, serves as a tool for gathering
insight on data quality.
Upon selection of the menu command, the Spectral Analysis
Selection window opens. Select the channels to be evaluated in the
provided drop-down lists. A rotation angle, if desired can be selected in
the Rotation Angle frame of the window.

7-6 Data Analysis MT

A guide to using WinGLink

Transfer function ranges can be set for both amplitude and phase by
clicking the Settings button.
Click the OK button to open the Spectral Analysis window for the
selected channels:

Editing Data
The interactive Sounding Editing form is opened with the Edit menu
command while a sounding window is selected:

A guide to using WinGLink

Data Analysis MT 7-7

The form includes commands for performing a number of different

editing functions. After clicking any of the function buttons at the right
edge of the Edit window, the remaining buttons, with the exception of the
Cancel button, are disabled. The selected function remains active until
either the respective function button is pressed again or until the Cancel
button is pressed.
Changes made to the curves with the edit functions available here are not
actually applied to the data until the Close button is used to close the Edit
window and the user acknowledges the changes in the Exit Editing
window.
In addition to the actual curves, the status bar at the bottom of the Edit
window provides additional information on the curves as well as with
respect to the current mouse position:
-

f = frequency at current cursor position

Rho = resistivity value at current cursor position

Shift xy = static shift of xy curve

Shift yx = static shift of yx curve

Smooth = indicates type of curve smoothing, if any

Rot: rotation type and/or value

Selecting Data Points

Single point selection
Click to select/unselect for editing single data points on the curve.
Multiple points selection
Click to select/unselect for editing all data points included in a userdefined range: click and drag the mouse to define the area.

Zooming in on the Curve

Zoom in

7-8 Data Analysis MT

A guide to using WinGLink

1. Click a point in the curve diagram and release the button.

2. Move the mouse to define the zoom area.
3. Click and release the left mouse button.
Zoom out
Click to reset the previous view.
Note: this button is available only after the Zoom in button has been
used. It remains available until the original curve size is restored.

Saving Editing Changes

Save button
Saves the editing changes. These changes must be confirmed when
closing the station window in the main menu in order to store them in the
database.

Editing Data Points

Masking data: Using the appropriate buttons, it is

possible to mask individual modes at each frequency, either across all
modes or for individual modes. Changes made here are reflected
throughout the database, i.e. in the 2D Inversion and Pseudo-Section
modules.
Note that the Mask Tipper button is enabled only when tipper display is
enabled using the drop-down list at the top of the screen:

Select the Tzx & Tzy display option to display the two tipper components
in separate windows.
The vertical scaling of the tipper magnitude and Tzx/Tzy components can
, which appears
be set using the Tipper Vertical Scaling button
towards the left end of the tool bar when either Tipper Magnitude or
Tzx/Tzy are visible. Clicking this button opens the Tipper Scaling dialog
box:

Settings made here are retained in subsequent WinGLink sessions.

A guide to using WinGLink

Data Analysis MT 7-9

The MT masking buttons are used in the same way as the TEM masking
buttons, see description above.

Shift data points

1. Click and select the data points to be shifted by single or
multiple selection.
2. Move the data points to the desired positions and click the left
mouse button.
3. Click the Shift button again to confirm the action.
Calculate and display a smoothed curve
Click the button to display the smoothing options
Cancel the current action
Undo button
Undo all the editing changes made since the last time the curve was
saved. All editing steps can be undone provided the station has not yet
been saved since editing.

Swapping
Swapping allows you to assign a data point of the XY curve to the YX
curve (at the same frequency) and vice versa. This is useful where
analytic rotation results in inconsistent mode assignment.

To Swap the Data Points of Apparent Resistivity or

Phase Curves:
1. Open the station or select its window if already open.
2. Select the Edit command from the main menu.
3. Click the

button.

4. Click the data point(s) you wish to swap with the left mouse
button.
5. Click the

button again.

To swap the entire curve, use the right mouse button at Step 4.

Static Stripping
Static stripping is an analytic technique for eliminating the frequencyindependent offset of one apparent resistivity curve from the other.

To Perform Static Stripping on an Apparent Resistivity

Curve:
1. Select the Edit command on the main menu.
2. Click the

7-10 Data Analysis MT

button.

A guide to using WinGLink

3. Click a data point on the curve and release the mouse button.
4. Move the curve to the desired location and click the left mouse
button.
5. Click the

button again.

Normally, you would select a point at the high-frequency end of the

curve. Practical experience suggests that most static shift cases result in
one curve being moved down relative to the other. You therefore move
the lower curve up to the higher one.
When the original apparent resistivity curve is dragged to its new
position, a scalar multiplier of the e-field value is derived. This is applied
to a recalculation of all the impedances of that sounding. Thus, when you
click Strip for the second time, you should see the hour-glass symbol,
indicating that this calculation is taking place. The curves are then
redrawn. Only the apparent resistivity curves are affected by this
procedure.
If the data show a very large static shift, or are strongly 3D at high
frequencies, the results can sometimes be unstable. You may need to
repeat the operation several times.

Static Shifting
Static shifting allows you to vertically shift all data points of a curve.

To Statically Shift a Curve:

1. Select the window with the sounding to edit
2. Select the Edit command on the main menu.
3. Click the

button.

4. Click one of the curves data points and release the button.
5. Using the mouse, move the curve to the desired location. The
amount of static shifting is displayed in the bottom of the
window:
This number is a scalar factor that multiplies the original
resistivity values of the curve. If equal to 1, the curve is not
shifted.
6. Click and release the left mouse button.
The apparent resistivity range changes so that the curves appear centered
in the display box.
A useful guide for determining the resistivity level to which a curve
should be shifted is obtained by displaying the pseudo-MT curve for a
co-located TDEM station.

To Reset the Static Shift to Zero:

1. Click the

A guide to using WinGLink

button.

Data Analysis MT 7-11

2.

to run Smoothing routines

to add/subtract 360 to phase data points

to show pseudo-MT curve from TDEM model

Calculating Smoothed Curves

Resistivity and phase smoothed curves can be calculated from the edited
curves using three different techniques. They are automatically updated
whenever further editing is made on the curves.

To (Re)calculate a Stations Smoothed Curves:

1. Open the station or select its window if already open.
2. Select the Edit command on the main menu.
3. Click the

button.

4. Select Smooth Options and click the OK button.

The available smoothing options are described below

Sutarno Phase Consistent Smoothing

This is an application of the Hilbert transform to give an apparent
resistivity curve from the phase curve. (Sutarno, D. and Vozoff, K., 1991,
Phase-smoothed robust M-estimation of magnetotelluric impedance
functions: Geophysics, 56, 1999-2007). It is used primarily to confirm
that apparent resistivity and phase are consistent.

D+ Smoothing
D+ relates apparent resistivity and phase of the same component (xy or
yx) through a D+ function. In essence, this finds the one-dimensional
earth which best fits both parameters. The procedure has been shown to
be valid for most 2D data and for some 3D cases.
The errors attributed to the data can be those estimated by the original
data processing or can be imposed by the user. In the first case, the two
parameters (apparent resistivity and phase errors) are left at the default
value of -1. In the second case, the user can estimate the errors (e.g.
10%). By appropriately selecting errors, one parameter can be downweighted at the expense of the other. Reference: Beamish, D., and
Travassos, J.M., 1992, The use of the D+ solution in magnetotelluric
interpretation. Jo. Appl. Geophys., 29, 1-19.

Numerical Smoothing
Numerical smoothing is an FFT-based low-pass filter which calculates an
independent smooth curve for each of the four components. It does not
have an underlying geophysical process to support it, but may
nevertheless be useful in certain noisy situations. The user selects a
smoothing factor which gives an appropriate result. 0 gives no smoothing
at all, and useful values are typically << (half the number of data points).

7-12 Data Analysis MT

A guide to using WinGLink

Reference: Press et al., 1989. Numerical Recipes, pub. Cambridge

University Press, Section 13.9.
As is described in the MT Soundings and MT 2D Inversion chapters
of this manual, smooth curves created while in Database Mode can be
used as the data source for 2D MT modeling.

Adding 360 to Phase

This feature is useful in the case of phase curves which wrap around the
normal -180 to +180 range:

To Add 360 to Data Points of a Phase Curve:

1. Select the Edit command from the main menu.
2. Click the

button.

3. Select the data points of the phase curve you want to shift.
4. Click the

button again.

To Subtract 360 from Data Points of a Phase Curve:

1. Select the Edit command from the main menu.
2. Click the

button.

3. Select the data points of the phase curve you want to shift.
4. Click the

button again.

Batch Commands
Most of the edit commands available in the standard operating mode of
the Data Analysis program can also be performed as a batch operation on
a set of EDI files. While it is not possible to achieve the same level of
accuracy for some commands as is possible in actual Edit mode (e.g.
masking), batch operation considerably accelerates initial editing.
The following functions are available in batch mode:
-

Printing

Rotating

Smoothing

Masking

Static stripping

Static shifting

To Access the Batch Commands:

1. Close all open stations.
2. The Batch Tools command appears on the main menu.
3. Select the desired operation.

A guide to using WinGLink

Data Analysis MT 7-13

4. Enter the parameters as requested.

The parameters requested in the dialog windows for the individual batch
functions are largely self-explanatory. Generally, these require the user to
specify the files to which the batch function is to be applied and any
function-specific parameters. Shown below as an example is the window
for Batch Rotation:

Note: By default, the output path is identical to the input path. If you do
not wish to overwrite the original data, you must define a different output
path.

7-14 Data Analysis MT

A guide to using WinGLink

8: EDI Utilities

MT

Overview
WinGLink provides a number of tools for working with EDI files:

Convert to EDI

Split multi-site EDI files

Combine EDI

Dump EDI to text files

These tools are frequently needed when working with data which have
been output by system or processing software to a non-EDI format.
This chapter will cover the use of each of these tools.

Getting Started With the EDI Tools

Opening the EDI Tools
After opening WinGLink in Tool Mode, select MT in the left panel of
the tool form and select EDI Utilities in the left frame. The individual
EDI tools can then be selected by clicking the button to the left of each:

Note: For information on starting WinGLink in Tool Mode, refer to the

Getting Started With WinGLink chapter of this manual.

A guide to using WinGLink

EDI Utilities MT 8-1

Convert to EDI
The Convert to EDI program provides functionality for converting the
following file types to EDI format:

Imagem/Stratagem Z files

EMI AVG files (both MT1 and MT24)

EMI A01 files (MT 24 HF)

Zonge AVG files

Egbert Z files

Converting Files to EDI Format

After clicking the button to the left of Convert to EDI in the Tools
window, the program opens with the following window:

Associated with each of the file formats is a dialog window which takes
into account the specific characteristics of the selected file format, e.g.
channel mapping. Common to all of the dialog boxes are fields for
specifying input path and the output path.
The general procedure for converting to EDI is outlined below using the
Imagem/Stratagem interface as an example. While there are some
differences between this dialog and those provided for the other data
types, they are largely self-explanatory.

Converting Imagem/Stratagem Files to EDI:

1. In the Convert to EDI selection window, select the
Imagem/Stratagem Z files option from the Select source file
format drop-down list to open the conversion window:

2. Use the Browse buttons in the Input Path and Output Path
fields to set the respective paths for data input and output. As

8-2 EDI Utilities MT

A guide to using WinGLink

an alternative to specifying the output path, the Same as Input

path checkbox can be selected. In this case, the output path is
automatically set to the same path as that used for the input.
3. After selecting the input path, all files matching the filter string
specified in the Selection area of the dialog window are listed
for selection in the left box under the Source files column.
4. Use the mouse to select the z*.* files you wish to convert. For
multiple selections, hold down the <SHIFT> or the <CTRL>
keys on the keyboard while clicking the file names with the
mouse.
5. A red symbol appears to the left of the selected file names.
The equivalent output files, i.e. with the EDI extension, are
shown to the right under the Destination files column. The
names of the destination files can be edited by clicking. After
editing, confirm the new name with <Enter>. For a global view
of selected input and output files, click View Table
6. In the Settings section, enter the acquisition azimuth.
7. In the Fix Wrong Polarization section of the window, select
any channel that might have incorrect acquisition polarization
(inverted connectors). Alternatively, you may select the
Automatic option, and the conversion program will
automatically correct the polarization if it is incorrect.
Note: The manual option should only be used to fix field
settings known to be bad.
Note also that options in the Settings area are specific to
Imagem/Stratagem files. Different settings are provided for
other file types.
8. Click the Run button to start the conversion.
9. When finished, exit the program to return to the main Tools
menu.
10. The output EDI files can now be opened in the Data Analysis
program by selecting the Field Processing |
option in MT Tools for a quick check of
the converted files or imported into a WinGLink database.
Note: Source files may or may not contain station coordinate
information, e.g. due to acquisition system, processing software. In this
case, the output EDI files will not contain any information on the site
location. Site coordinate information must then be imported or added
after importing the EDI files by either importing a coordinate file or
manually editing the coordinate information in the Maps program.

Split Multi-Site/EDI Files

This tool is used to split:

A guide to using WinGLink

9-channel EDI files into two 7-channel EDI files

EDI Utilities MT 8-3

Multi-site EDI files into single-site EDI files

Multi-site, 9-channel EDI files into single, 7-channel EDI

files

Splitting Multi-Site/EDI Files

After clicking the button to the left of Split Multi-Site/EDI Files in the
Tools window, the program opens with the following window:

1. Select the source file and output path in the provided fields
2. Click the Split button split the files.
The output files are assigned the name of the source multi-site file plus a
numeric suffix in ascending order.
Example:
File ASD.EDI, containing 4 sites, will be split into the following 4 EDI
files:
ASD_1.EDI, ASD_2.EDI, ASD_3.EDI, ASD_4.EDI

Combine EDI
The Combine EDI tool merges EDI files containing data at different
frequencies for the same MT site. Such data may result from data
acquisition, data decimation or data processing. In this tool, each
component EDI file can be viewed, edited with frequency masking, and
eventually merged with other EDI files into output a single, consolidated
EDI file. The program interface includes functionality for displaying
coherencies or tipper magnitude.
Interactive, self-explanatory commands control the inclusion/exclusion of
each component EDI file from the set of files to be merged.

Combining EDI Files

1. Click the button to the left of Combine EDI in the Tools
window to open the Combine EDI interface.

8-4 EDI Utilities MT

A guide to using WinGLink

2. To begin work with the tool, select the File | Open menu
command and browse to the directory which contains the files
which are to be merged:

Use the <SHIFT> and <CONTROL> keys to select the desired

files. Note that you must select at least two files. All of the files
to be merged must be selected in a single operation. Each time
files are selected from the Open EDI Files window, any open
files are closed. Click Open to open the selected files in the
Combine EDI interface.
3. The selected files are now displayed, both as curves in the main
window and by file name in the File List window:

4. Curves associated with the files on the left side of the screen are
plotted in the main part of the window and can be edited (data
points masked) using the edit tools provided at the top of the
main window. Furthermore, files present on the left side of the
window are included in the merged file. Files on the right are
neither displayed nor included in the merged file. While editing
files, it is often useful to move some of the files to the righthand column with the arrow buttons to provide a better view of
the files being edited.
5. The file selected in the left-hand window is the file to which
edit operations are applied. Data points for this file are

A guide to using WinGLink

EDI Utilities MT 8-5

displayed in color:

6. To edit, i.e. mask data points, click the Edit button to enter edit
mode and click any of the data points associated with the
frequency to be masked. Masked points can be reactivated by
again clicking a data point at the given frequency. The Mask
All and Unmask All buttons can be used to mask or unmask all
data points associated with the current file.
To assist in the editing process, the merged XY and YX curves
resulting from the files present on the left side of the File List
window are, by default merged in real time. This function can
be disabled with the View | Show Stacked Curves menu
command.
Files, once edited, can be moved to the right side of the File
List window and unedited files moved to the left.
7. After making the desired edits, move all files to be included in
the merged EDI to the left side of the File List window.
Execute the File | Save as menu command to save the merged
file to a new file.

Dump EDI to Text File

Largely self-explanatory, this tool is used to output impedance values to
columnar text files. Output includes frequency and real and imaginary
components of impedance tensors and tipper as well as the respective
variances.
Select arrow to the left of the Dump EDI to Text File entry in the Tools
window to open the program interface:

8-6 EDI Utilities MT

A guide to using WinGLink

Enter the source and output folders, select the EDI files to be output as
text files and then click the Write files button to perform the conversion.

A guide to using WinGLink

EDI Utilities MT 8-7

9: TemMerge

TDEM

Overview: The TemMerge Program

The TemMerge program is used to convert raw, time-domain
electromagnetic data for most standard acquisition systems into a
common data exchange format. The program also includes basic editing
functionality and can be used to merge multiple soundings onto a single
curve.
TemMerge supports the following input formats:
- Geonics: PROTEM (TEM58, TEM57, TEM47 & TEM37 receivers)
- Sirotem: SIROTEM3 (SIROTEM2 not supported)
- Zonge: GDP-16/32
- Amira format
- Free format (space-, comma-, semicolon- or tab-delimited columnar
data)
The imported and merged data can be output to ASCII files in the
TemMerge format (*.TEM). The output files contain station and system
information, window times (corrected for system delays), voltage values
and apparent resistivity values.

Getting Started
This section provides an overview of the steps necessary to import a
standard system dump file into TemMerge and merge multiple soundings
onto a single curve.

Starting the Program

After opening WinGLink in tool mode, select EM in the left panel of the
tool form, select EM in the left frame, and click the arrow to the left of
.

A guide to using WinGLink

TemMerge TDEM 9-1

Note: For information on starting WinGLink in Tool Mode, refer to the

Getting Started with WinGLink chapter of this manual.

Importing System Dump Files

1. After starting TemMerge, the TDEM Data Type dialog box
opens. Select the appropriate file type and click the Browse
button:

2. TemMerge now prompts you to select the powerline frequency

at the acquisition site. The value selected here (50 or 60 Hz)
affects the repetition rates for Sirotem and Protem data. The
repetition rate for Zonge data is included in the file header, i.e.
the value selected here does not affect the resistivity calculation
for Zonge data.
3. Browse the directories in the Open File(s) dialog box and select
the file to be opened.
Note: The non-standard Protem format was implemented at the request
of a small group of users and does not reflect the format output by the
Protem system. For details, please contact Geosystem.

Importing Free-Format Text Files

Text files containing time, voltage and resistivity values in columnar
form can be imported into TemMerge. The data values on each line of

9-2 TemMerge TDEM

A guide to using WinGLink

data must be delimited by a space, comma, semicolon or tab character.

While this import option is a convenient way to import the occasional
text file into WinGLink (first by converting to a TEM file in TemMerge,
and then subsequently importing the TEM file into WinGLink),
processing a large number of text files is time-intensive due to the fact
that the text files do not contain any system information, e.g. loop
configuration and sizes, delays etc. This information must be entered
manually in the Edit window (see below).

The Data Records Selection Dialog Box

After selecting a file of any type (with the exception of FreeFormat), the
Data Records selection dialog box, shown below, opens.

This dialog box is the heart of the TemMerge program. Here, you can
edit system data for individual soundings, select the files to be merged,
and save and delete merged files. All soundings associated with a file
remain available for selection as long as the Data Records dialog box is
open. If the dialog box is closed, the file is removed from memory. Files
can be selected for import by selecting the File | Import menu command.
The Data Records dialog box contains three panels and five buttons:
All soundings contained in the dump file are listed in the Dumped panel.
The Data Records dialog box shown above contains a set of Sirotem data.
The records in the dump file are listed in the Dumped panel of the dialog
box. Although in principle the same, the individual data records for the
various system types are labeled slightly different as outlined below:
Sirotem:
Geonics:
Zonge: Run#
Amira: Run#

Group# Run # Gain Time series

Run# Line* Station Time series
Time** Group# Rep. Rate
Line* Station Time series

*Line = logger record # at line start

**Time = measurement time
Soundings which have been selected for merging are listed in the
Selected panel. All soundings listed in the Selected panel are plotted as

A guide to using WinGLink

TemMerge TDEM 9-3

voltage or resistivity vs. time in the main TemMerge window as blue

curves. The window supports multiple sounding curves.
Highlight one of the soundings listed in the Dumped panel and click the
button to open the Edit dialog box. Here, receiver, transmitter
and timing information can be set and individual measurement values
edited. The Edit dialog box is described in the Editing soundings section
of this chapter.
The merged soundings are listed in the Merged panel. Merged soundings
are plotted in the main TemMerge window as red curves. The window
supports multiple merged sounding curves.
and right
arrow buttons are used to move soundings
The left
between the Dumped and Selected panels. Note that the right button is
enabled only when soundings are listed in the Selected panel.
Use the

button to save a merged curve to a *.TEM file

button to remove a
(TemMerge exchange format) and the
merged curve from the Merged panel. These two buttons are enabled
only when merged curves are present in the Merged panel.

Selecting and Merging Soundings

Use the left and right arrow buttons as described above to move
soundings between the Dumped and Selected panels of the Data Records
dialog box. Soundings listed in the Selected panel are plotted in the main
TemMerge window.
Select individual soundings for merging in the Selected panel by clicking
soundings with the mouse. Multiple soundings can be selected by
clicking the soundings while holding down the Ctrl key on they
keyboard.
Provided the soundings were recorded with the same repetition rate and
delay, the soundings can be merged into a single curve using either the
Merge button or the commands available on the Merge menu:

Only if the repetition rates and delays are the same for all selected
soundings is the Merge button enabled.
TemMerge does provide special functionality for Geonics/Protem
soundings, which may be recorded at up to three different sampling rates.
Soundings sampled at each of the sampling rates can be merged into
single curves. The delays for each of the soundings must, however, be the
same.
Note: Delay times and repetition rates can be edited in the Data Record
dialog box, described in the Editing Sounding Records section of this
chapter.

9-4 TemMerge TDEM

A guide to using WinGLink

As seen on the Merge menu above, two merging algorithms are

available: Average and Polynomial. The selection made on the Merge
menu applies to merge operations performed with the Merge button.
Note that when using the polynomial merge function, if a negative
voltage is present at a given gate time in any of the soundings being
merged, that point is omitted.
Different combinations of soundings can be selected and merged in a
single session. The merged soundings can then each be saved to
individual TEM files using the Save button, as described below in the
Saving Merged Soundings section of this chapter.

Saving Merged Soundings

Merged soundings are saved to TemMerge (TEM) files in a two-step
process. First, header information is entered in a dialog box, then a path
and file name are specified.
After merging a sounding (or multiple soundings for the case of
Geonics/Protem data), click the Save button in the Data Records dialog
box to open the Header Info dialog box:

The information entered in the Header area of the window is stored in

the header block of the TEM file. These fields are intended to provide an
area for saving station information and, with the exception of the Tem_Id
field, are not used within WinGLink. The Tem_Id is used as the station
identifier in WinGLink, and is thus a mandatory field.
The fields in the Coordinates area of the window are used to specify
station coordinates after the file has been imported into WinGLink. Note
that stations coordinates stored in the metric format are imported into
WinGLink using the central meridian specified for the database. Thus,
when using metric coordinates, make certain that the central meridian to
which the station coordinates are mapped is the same as that used in the
WinGLink database.

A guide to using WinGLink

TemMerge TDEM 9-5

Header information stored in existing TEM files can be automatically

inserted into the fields in the Header Info window by selecting a file with
the Load button.
After completing the fields, click the OK button to open the standard
Windows dialog box for saving files.

Display Options
By default, all soundings, both individual and merged, are displayed
together in the workspace as Voltage [nV/A] vs. Time [ms]. Using the
menu items and button shown below, you can toggle the display between
voltage and resistivity:

Voltage values displayed as a red square represent negative voltage

values. The resistivity at negative voltage points is zero.
Select the Separate Merged Window menu command to display the
individual curves and merged curve in separate panels:

9-6 TemMerge TDEM

A guide to using WinGLink

Editing
TemMerge offers two different functions for editing the raw sounding
data: acquisition parameters can be edited via a dialog box and data
points can be masked in the sounding display window.

Editing Sounding Records

As already mentioned, click the Edit button located at the bottom of the
Data Records selection dialog box to open an edit dialog in which all
sounding parameters can be viewed and edited:

On the left half of the dialog box, acquisition system parameters can be
edited. Changes to parameters which are used in the calculation of the
resistivity are immediately reflected in the resistivity values displayed in
the right half of the dialog box. Note that resistivities are calculated using
the Sirotem late time formula shown below:
r = 6.32 x 10-12 x A2/3 x b4/3 x (V/I)-2/3 x t-5/3
where:

A guide to using WinGLink

r
A

=
=

b
V/I
t

=
=
=

apparent resistivity
effective loop area (turns area product) of the
receiver loop or coil
transmitter loop side length (meters)
transient response (volt/amp)
delay time from start of transient decay (secs)

TemMerge TDEM 9-7

Note: The time, voltage and resistivity values displayed on the right are
not editable.

Editing Sounding Curves

Once a sounding has been selected and moved to the Selected panel of
the Data Records dialog box, several masking functions can be used to
mask/unmask individual data points from the sounding. Masked points
are not included in either the merged sounding or in the .TEM file output
by TemMerge. The masking functions can be accessed either via the five
buttons at the left end of the toolbar or on the Edit menu:

From left to right, the masking buttons serve the following functions:

Mask individual points

Mask all points to the end of the curve

Mask all points

Mask all points to the start of the curve

Unmask all points

Polarity Inversion
Use the 1 button (or the Edit | Invert menu command) to invert the
polarity of all points in the active sounding:

Timing
TemMerge corrects the raw times contained in the system dump files to
take into account any system, filter, antenna or user delays. As a result,
the first time in the .TEM files output by TemMerge is that of the first
window. All other times are adjusted relative to this. TemMerge performs
this calculation as follows for the respective system types:
Sirotem:
t(i) = t0(i) + [USER_DELAY]
Geonics/Protem:
# t(i) = [TX turnoff time setting on receiver] + [USER_DELAY] + t0(i)
Zonge:

9-8 TemMerge TDEM

A guide to using WinGLink

# t(i) = t0(i) + [T/O time setting on receiver]

Output Format
TemMerge outputs merged files in a data exchange format defined by
Geosystem: TEM. This format contains all information in the original
dump files which is necessary for modeling in the WinGLink Soundings
module. A sample .TEM file is shown below:
<HEADER INFO>
TEM_ID
PROJECT
AREA
CLIENT
CONTRACTOR
OPERATOR
CONDITIONS

CD_0023
Demo
B21
Geosystem
Geosystem
Geosystem
Sunny

<COORDINATES>
TYPE
LATLONG
DATUM
RXLAT
4709'11.0000"
RXLONG
4709'11.0000"
TXLAT
-8845'12.0000"
TXLONG
-8845'12.0000"
ELEVATION
290
<BLOCK>
<ACQUISITION PARAMETERS>
ACQUISITION_DATE
ACQUISITION_TIME
RECEIVER
Sirotem Mk3
TRANSMITTER
Sirotem
CONFIGURATION COINCIDENT
TXAREA
40000.0
RXAREA
40000.0
CURRENT
1.0
REPTRATE
2.3
TIMESERIES
CT
TURNOFF
0.0
ANTENNA_DELAY 0.0
FILTER_DELAY 0.0
USER_DELAY
0.0

05-05-99
09:32

#
#
#
#

[m2]
[m2]
[A]
[Hz]

#
#
#
#

[us]
[us]
[us]
[us]

<PROCESSING PARAMETERS>
FILEDATE
5/5/2005
PROGRAM
TemMerge Version 1.2.3
FILEVERSION
TEM 1.2
<INPUT FILE INFO>
INFILE
E:\_VBProjects\Progs\TemMerge\Data\EGIPT.OUT
RUNS
2
# RunNum, GroupNum, Gain
RUN_1
4 99 0
RUN_2
5 99 0

<DATA>
# Reported time is calculated by the following formula:
# t(i) = t0(i) + [USER_DELAY]
*** TIMES RELATIVE TO T(0) ***
# Time [ms], Voltage [nV/A], Resistivity [Ohmm], Std.Dev. [nV/A]

A guide to using WinGLink

5.0000e-2

-1.7963e7

0.00

2.9208e7

1.0000e-1

6.5872e8

0.21

7.8078e8

TemMerge TDEM 9-9

1.5000e-1

2.6703e8

0.19

3.2793e8

2.0000e-1

1.5821e8

0.17

1.9690e8

2.7500e-1

8.8571e7

0.15

1.1277e8

3.7500e-1

4.7174e7

0.13

6.2310e7

4.7500e-1

2.8394e7

0.13

3.8721e7

5.7500e-1

1.8317e7

0.12

2.6025e7

7.2500e-1

1.0997e7

0.12

1.6273e7

9.2500e-1

6.1862e6

0.11

9.5540e6

1.1250e0

3.9933e6

0.11

6.2137e6

1.3250e0

2.6839e6

0.11

4.3393e6

1.6250e0

1.7604e6

0.10

2.6907e6

2.0250e0

1.0022e6

0.10

1.6024e6

2.4250e0

5.6799e5

0.11

9.6644e5

2.8250e0

3.7545e5

0.11

6.8625e5

3.4250e0

2.6578e5

0.10

3.9127e5

4.2250e0

1.7728e5

0.10

2.1098e5

5.0250e0

1.2051e5

0.09

1.4074e5

5.8250e0

7.3940e4

0.10

9.0270e4

7.0250e0

4.0139e4

0.11

4.9498e4

8.6250e0

2.3182e4

0.11

1.7494e4

1.0225e1

2.4420e4

0.08

3.1367e4

1.1825e1

2.2872e4

0.07

4.7107e4

1.4225e1

7.4475e2

0.49

2.0181e4

1.7425e1

5.2660e3

0.10

1.2591e4

2.0625e1

5.3985e3

0.07

2.2848e4

2.3825e1

7.8975e3

0.04

9.8473e3

2.8625e1

3.9615e3

0.05

1.4142e4

3.5025e1

2.2153e3

0.05

1.8663e4

4.1425e1

-3.6525e3

0.00

1.0762e4

4.7825e1

6.9018e3

0.01

8.8008e3

5.7425e1

-1.9174e3

0.00

1.6514e4

7.0225e1

6.2065e3

0.01

5.9221e3

8.3025e1

1.8623e3

0.01

6.2920e3

9.5825e1

4.8125e2

0.03

1.1549e4

<END FILE>

As with an MT EDI file, this format organizes information according to

blocks. For the most part, the format is self-explanatory. Worthy of
mention, however, is the <INPUT FILE INFO> block. Here, the system
dump file is listed as are the number of runs and identification codes for
the runs which were merged.
TEM files created using Zonge and Sirotem data may contain only one
set of sounding data. TEM files created using Geonics data may,
however, contain up to three sets: one for each of three different sounding
bands. In this case, all blocks with the exception of <HEADER INFO>
and <COORDINATES> are included for each of the bands, as different
system parameters may be used at the various sampling rates.

9-10 TemMerge TDEM

A guide to using WinGLink

Using TEM Files

TEM files exported from TemMerge can be imported into WinGLink
projects of type EM. To facilitate the exchange of TEM files, they can be
exported from WinGLinks EM Soundings module. Planned additions to
the format include adding model information as well as edits made to
soundings in WinGLink.

A guide to using WinGLink

TemMerge TDEM 9-11

10: Gravity Tools

Overview
WinGLink provides two tools for use with gravity data: the Gravity
Reduction program, which is used to compute observed gravity value at
each station from instrument readings, and the Tide Correction Plot
program, used to plot tidal correction at a given location over a userdefined period of time.

Getting Started With Gravity Tools

Opening Gravity Tools
After opening WinGLink in Tool Mode, select GR in the left panel of the
tool form and select Gravity in the left frame. The two gravity tools can
then be selected by clicking the button to the left of each:

Note: For information on starting WinGLink in Tool Mode, refer to the

Getting Started with WinGLink chapter of this manual.

The Gravity Reduction Program

As already mentioned, the Gravity Reduction program computes the
value of the observed gravity at each station from the instrument
readings.
Use of this program involves the following steps:

A guide to using WinGLink

Gravity Tools 10-1

1. Creation of a survey database (note: not a WinGLink database);

entry of station names and gravity values in database.
2. Selection of a meter type
3. Creation of loop
4. Computation of gravity values
5. Export of gravity values for import into WinGLink

Creating a Survey Database

The main window of the Gravity Reduction program opens after
selecting the program from the WinGLink Tools window:

In the Database frame, click New to create a database for your gravity
survey. Databases are in Microsoft Access format and have the default
extension *.mdb.
Note: The filename for the gravity reduction database must not contain
more than 8 characters.

Entering Observed Gravity Values for Base

Stations
1. Create or Open the Gravity Reduction database
2. In the Area Info section of the Database frame, click
Properties and complete the field information as appropriate.

10-2 Gravity Tools

A guide to using WinGLink

When finished, choose Save and Exit. The entered values are
displayed in the frame for review.
3. Click the "Edit Base Stations" button:

4. Enter the name and the corresponding observed gravity value

for each base station. When finished, click the Save and Exit
button. The program will now recognize each base station by
name.

Defining a Set of Available Meters

1. Create or Open the Gravity Reduction database
2. In the Available Meters frame, select the Type of the gravity
meter to be added. Choose between Scintrex Autograv and
Lacoste G-meter. Click New.
3. For Scintrex Autograv meters, enter the serial number of the
meter.
4. For LaCoste meters, enter the serial number of the meter, the
multiplying factor, and the calibration data. Follow the screen
instructions to complete this input sequence. When finished,
click Save and Exit to confirm and save the data.

Creating and Opening Loops

1. Create or Open the Gravity Reduction database
2. In the Loop frame, click New to add a new loop, then enter the
loop name and select the gravity meter used for the loop from
the list of available meters. Alternatively, you can select an
existing loop.
3. Click Properties to edit the loop name and associated meter.
4. Click Edit Loop Data to enter or edit the date, time and
reading for each station. Base stations are automatically
detected by the program by name, and an X is displayed in the
Base column for each base station.
Note: When working with the Scintrex Autograv meter, dump files
(*.dmp) with raw data can be imported in the Edit Loop Data
spreadsheet using the Import command on the File menu.

A guide to using WinGLink

Gravity Tools 10-3

Computing Observed Gravity Values

1. Create or Open the gravity reduction database.
2. In the Loop frame, click the Edit Loop Data button and
complete the input as appropriate.
3. On the main menu, click the Compute command.
This command updates the contents of the spreadsheet columns
with the computed data.

Exporting Observed Gravity Values

1. On the File menu, select Export to generate a text file with the
following data for each station: Name, date, time, drift
correction, observed gravity.
2. The first record of each exported file contains the type and
serial number of the used meter. These files can then be
imported into WinGLink. For further information, see the
Data Import chapter of this manual.

Plotting Tide Corrections

This simple utility calculates and plots tidal correction at a given location
over a user-defined period of time.
Select the Tide Correction Plot item from the WinGLink Tools window
to open the program:

After entering the requested data, use the buttons at the bottom of the
window to compute the tide value and view the results:

10-4 Gravity Tools

A guide to using WinGLink

A guide to using WinGLink

Gravity Tools 10-5

11: The WinGLink Shell

Overview
This chapter is intended to familiarize WinGLink users with the
WinGLink shell, the central interface used to create and configure
WinGLink databases, create and manage projects, import data and to
access all licensed program modules. From the shell, you can also switch
from Database Mode, which contains the actual program modules, to
Tool Mode, from which a suite of tools for processing, editing and
analyzing data can be accessed.
Topics covered in this chapter include:
-

An overview of databases and projects

Starting the program

Creating a database

Setting database properties

Sharing databases

Creating projects

WinGLink Databases and Projects

WinGLink Databases
A WinGLink database is typically created for a given area of interest. All
supported geophysical data, i.e. MT, TDEM, gravity etc., can be
imported into a single database. Each type of data must be imported into
a project of the appropriate type. The types of data which can be
imported into a WinGLink database on a given computer are dependent
on the license configuration.
Each database contains all data and information relative to the area of
interest, including data and settings for the metric and geographic
coordinate systems and the preferred linear units for distances and depths.

WinGLink Projects
A WinGLink project is a collection of stations. Stations may contain
either observed or synthetic data.
The type of data acquired at the stations is the data type of the project.

A guide to using WinGLink

The WinGLink Shell 11-1

Examples of projects:

a magnetotelluric survey

a gravity survey

a collection of wells

a group of towns

Projects are used to store data associated with surveys carried out in the
database area. In cases where no observed data yet exists, i.e. in the case
of a feasibility study, synthetic data can be generated in certain program
modules and then used as observed data.
Stations are added to projects by entering the station name, coordinates
and elevation. This may be performed either manually or by importing
station data from external files.
As will be described later, WinGLink offers two types of project: single
and integrated. As the name implies, single projects are handled as
discrete data sets. Integrated projects, on the other hand, may consist of
any number of single projects.

Using WinGLink in Database Mode

To use WinGLink in Database Mode, check one of the options in the
Database frame of the initial dialog box, i.e. select either an existing
databases, the demo database or create a new database. To get started
with the program, open the demo database:

As soon as a database is loaded, the main Database Shell opens. This is

divided into three panels:
Database Properties panel (left):
This provides information on the database coordinate system. This
applies to all the stations of the projects contained in the database.
Project panel (center)

11-2 The WinGLink Shell

A guide to using WinGLink

Projects available in the database are listed here. The first column lists
the name given by the user to the project, the other columns provide
online information for each project.
Program panel (right)
Contains icons of the application programs available for the selected
project.
The Database Shell, as it appears for an MT project, is shown below:

To select a project, click the project name with the left mouse button.
Once selected, (see the COMB-MT project in the example above) the
project becomes the active project. This means that any application
program launched in the right-hand panel will load the data of that
project. In addition, only those program icons for the programs which are
compatible with the respective project type are displayed in the righthand panel.

WinGLink Databases
Creating Databases
Databases can be created either by selecting the Create a New Database
option in the database selection dialog box, which opens when the
program is first started, or with the File | New Database menu
command in the WinGLink shell.
Regardless of which method for database creation is selected, WinGLink
opens a the first of a series of windows which guide you through a series
of steps.

The Database Creation Wizard

1. After executing either of the two options for creating a new
database, the New WinGLink Database window opens.

A guide to using WinGLink

The WinGLink Shell 11-3

Specify the file name and path, and click the Open button:
2. The program now opens a window with three tabs in which all
information specific to the database location is entered. On the
first tab, enter the area name, and coordinate and elevation
units:

3. Click the Next button to advance to the Projected Coords. tab

of the window:

11-4 The WinGLink Shell

A guide to using WinGLink

On this tab, specify the projection, grid, central meridian and

datum used to project stations for Cartesian coordinates.
Note: The coordinate systems in a database are the same for all
of the projects in the database. Changing the settings for a
system will automatically update the coordinates for all of the
projects in the database.
It is extremely important that the coordinate information,
including central meridian, be set correctly for the location of
the stations used within the database. Conversions between
metric and geographic coordinates may otherwise not be
accurate.
The UTM zone (and thus central meridian) can be easily set by
clicking the Select from Coordinate System button to open
the Coordinate System Selection dialog:

After making a selection, the central meridian for the given

zone will automatically be entered in the respective field in the
Projected Coords tab.

A guide to using WinGLink

The WinGLink Shell 11-5

4. After entering the information for the projected coordinates,

click Next to advance to the Geographic Coords. tab:

To make adjustments to the geographic coordinates, click the

Change button to open the Geographic Coordinates window:

A list of all supported datums can be opened by clicking the

button at the right side of the Datum field.
5. Click the OK button in the Database Properties window to
complete the creation process. WinGLink displays an info box
alerting you that a project must first be created before you can
begin work with the program:

11-6 The WinGLink Shell

A guide to using WinGLink

Database-Specific Menu Commands

Databases are created, edited and saved using several commands
available in the WinGLink Shell. Specifically:

Command to use

for

File | New Database

Creating a new database in a userselected disk directory. The properties

of the new database are entered at this
stage

File | Open Database

Opening an existing database

File | Close

Closing the open database with its

original name and directory location

File | Save As

Closing the open database and saving

it with a different name or directory
location

File | Compact Database

Compacting the database; should be

performed occasionally to optimize
database structure and minimize size

File | Database Properties

Editing the properties of the active

database

Fixing Wrong Settings in the Coordinate

Systems
The geographic and metric coordinates for each station of a database are
linked to each other based on the respective coordinate system settings.
Each time a metric (or geographic) coordinate is changed, WinGLink
appropriately updates the corresponding geographic (or metric)
coordinates, and vice versa.
If the settings for one or both coordinate systems are not entered
correctly, either the metric or the geographic coordinates will not be
displayed with their correct values. For certain projections, e.g.
Transverse Mercator, it is particularly important that the Central
Meridian be set close to the actual station locations.
To correct errors in the database made in the Coordinate Settings, enter
the new, correct settings (Central Meridian, Projection, etc.). When
saving the new settings, WinGLink will offer you the option to use the
new settings to recalculate the metric (or geographic) coordinates of all
the stations contained in the database starting from the geographic (or
metric) coordinates of each station:

A guide to using WinGLink

The WinGLink Shell 11-7

Database Sharing
A WinGLink database may be opened and used concurrently by more
than one user. To prevent inadvertent data loss, however, restrictions on
how the database may be shared between users are dynamically enforced,
depending on which WinGLink applications are active. These restrictions
vary from simple warnings to limiting use of the database to a single
user.
The most restrictive state imposed by WinGLink is the Locked state.
This state is enabled in the event that changes to the database will affect
all projects or could change the structure of any of the projects in certain
ways. This state is set only in the main WinGLink shell in the following
cases:

when a user is editing the database area properties

when a user is importing external data into the database

In these cases the database is locked and may not be used by any other
user. It follows that database area properties may be changed and external
data imported only when no other users are using any WinGLink
application.
During database sharing, any operation which would result in a loss of
data integrity is not permitted.
In general, a given application will try to lock the active project and all
associated members, i.e. stations and profiles. While in the locked state,
that project and all members associated with it cannot be used by any
other WinGLink application. Should another user attempt to open a
locked project, or a project which makes use of member marked as
locked, a warning message appears and the WinGLink application is
aborted. For example, while one user is using the Maps program to edit
the stations used on a profile in an MT project, the MT Soundings
program cannot be used to view any of the stations contained in that
project.
The WinGLink applications used for 2D modeling (magnetotelluric (MT
& CS), gravity (GR) and magnetics (MG)) are slightly less restrictive.
When a 2D modeling application is opened, the stations used by a model

11-8 The WinGLink Shell

A guide to using WinGLink

are marked as being in use. While in this state, they can be viewed and
used in other WinGLink applications. For example, while one user is
running a MT 2D inversion, another user may create a 1D model for one
of the stations used in the 2D model.
If an application may be used by a second user, but with restrictions, a
warning message appears indicating what functions are disabled.
Note: Every attempt has been made to prevent loss of data integrity and
loss of data. WinGLink generally prevents any operation which would
damage the database or result in lost data. Database sharing is, however,
not without risk. Certain operations which would not result in data loss,
yet may still result in lost work, are possible. For example, it is possible
to modify a profile in the Maps program while a user is using the MT2D
program. When sharing a database, make certain that any actions you
take do not inadvertently affect the work of other users.

WinGLink Projects
Adding Projects to a Database
Projects are added to the database in the WinGLink Shell using the
Project | New menu command.
In the sub-menu:
1. Choose Single if you want to add a project with new data to
the database.
2. Choose Integrated if you want to add a project which uses
data from other projects already contained in the database.
3. Enter the data as requested in the Project Properties dialog box:

4. When finished, click the OK button.

Deleting Projects from a Database

To Delete a Project from a Database:
1. Open the WinGLink shell.

A guide to using WinGLink

The WinGLink Shell 11-9

2. In the Project panel of the window, use the mouse to select the
name of the project to be deleted.
3. Click either the Delete command from the Project menu or
press the Del key on your keyboard.
4. In the dialog box which appears, confirm that you would really
like to delete the project.
Warning: Deleting a project is a permanent action and cannot be
undone.

Editing Project Properties

Select the Project | Properties menu command in the WinGLink Shell
or click the Project Properties button located at the bottom of the
WinGLink Shell. to open the Project Properties dialog box. The
Summary tab of this window is, by in large, identical to the window
used when creating a new project. Use of the Attachment tab is
described below in the Combining Projects section.

Field

Meaning

Date

For observed data, the year and month the survey was
carried out. For magnetic projects, this date is used to
calculate IGRF values

Project name

This is the code name of the project as it will be

displayed in the Projects list of the Database window

Data type

From this dropdown list, select the type of data for your
project (example: gravity, MT, generic, etc.). The data
type cannot be changed if the project has one or more
stations.

Station legend The legend you wish to automatically associate with the
stations of the project when printing maps and sections.
Location

Survey location

Company

Client name

Contractor

Contractor name

Previewing the Contents of a Project

Regardless of project type, a project contains stations which are identified
by name, coordinates, elevations and, usually, values.

To Review the Station Coordinates, Elevations and

Values from the Database Window:
1. On the Projects menu, click QuickView or click the Preview
Data button located at the bottom of the WinGLink Shell.

11-10 The WinGLink Shell

A guide to using WinGLink

2. Select the values you wish to display:

Note: This function displays station data and values in read-only mode.
To edit the stations, you must start the MAPS program.

Setting a Project as the Source for the

Topography
The topography of a project is obtained by interpolating the elevations of
its member stations. When a project has only a few stations, this
topography may be severely inaccurate.
To avoid this problem, any project in a database can be set as the source
of topography for all other projects in that database. When a project is set
as default topography, the topographic profiles for the sections of all
other projects in the database are extracted from the gridded elevations of
this project.
For maximum accuracy, a DEM (digital elevation) map may be imported
into a project and this project then used as the default topography for the
database. For information on importing DEMs, please refer to the
Importing External Grids section of the Maps chapter of this manual.
This way, all sections along the same profile have the same topography,
regardless of the project to which they belong.
It is a general practice to use an Integrated project which includes a
gravity project as source for the area topography.
Note: The MT 2D Inversion program uses actual station elevations to
generate the profile, not the values in the project used as default
topography.

To Set a Project as the Source for Topography:

1. Open the WinGLink Shell.
2. On the Project menu, select the Default Topography | Set
menu command.

A guide to using WinGLink

The WinGLink Shell 11-11

3. Click the name of the project you wish to use as the topography
source:

4. Click the OK button.

5. A suffix [T] appears next to the project type in the Type
column.

Combining Projects
The projects of a database can be combined in order to produce maps and
sections using the stations of more than one project.
There are two ways to combine projects:
Attaching projects to the current project:
The resulting maps and sections are computed using only the data of the
stations contained in the active project. The stations of the attached
projects are posted on maps and sections, but their datasets are not used
in the processing.
Merging projects into an integrated project:
The resulting maps and sections are computed using all the equivalent
data of the stations of the combined projects (member projects). The
stations of the member projects are posted on maps and sections, and
their datasets are used in the processing.
For a quick display of attached and member projects, select a project in
the Project column of the Database Project list. In the example shown
below, the Integrated (MT) project has been selected. The arrow on the
right-hand side points to the attached and member projects:

Single projects can only have attached projects.

Integrated projects can have both attached and member projects

Attaching a Project to Another Project

Attached projects are single projects whose stations are attached to
the current project for simultaneous display on maps or sections.
To attach a project to another project:

11-12 The WinGLink Shell

A guide to using WinGLink

1. Open the WinGLink Shell.

2. In the Project list panel, click the name of the project to which
attachments are to be added.
3. Select the Project | Properties menu command. The Project
Properties dialog box opens; click the Attachments tab:

The left box lists the projects which have already been attached;
the right box lists the projects available for attachment.
4. Use the arrow buttons to move projects in/out the attachments
list.
5. When finished, click the OK button.
Note: When attaching projects to integrated projects, member projects
are not listed among the projects available for attachment.

Combining Projects into an Integrated Project

An integrated project is a project which has no stations of its own, but
instead uses the stations of other single projects (members) to produce
integrated maps and sections.
1. Select the Project | New menu command in the WinGLink
Shell, then select the Integrated option.

A guide to using WinGLink

The WinGLink Shell 11-13

2. Click the Members tab to display the following dialog

box:

3. The left box lists the current members of the project; the right
box lists the other available projects.
4. Use the arrows to add/remove projects from the member list.
5. When finished, click the OK button.

11-14 The WinGLink Shell

A guide to using WinGLink

12: Data Import

Overview
WinGLink can import survey data (station names, coordinates, values
and/or datasets) from a variety of source files. The imported stations and
associated datasets are organized and stored in a database project.
This can be either a new project created with the purpose of containing
the imported data, or an existing project that already has stations. For
example, it is possible to first import station IDs and coordinate
information, and then import the actual station data. In the this case, the
imported data are added or merged with the existing information.
Depending on the data type, data can be imported from the following
sources:
-

From external files

From a WinGLink database

From another project in a database

This chapter provides instructions on importing all data types which can
be imported into a WinGLink database from the WinGLink Shell.

Getting Started with Data Import

Regardless of data type, the initial steps in the data import process are
identical for all data types. The description provided below covers the
first few steps common to nearly all types of data import.

Import Steps Common to Most Data Types

1. On the File menu in the WinGLink Shell, click the Import,
menu command. In the Import window which opens, select the
source from which you wish to import your data:

A guide to using WinGLink

Data Import 12-1

2. For importing most types of files, select External files option

and continue by clicking the Next button to advance to the next
Import window:

Here, the program gives you the option of importing data into
either a new or an existing project.
3. If importing into an existing project, select the appropriate
option and, on the next screen, select the desired project from
the list presented. Otherwise, select the In a New Project
option. WinGLink now displays a message alerting you to the
fact that a new project will now be created. Acknowledge the
window and click the Next button to continue.

12-2 Data Import

A guide to using WinGLink

4. WinGLink now displays the Project Properties dialog box:

Mandatory fields in this window are the Project name and

Data type. When selecting the data type, make certain to select
the type which matches the data to be imported.
The subsequent steps in the import process are, to a certain extent, datatype dependent. The remaining import process for each of the different
data types is described in detail in the following sections.

Importing Station Coordinates

Station coordinates may be imported either alone or together with the
actual station data. This may be the case with EDI files, which can
contain both coordinate information as well as magenetotelluric data.
Frequently, station coordinates are not included with the actual data files.
This program option allows you to import the data in two steps, first by
importing the coordinate information and then importing the actual data
(or vice versa).
This section provides a description of the process for importing
coordinate information which is contained in a separate text file. These
text files must be organized in columns, whereby the order of the
columns is immaterial

To Import Station Coordinates Contained in Text Files:

WinGLink can import station data (i.e. coordinates and values, sounding
datasets, well courses, or layered/numerical data) from text files with data
organized in columns. The process for importing coordinates is illustrated
below for the case of magnetotelluric data. With the exception of project
type, the process is very similar for all data types.
1. To import station coordinates into a new project, follow steps
1-3 of section Getting Started with Data Import. Otherwise, if
importing coordinates into an existing project, follow the first
two steps, selecting the project into which the coordinates are to

A guide to using WinGLink

Data Import 12-3

be imported instead of creating a new project.

2. Click the OK button to advance to the Import MT Data

window. In the <Files of Type> box, select the type of data to
be imported:

Note that the file types available for selection are dependent on
the current project type.
3. Browse the directories until you find the text file to be
imported.
4. Click the filename of the file to be imported to select it (use the
Preview command if you would like to quickly check the file
contents). Click the Next button.
5. If the destination project already has stations, choose the
desired options for updating duplicate stations. Click the Next

12-4 Data Import

A guide to using WinGLink

button.

6. The first screen of the Data Import wizard opens:

Check the appropriate boxes in the Data type frame at the top
of the Data Import dialog box . These are used by the import
wizard to guess the field separation in the text file being
imported. You can check the data type in the preview window
at the bottom of the dialog box.
Specify which rows are to be imported in the Rows to import
section of the dialog box. Use this option to skip header and/or
footer lines.
In the Preview of file area of the dialog box, check that the
input file is read correctly. If necessary, use the mouse to
correct the field separation. Red lines represent field breaks. To

A guide to using WinGLink

Data Import 12-5

CREATE a field break, click the mouse at the desired position;

to DELETE a field break, double-click the line.
7. Click the Next button to display a preview of the file columns:

First, select the units for latitude and longitude in the Lat / Lon
Unit drop-down list:

Then click the header of each column to select the field for each
column:

8. Alternatively, the option in the Fields Assignment drop-down

list may include the column configuration:

12-6 Data Import

A guide to using WinGLink

9. When finished, click the Save button to confirm the import.

10. The program displays the final screen of the Import Wizard, a
screen which provides information on the import process:

Note: Columns marked with <Skip> are ignored during the import.

Importing MT Data
MT data can be imported into WinGLink in a variety of formats:
- Single-site EDI files
- Text files
- WinGLink projects
- WinGLink databases
- Geolink projects
- TGF files
Furthermore, multi-site EDI files and system files (e.g. Stratagem /
Imagem) can be converted to standard, single-site EDI files using the
EDI Tools available in Tool Mode. See Chapter 10, MT Tools for details.
This section provides instructions on importing
- Single-site EDI files
- Text files
- 2D MT forward responses
-3D meshes
Note: Information on importing data from within a WinGLink database,
TGF files and Geolink projects is provided at the end of this chapter as
the procedure is nearly identical for all data types

A guide to using WinGLink

Data Import 12-7

Importing Single-Site EDI Files

The EDI format is the de facto standard for magnetotelluric station data.
This standard includes data blocks for all typical data associated with a
sounding. WinGLink can import multiple EDI files at the same time, one
for each sounding.

To Import a Single-Site EDI File:

1. To import a single-site EDI file into a new project, follow steps
1-3 of section Getting Started with Data Import. Otherwise, if
importing an EDI file into an existing project, follow the first
two steps, selecting the MT project into which the EDI file is to
be imported instead of creating a new project.
2. In the <Files of Type> box, select EDI files.

3. Browse the directories until the EDI files to be imported are

listed.
4. Click the names of the file(s) to be imported; click the All
button to select all EDI files in the current directory. Click the
Next button.

12-8 Data Import

A guide to using WinGLink

5. A warning window appears:

If attempting to import multi-site EDI files, they should first be

broken down into single-site files using the tools provided in
the MT Tools .
After acknowledging a warning window with the Next button,
the first of the EDI import windows opens:

Here, you can specify the datum and spheroid of the station
coordinates in the EDI files. The coordinates in the EDI files
are then recalculated to the database coordinates. If there are
either no coordinates in the file or the coordinates in the file and
the database are the same, continue by clicking the Next button.
Otherwise, make the appropriate settings in the provides fields
and then click the Next button to continue.

A guide to using WinGLink

Data Import 12-9

6.

The next window of the EDI import wizard opens:

Here, you can specify whether recalculation of impedances or

spectra should be performed and whether impedance and/or
tipper rotation should be performed.
Use the impedance rotation options as
follows:

12-10 Data Import

Import option

When to use

No Recalculation

To import the plot parameters saved in the EDI file

without recalculating them from existing impedances
or spectra
If plot parameters are missing, the program will
calculate them from existing impedances.
If impedances also are missing, plot parameters and
impedances will be calculated from existing spectra.

Recalculate from
existing
Impedances

To compute plot parameters from existing

impedances, without recalculating impedances from
spectra.

Recalculate from
existing Spectra

To recalculate plot parameters and impedances from

spectra.

A guide to using WinGLink

7. Click the Start button to execute the import. Import statistics

are then displayed in the final window of EDI Import Wizard:

Note 1 - Spectra are not saved in the database: For each site, only plot
parameters and impedances are imported and saved in the database.
Spectra are read and used to recalculate impedances, but they are not
saved in the database.
Note 2 - Site coordinates: The geographic coordinates of each site are
read in from the REFLAT, REFLON fields of the EDI file, converted
into metric coordinates according to the area settings of the database, and
then corrected for the offset of the corresponding E dipoles. To correct
for missing or incorrect site coordinates, launch the MAPS program and
edit the site coordinates using the Stations | View Data command. Site
coordinates, if using a datum or spheroid different than that used in the
database, can be converted during import by specifying the
datum/spheroid used in the EDI files in the first of the EDI import
windows as shown above.
Note 3 - Rotate to: If there is a ZROT block in the EDI file, the data are
first back rotated to 0 degrees. Thus, to match the rotation in the EDI
file, you must specify the angle to which the impedances are to be rotated
in the User Defined field. The angle specified in the Import Wizard is
used for all frequencies.
When rotating to the principle axis, the program rotates the impedance
matrix to the maximum and minimum values of Zxy and Zyx,
respectively.
If there are tipper data present in the EDI file, these data are likewise
back rotated to 0 degrees from the angle specified in the TROT block.
If there is no TROT block, it is assumed that the data are already at 0
degrees and no back rotation is performed. The ZROT block is NOT
used to specify the tipper rotation in the case that no TROT block is
present.

A guide to using WinGLink

Data Import 12-11

When using the 2D MT inversion module, tipper should be rotated to

strike.

Importing Text Files

The Text File Import Wizard, which is also used to import station
coordinate files, can be used to import MT data contained in columnbased text files. Files of this type may contain either resistivities and
phases or impedance values.

To Import MT Data Contained in Text Files:

1. To import MT data into a new project, follow steps 1-3 of
section Getting Started with Data Import. Otherwise, if
importing MT data into an existing project, follow the first two
steps, selecting the project into which the data are to be
imported instead of creating a new project.

2. Click the OK button to advance to the Import MT Data

window. In the <Files of Type> box, select the type of data to
be imported:

12-12 Data Import

A guide to using WinGLink

3. Browse the directories until you find the text file to be

imported.
4. Click the filename(s) of the file(s) to be imported to select (use
the Preview command if you would like to quickly check the
file contents). Click the Next button.
5. If the destination project already has stations, choose the
desired options for updating duplicate stations. Click the Next
button.

6. An info box appears informing you that a station will be created

for each input file and given the same name as the input file.
Acknowledge the info box by clicking the Start button.

A guide to using WinGLink

Data Import 12-13

7. The first screen of the Data Import wizard opens:

Check the appropriate boxes in the Data type frame at the top
of the Data Import dialog box . These are used by the import
wizard to guess the field separation in the text file being
imported. You can check the data type in the preview window
at the bottom of the dialog box.
Specify which rows are to be imported in the Rows to import
section of the dialog box. Use this option to skip header and/or
footer lines.
In the Preview of file area of the dialog box, check that the
input file is read correctly. If necessary, use the mouse to
correct the field separation. Red lines represent field breaks. To
CREATE a field break, click the mouse at the desired position;
to DELETE a field break, double-click the line.
8. Click the Next button to display a preview of the file columns:

12-14 Data Import

A guide to using WinGLink

First, specify whether the file contains resistivity and phase

data or impedance data in the MT Data Type area at the top of
the window.
Note that columns marked with <SKIP> are ignored during the
import process.
Then click the header of each column to select the field for each
column:

9. Column mappings can be saved by clicking the Save button in

the Column Mapping area at the right edge of the window:

The .MAP files created here can be reloaded the next time a file
with the same column arrangement is to be imported by
clicking the Load button.
10. When finished, click the Save button at the bottom of the
window to confirm the import.
11. If importing multiple text files, the Import Wizard returns to
step 7. After the steps outlined above have been completed for
all of the text files, the program displays the final screen of the
Import Wizard. Here, the program displays statistics on the
import process.

Importing MT 2D Forward Responses

The stations of an MT profile for which 2D modeling results have been
calculated and saved in the current database can be imported into a new

A guide to using WinGLink

Data Import 12-15

or an existing MT project. The computed 2D modeling results (i.e.

computed TE and TM resistivity and phase) are imported as observed
data for the stations of the profile.
In this way, an inversion can be run using synthetic 2D MT model results
as observed data.

To Import MT 2D Forward Responses

1. Select the File | Import menu command in the WinGLink
Shell.
2. In the Import dialog box which then appears, select: MT
response from 2D model:

3. Select the destination project. This can be either a new or an

existing MT project.
4. After selecting/creating the project into which the responses are
to be imported, the program presents a list of available profiles
for which 2D modeling results have been saved in the database:

5. Select the desired 2D model and click the Next button. The
program imports the responses into the selected project and

12-16 Data Import

A guide to using WinGLink

displays the results:

Note: Because the 2D inversion routine returns only the Ty vertical

component, certain interpretational qualities which require both Tx and
Ty, i.e. induction arrows, cannot be displayed.

Importing 3D Meshes
WinGLink configurations which include the MT-4 module provide
support for importing 3D meshes in the Randy Mackie format. This
format is defined at the end of this section. These meshes are MT specific and can only be imported into MT projects.
Once imported into a database, a 3D mesh remains associated with its
project and can only be accessed from that project. The 3D Mesh
Importer, which can be accessed from the WinGLink shell as well as
from the 3D Modeling program, can be used to import 3D meshes from
external files, the active database and other WinGLink databases.
Profiles placed on 3D meshes in the Maps program can be used to extract
mesh sections in both the X-Sections program as well as the MT 2D
Inversion program. WinGLink generates these sections by interpolating
between mesh elements. Topographic information is retained during this
interpolation. Sections extracted from 3D meshes in the MT 2D Inversion
program can also be used as starting meshes for 2D models. Please refer
to the MT 2D Inversion chapter of this manual for details.

To Import a 3D Mesh into WinGLink:

1. Select the File | Import menu command in the WinGLink
Shell.
2. In the Import window which opens, select the 3D Model Mesh
option.
3. Select either an existing MT or project or opt to import the 3D
Mesh into a new project.
4. The first of five 3D Mesh Import Wizard windows opens.
Specify the data source: from file, the current database, or an

A guide to using WinGLink

Data Import 12-17

external database:

If you choose to import from either the current database or a

different WinGLink database, additional dialog windows open
prompting you to select e.g. the database name and the mesh to
be imported.
5. To import a 3D mesh form a file, now select the source file.
The file must be in the Randy Mackie format specified at the
end of this section.

6. In step three of the import process, specify the units in the data
source:

12-18 Data Import

A guide to using WinGLink

7. In step four, specify the mesh attributes, including mesh name,

location of the rear top left corner as well as the angle to which
the mesh is to be rotated:

A guide to using WinGLink

Data Import 12-19

8. In step 5, you can enter notes regarding the mesh. Alternatively,

notes can be imported into the field from an external file:

9. In the final step, WinGLink performs the import operation.

Import progress and any encountered errors are displayed on
screen.
For details on working with 3D meshes, refer to the following sections in
the WinGLink manual:
Chapter Maps, Displaying 3D MT meshes
Chapter Sections, X-Sections
Chapter MT 3D Modeling
Chapter MT 2D Inversion
Note: In addition to the method described above, 3D meshes can also be
imported into projects from within the 3D Modeling program. For details,
please refer to the 3D Modeling chapter of this manual.

Randy Mackie 3D mesh specification

The mesh format is that specified by Randy Mackie plus an additional
data block, located at the end of the file, which contains georeferencing
information.
NX, NY, NZ (#s of blocks) [Nair (layers)], [MAP.
VAL[UES]]
X block sizes (NX values in meters)
Y block sizes (NY values in meters)
Z block sizes (NZ values in meters)
1 (layer #)
NX*NY codes or values in free format: x varies
fastest
--------NZ (layer #)
NX*NY codes or values in free format: x varies
fastest
0. resistivity(for code 1) resistivity(for code
2) ....
resistivity(for largest code) [resistivity for
sea water]
end (optional termination text)

12-20 Data Import

A guide to using WinGLink

--------WINGLINK
ABC (site name)
I J (block numbers)
0000.000 0000.000 (real world coordinates)
0 (rotation)

Importing TDEM Data

Like MT data, TDEM data can also be imported into WinGLink in a
variety of formats:
- TemMerge files
- Temix datasets
- Zonge AVG files
- Geolink projects
- TGF files
- USF files (a data exchange format defined by Phoenix Geophysics for
the Phoenix V8 system)
This section provides instructions on importing the file types listed above
with the exception of TGF files and Geolink projects, which are
described at the end of this chapter as the import procedure is nearly
identical for all data types..

TemMerge Data Files

Raw time-domain electromagnetic (TEM) data can be imported into
WinGLink in a two-step process. The first step involves using
WinGLinks TemMerge program to convert system dump files from the
respective acquisition systems into a standardized format which can then
be imported into WinGLink. Systems currently supported include:
- Sirotem
- Protem
- Zonge
- as well as Amira and free-format data)
The conversion is performed using the TemMerge program, which can be
accessed in the EM area of the Tools section of WinGLink. For
instructions on how to use TemMerge, please refer to the TDEM Tools
chapter of this manual. For instructions on how to use TemMerge, please
refer to the TDEM Tools section of the WinGLink help system.
Once the TDEM data have been converted to TemMerge-format data,
they can be imported into WinGLink using the import wizard.

To Import TemMerge Data Files into WinGLink:

1. To import TemMerge data files into a new project, follow steps
1-3 of section Getting Started with Data Import. Otherwise, if
importing TemMerge files into an existing project, follow the
first two steps, selecting the EM project into which the

A guide to using WinGLink

Data Import 12-21

TemMerge files are to be imported instead of creating a new

project.
2. In the <Files of Type> box, select TemMerge files:

3. Browse the directories until you find the files to be imported.

4. Select the name of each file to be imported.
5. Click the Next button. The TEM Delay Times window opens:

In the Corrective Time Shift field, enter any time shift which
was not included in the TemMerge file. This may be the case,
for example, if the system operator did not enter the turn-off
time during acquisition. The value entered here can be edited
later in TDEM Soundings by executing the File | Sounding
Properties menu command in the Soundings module.

12-22 Data Import

A guide to using WinGLink

6. Click the Start button to initiate the import process. Once

completed, WinGLink displays a window with information on
the number of files which were successfully imported.

Importing Temix Datasets

TDEM datasets created with the Interpex Temix software can be
imported into WinGLink.

To Import Temix Datasets into WinGLink

1. To import Temix datasets into a new project, follow steps 1-3
of section Getting Started with Data Import. Otherwise, if
importing Temix datasets into an existing project, follow the
first two steps, selecting the EM project into which the Temix
datasets are to be imported instead of creating a new project.
2. In the <Files of Type> box select Temix.
3. Browse the directories until you find the dataset(s) to be
imported.
4. Select the name of each dataset to be imported:

5. Click the Next button. WinGLink displays a window with

information on the number of files which were successfully
imported.

Importing Zonge AVG Files

Zonge AVG files, unlike raw Zonge system dump files which must first
be converted to TemMerge files, can be imported directly into
WinGLink.

To Import Zonge Files into WinGLink:

1. To import a Zonge AVG file into a new project, follow steps 13 of section Getting Started with Data Import. Otherwise, if

A guide to using WinGLink

Data Import 12-23

importing a Zonge file into an existing project, follow the first

two steps, selecting the EM project into which the stations
contained in the AVG files are to be imported instead of
creating a new project.
2. In the <Files of Type> box select Zonge AVG.
3. Browse the directories until you find the dataset(s) to be
imported.
4. Select the name of each station to be imported.
5. Click the Next button to advance to the next screen of the
import wizard. Here, select either m or km as the XY units for
the Zonge data.
6. In the next screen, WinGLink prompts you to enter any time
shift which was not included in the Zonge AVG file. This may
be the case, for example, if the system operator did not enter the
turn-off time during acquisition. The value entered here can be
edited later in TDEM Soundings by executing the File |
Sounding Properties menu command in the Soundings
module.

7. Click the Start button to initiate the import process. Once

completed, WinGLink then displays a window with
information on the number of stations which were successfully
imported.

Importing USF Files

TDEM data contained in USF files, a data format defined by Phoenix
Geophysics for their V8 system, can be directly imported into WinGLink.

To Import USF Files into WinGLink:

1. To import a USF file into a new project, follow steps 1-3 of
section Getting Started with Data Import. Otherwise, if
importing a USF file into an existing project, follow the first

12-24 Data Import

A guide to using WinGLink

two steps, selecting the EM project into which the stations

contained in the USF file is to be imported instead of creating a
new project.
2. In the <Files of Type> box select USF TEM Files.
3. Browse the directories until you find the file to be imported.
4. Select the name of the desired file (only one file can be
imported at time).
5. Click the Next button to advance to the next screen of the
import wizard. Here, select the stations() which are to be
imported into the database:

6. Click the Start button to initiate the import process. Once

completed, WinGLink then displays a window with
information on the number of stations which were successfully
imported.

Importing Gravity / Magnetic Data

Gravity and magnetic data are typically imported into WinGLink as
column-based text files. Files typically contain a station ID, coordinates,
elevation and a measurement value, e.g. observed gravity or terrain
correction.
In addition to the procedure outlined below for text files, gravity and
magnetic data can also be imported using TGF files or from Geolink
projects. For information on importing data contained in these last two
types of files is provided at the end of this chapter as the procedure is
nearly identical for all data types.
The description provided below is applicable to both gravity and
magnetic data, whereby for magnetic data a project of type MG must be
selected/created, and for gravity data a GR project must be used.

A guide to using WinGLink

Data Import 12-25

To Import Gravity / Magnetic Data into WinGLink

1. To import gravity or magnetic data into a new project, follow
steps 1-3 of section Getting Started with Data Import.
Otherwise, if importing gravity/magnetic data into an existing
project, follow the first two steps, selecting the project into
which the data are to be imported instead of creating a new
project.

2. Click the OK button to advance to the Import GR/MG Data

window. In the <Files of Type> box, select the type of data to
be imported, in this case: Text Files:

3. Browse the directories until you find the text file to be

imported.
4. Click the filename(s) of the file(s) to be imported to select (use
the Preview command if you would like to quickly check the
file contents). Click the Next button.

12-26 Data Import

A guide to using WinGLink

5. If the destination project already has stations, choose the

desired options for updating duplicate stations. Click the Next
button.
6. The first screen of the Data Import wizard opens:

Check the appropriate boxes in the Data type frame at the top
of the Data Import dialog box . These are used by the import
wizard to guess the field separation in the text file being
imported. You can check the data type in the preview window
at the bottom of the dialog box.
Specify which rows are to be imported in the Rows to import
section of the dialog box. Use this option to skip header and/or
footer lines.
In the Preview of file area of the dialog box, check that the
input file is read correctly. If necessary, use the mouse to
correct the field separation. Red lines represent field breaks. To
CREATE a field break, click the mouse at the desired position;
to DELETE a field break, double-click the line.

A guide to using WinGLink

Data Import 12-27

7. Click the Next button to display a preview of the file columns:

First, specify the units for latitude and longitude in the dropdown list at the top of the window.
Note that columns marked with <SKIP> are ignored during the
import process.
Then click the header of each column to select the field for each
column or open the Field Assignments drop-down list to
display a list of preset column mapping options:

8. When finished, click the Save button at the bottom of the

window to confirm the import. WinGLink then displays a
window with information on the number of stations which were
successfully imported.

Importing Well Data

All data associated with a given well is not typically contained in a single
file. Instead, one file might contain coordinate information for one or
more wells. Another series of files might contain the actual well traces;
one for each well. Layer data, e.g. lithography or pressure, might be

12-28 Data Import

A guide to using WinGLink

contained in other files. Thus, for optimal workflow with well log data,
we recommend importing well data in the following order:
1. Import coordinate information
2. Import well courses
3. Import layer data
What all of these files have in common is that they are column-based text
files. Thus, they can all be imported using the hopefully now familiar
Text File import wizard.
The description shown here utilizes the demo well data provided in the
WinGLink installation directory, typically:
C:\Program Files\WinGLink\Demodata\Well Data

To Import Coordinate Information

1. To import well coordinates into a new project, follow steps 1-3
of section Getting Started with Data Import. Otherwise, if
importing the coordinates into an existing project, follow the
first two steps, selecting the project into which the coordinates
are to be imported instead of creating a new project.
2. Click the OK button to advance to the Import WL Data
window. In the <Files of Type> box, select the type of data to
be imported:

3. The first screen of the Data Import wizard opens.

Check the appropriate boxes in the Data type frame at the top
of the Data Import dialog box . These are used by the import
wizard to guess the field separation in the text file being
imported. You can check the data type in the preview window
at the bottom of the dialog box.
Specify which rows are to be imported in the Rows to import
section of the dialog box. Use this option to skip header and/or

A guide to using WinGLink

Data Import 12-29

footer lines.
In the Preview of file area of the dialog box, check that the
input file is read correctly. If necessary, use the mouse to
correct the field separation. Red lines represent field breaks. To
CREATE a field break, click the mouse at the desired position;
to DELETE a field break, double-click the line.
4. Click the Next button to display a preview of the file columns:

First, specify the units for latitude and longitude in the dropdown list at the top of the window.
Note that columns marked with <SKIP> are ignored during the
import process.
Then click the header of each column to select the field for each
column or open the Field Assignments drop-down list to
display a list of preset column mapping options:

5. When finished, click the Save button at the bottom of the

window to confirm the import. WinGLink then displays a
window with information on the number of stations which were
successfully imported.

To Import Well Courses

1. Proceed as outlined above for station coordinates, making
certain to select the same project as was used to import the well
coordinates. Instead of selecting Station Coordinates, select
Well Courses in the Import WL Data window and select the

12-30 Data Import

A guide to using WinGLink

desired well course files:

2. The first screen of the Data Import wizard opens. Make the
appropriate settings and click the Next button to continue.
3. Click Next to display a preview of the file columns:

On the right-hand part of the window, first select the units for
latitude, longitude and elevation. Then click the heading of
each column to select the appropriate field designations.
Latitude, Longitude and Elevation must each be assigned to a
column. Other columns are to be set to Skip (default):

A guide to using WinGLink

Data Import 12-31

After you have assigned the column headings, click the Save
button to import the well log file into the database.
Tip:
If, in Step 3, you selected multiple files, the same column
headings will automatically be set as the default headings for
the remaining files in the import session. If, however, you will
be importing further files with the same mappings at a later
time, you can save the mappings by clicking the Save button in
the Column Mappings panel located on the right side of the
window. The mappings can be restored at a later time by
clicking the Load button.

About Layer Data

Various types of well log data can be imported into WinGLink:
Layer data: stratigraphic data between two different well depths:
Well From(M.D.) To(M.D.) Descr
AA-1 8.23
250.00 Sand
AA-1 250
1000.00 Clay
AA-1 1000
1300.00 Shale
AA-4 8.23
200.00 Sand
AA-4 200.00 1200.00 Clay
AA-4 1200.00 1500.00 Shale
AA-3 0
350.00 Sand
AA-3 350.00 400.00 Clay
AA-3 400.00 1100.00 Sand
AA-3 1100.00 1400. Shale
Numerical data: value data at depth, e.g. temperature or pressure at
various well depths. The files must contain 3 columns, either fixed width
or delimited using any standard or user-defined delimiter.
Name Depth
Value
AA-1 800.00 20
AA-1 1000.0010
AA-1 1545.0050
AA-2 200.00 14
Depth tags: labels to be assigned along the well trace at specified depths.
Well Depth
Descr
AA-1 750.00 Low
AA-3 1300.00 High
AA-4 150.00 Med
AA-4 750.00 High
Note: Depth tags can be displayed only in Interpreted Views and
Montage. They must, however, be imported into WinGLink using the
import functions provided in the WinGLink database window.

To Import Layer Data

As with well coordinates and well courses, layer data are imported into
WinGLink using the Import Wizard:
1. Proceed as outlined above for station coordinates and well
courses, making certain to select the same project. In the Import

12-32 Data Import

A guide to using WinGLink

WL Data window, select Well Stratigraphy, Logs:

2. The Choose Data Type window, shown below, opens:

This window lists all previously imported data types, e.g.

lithology, hydrology etc. Every time a file of a specific type is
imported, each of the descriptive elements in a given file is
appended to a list associated with the type.
For example, if a file XX contains layer data for lithology
containing descriptive elements A,B and C, and it is associated
with a data type called Lithology_1, the elements in the file will
be linked to this data type. If a file ZZ containing elements D
and E is imported and also associated with the Lithology_1 data
type, these elements will also be linked to the Lithology_1 data
type.
As is discussed in the Common Functions chapter of this
manual, each descriptive element can have associated with it a

A guide to using WinGLink

Data Import 12-33

fill pattern. By using data types, these fill patterns can be easily
reused throughout a database.
To create a new data type, click the New button to open the
New Data Type window:

When importing numerical data, specify the units to be used

when displaying the values. Leave this field blank for layer data
and depth tags.
Confirm your entries with OK. The data type should now be
listed in the Data Type window.
3. Proceed with the Next button to the next Import Wizard screen.
Use the provided fields and checkboxes to specify the file
format as you did when importing well courses.
4. In the following Import Wizard screen, specify the field
headings. Note here that options are provided for both elevation
and measured depth. Select only one of the two options,
regardless of whether your files contain values for both:

Proceed as described above for each of the layer data files to be imported.

12-34 Data Import

A guide to using WinGLink

Generally Applicable Import Methods

Importing a Project from a WinGLink Database
It is possible to import a project from another WinGLink database: the
imported project will be appended to the projects of the destination
database.
1. Create or open the database into which your data are to be
imported.
2. On the File menu in the WinGLink Shell, select the Import,
menu command. In the Import window which opens, select the
source from which you wish to import your data, here
WinGLink database:

3. Browse the directories until the desired database is displayed.

4. Select the database file (*.wdb).
5. Click the Next button. The list of projects found in the selected
database is displayed:

6. Select the project(s) to be imported (SHIFT and CTRL keys

can be used for multiple selection).

A guide to using WinGLink

Data Import 12-35

7. When finished, click the Start button at the bottom of the

window to confirm the import. WinGLink then displays a
window with information on the number of stations which were
successfully imported.

Importing TGF Files

The TGF format is an expandable data format specified by Geosystem for
the purpose exchanging geophysical data across applications. It is used,
among other applications, to import vertically distributed data into
WinGLink. A given TGF file may contain station data for one or more
stations, e.g. name and coordinates, as well as data values for one or more
values, e.g. temperature and density. Details on the TGF specification can
be found in Appendix A, The TGF file format.
TGF data are imported into WinGLink using the Importing station data
command in the main Database window.

To import TGF files into WinGLink:

1. On the File menu in the WinGLink Shell, select the Import,
menu command. In the Import window which opens, select
External Files as the data source and click Next to continue
2. In the Import dialog box, select TGF files in the <Files of
Type> drop-down list.
3. Browse the directories until you find the file(s) to be imported.
4. Select the name of each file to be imported.
5. Click the Next button.
6. Click each of the stations which are to be imported.
7. When finished, click the Start button at the bottom of the
window to confirm the import. WinGLink then displays a
window with information on the number of stations which were
successfully imported.
Note: If no stations are listed, either no stations are contained in your
TGF file or your file is not conformant with the TGF specifications

Importing Data from a Geolink 6.0 Project

1. To import Geolink data into a new project, follow steps 1-3 of
section Getting Started with Data Import. Otherwise, if
importing Geolink data into an existing project, follow the first
two steps, selecting the project into which the data are to be
imported instead of creating a new project.
2. In the <Files of Type> box, select Geolink 6.0 project.
3. Browse the directories until the header of the desired project is
displayed.
4. Select the name of the file to be imported.
5. When finished, click the Start button at the bottom of the
window to confirm the import. WinGLink then displays a
window with information on the import operation.

12-36 Data Import

A guide to using WinGLink

Importing Stations Referenced to a Different

Coordinate System
To import stations with longitude and latitude referenced to a different
coordinate system:
1. Create a temporary database called <Temporary> or similar.
2. When prompted for the database properties, enter the
parameters that match the coordinate system of the stations to
be imported.
3. Import the stations into a new project of the <Temporary>
database.
4. Close the <Temporary> database.
5. Open the final destination database. This is the database which
contains the coordinate system to be used.
6. On the File menu, click Importing station data.
7. In the Importing station data dialog box, select A Project of
another WinGLink database.
8. Browse the directories until you find the database
<Temporary.wdb>.
9. Select the database <Temporary.wdb> and click Next.
10. Select the project in which the stations were previously saved,
then click Next.
11. WinGLink will show a warning to inform you that the source
and target databases have different coordinate systems, which is
correct.
12. Confirm the import with coordinate conversion.
13. The stations will be imported and their coordinates will be
converted during the import.

A guide to using WinGLink

Data Import 12-37

13: Common Functions

Overview
This chapter contains:

An introduction to WinGLink windows and the utilities

available to the user to organize and use their contents.

A description of common features and functions used for

editing, formatting and setting the display options for maps
and sections, including colors and line contours.

A general overview of printing options for both maps and

sections

The Display Area

Zoom and Pan Functions
Described in this section are two functions common to all WinGLink
modules which display gridded sections or maps, e.g. the PseudoSections and Maps modules: zooming and panning. Both functions can
be accessed from the toolbar located below the menu bar of the program
modules:

Zooming
To Zoom In click

, then:

1. Move the mouse pointer to a spot in the map near the zone into
which you would like to zoom.

A guide to using WinGLink

12BCommon Functions 13-1

2. Left-click and release the mouse button.

3. Move the mouse pointer to drag a rectangle over the area which
is to be enlarged.
is enabled. This
After zooming in on an area, the zoom out button
button can be clicked as many times as the Zoom In button was clicked,
thereby allowing you to move backwards through the previously
executed zoom operations.

Panning the Display

This function is used to move or pan the current display area. Used in
combination with the Zoom function, the Pan function allows you to
quickly display specific areas of the active window in detail.
To Pan a window, click

; then:

1. Move the mouse pointer to a spot in the map near the zone into
which you would like to zoom.
2. Move the selection area.
3. Left-click in the section or map to set the new window position.

Setting the View Area

To set the display area, i.e. the area actually displayed in a given map or
section window, select the Window | Set View Area. menu command
to open the View Area window. This window can also be opened by
clicking the Set View Area button located in the toolbar. Depending on
module, this button appears as either:
(sections) or

(maps).

Shown below is a typical View Area window.

13-2 12BCommon Functions

A guide to using WinGLink

Note that the fields for defining the view area dimensions vary from
module to module depending on the data being plotted.

Managing Color Fill

This section provides an overview of WinGLinks color management
functions. These include functions for enabling/disabling color fill,
defining color ranges and working with color palettes.

Enabling Color Fill

To toggle color filling on and off, click the

button on the toolbar

- or 1. Select the View | Display Options menu command.

2. In the Display Options window, select the Color Fill check
box; then click the OK.
Note: The color fill range definition is based on the grid of each map.
Therefore, color ranges can only be plotted if the map values have been
interpolated.

Color Scale
The range distribution is shown in a color scale which is generally
displayed at the right edge of each map or section by clicking the
button. In the 3D Modeling module, the color scale is displayed in its
own window and includes additional functionality (see the 3D
Modeling chapter for details).

The Range Editor

The interpolated values of a map or a section are organized in adjacent
ranges. Each range is defined by two numerical bounds (upper and lower
bound) and is associated with a color. This color is applied to all values
within the range.
On the Contours menu, select Color Ranges to open the Range Editor.

Defining the Number of Ranges

By default, the Range Editor creates 32 equally spaced intervals based on
the difference between the maximum and minimum values. The
maximum allowed number of ranges is 128.
The number of ranges can be changed at any time by using the
Automatic button in the Range Editor:

A guide to using WinGLink

12BCommon Functions 13-3

Another dialog box opens in which the user can enter the desired number
of ranges and the criteria to be used for automatically generating range
bounds:
When using a logarithmic
scale, make certain that the
number of decimals in the
main form is high enough
to resolve the definition of
the bounds. If necessary,
increase the number of
decimal in the Range
Editor dialog

Adding or Deleting a Range

In the Range Editor, click the mouse on the color box of the range you
wish to edit. The box is highlighted:

13-4 12BCommon Functions

A guide to using WinGLink

Choose Split or Delete from the Ranges frame.

Editing Range Bounds

Range bounds can be edited by:

Changing the number of ranges

Selecting the Normalize button in the Ranges frame. This

option keeps the number of ranges unchanged, but resets all
range bounds to achieve an equal distribution of the
histogram.

Manually editing the range bounds. This is done by clicking

the mouse on the line which separates two ranges:

The bound value is shown in an edit box.

Enter the new value, making sure it is compatible with the adjacent
bounds.

Selecting and Calibrating Color Palettes

Color palettes can be selected in the right-hand frame of the main Range
Editor:

A guide to using WinGLink

12BCommon Functions 13-5

The range of the color table can be modified by clicking the upper or
lower markers:
and then dragging them to a new position. The color table
is then restricted to the area between the two markers.

Editing Color Palettes

1. Use the Contour | Color Ranges menu command to open the
Range Editor.
2. In the Color Table frame, click the Edit button to open the
following window:

13-6 12BCommon Functions

A guide to using WinGLink

Each color can be modified by double clicking and choosing

the new color from a standard palette or by editing the RGB
components using the graphic tool on the right-hand side of the
color table.
The colors with a border have been locked by clicking the
defining box while holding down the Shift key. By clicking the
Interpolate button, a new color table is generated by
interpolating the colors between the locked colors.
3. To save the new color table, click Save as New, and enter a
name for the new palette. Note: Default palettes cannot be
modified and saved with the same name.

Managing Templates
Templates are fixed combinations of color palettes and range bounds
which can be saved in the database for use in other map or section
presentations.
The Template frame:

is always available in the Range Editor. Its use is self-explanatory.

A guide to using WinGLink

12BCommon Functions 13-7

Contour Lines
Displaying Contour Lines
To toggle the display of contour lines on and off, click the
the tool bar

button on

or:
1. Select the View | Display Options menu command
2. In the Display Options dialog box, select the Contour Lines
check box.
3. Click the OK button.

Setting Contour Lines

WinGLink has two levels of contour lines which can be formatted
independently of one another when displaying a map: major contour lines
and minor contour lines
To set the number of major and minor contour lines:
1. Select the Contours | Contour Lines menu command.
2. Click the Density tab.
3. Enter the appropriate density for major and minor lines:

Major Contour Lines

These are contour lines which are defined with respect to the color ranges
set for the map. The user chooses how many color ranges should be
contained between two major contour lines.
Shown below is a sample display with the value 1 entered for Color
Ranges/Major Lines:

And this is what is displayed with the value 2 entered for Color
Ranges/Major Lines:

13-8 12BCommon Functions

A guide to using WinGLink

Minor Contour Lines

These are contour lines which are defined with respect to major lines.
Use this option to select how many minor contour lines should be present
between two major contour lines.
2 minor lines/major line (bold):

Formatting Contour Lines

To change the format of major or minor contour lines:
1. Select the Contours | Contour Lines menu command.
2. Click the Major lines or Minor lines tab, as appropriate:

3. Select the Annotate check box to display the contour line

value.
4. Choose the font size for the annotation.
5. Choose the contour line Width.
6. Click either the OK or the Apply to All button. Note: Apply to
All is available as an option only if multiple windows
containing contours are displayed on the screen.

Setting Decimals in Contour Annotation

The number of decimals shown in the contour lines annotation depends
on the ranges defined for the map.

To Change the Number of Decimals:

1. Select the Contours | Color Ranges menu command to open
the Range Editor.

A guide to using WinGLink

12BCommon Functions 13-9

2. In the Ranges frame, enter in the decimals field the numbers of

decimals you would like to display (set this number to 0 if you
do not want to display any decimals).
3. Click the OK button.

Gridding
In order display contours and gridded colors in maps and sections, station
values must be interpolated on a regular grid. This operation creates a
two-dimensional array of values, also referred to as a grid. Each of the
WinGLink module with gridding functionality includes a Gridding
window which is displayed the first time a new dataset is to be displayed.
This window can also be opened by selecting the Gridding | New Grid
menu command.
Although the gridding parameters vary according to data type, the
principle remains the same regardless of in which program the Gridding
window is opened.

To Grid Station Data

1. Select the section or map to be gridded.
2. Select the Gridding | New Grid menu command. A form
similar to that shown below this is displayed:

3. The numbers in parenthesis on the gray background show the

maximum and minimum values of the data. The current value
to be used to define the grid extent must be entered in the entry
field adjacent to each number.
4. In the Step X field, enter the step size in the specified units.
This number determines the number of columns in the grid,
which will be displayed in the center white box. This white area
represents the section.

13-10 12BCommon Functions

A guide to using WinGLink

5. In the T intervals per decade field, for the case of a pseudosection grid, enter the number of grid rows per decade.
6. Fill the fields with the values for the interpolation radius, spline
weight and smoothing factor.
7. Click the OK button to generate and draw the grid.
Note: As the interpolation radius increases (values >5), the gridding
algorithm attempts to fill any holes present in the data by interpolating
between relatively distant data points. In some cases, such as when
creating difference pseudo-sections, we recommend using a low
interpolation radius (2) to prevent the creation of misleading pseudosections.

Copying Display Parameters

The individual application programs which comprise WinGLink
function by opening multiple windows, each one containing a different
map or section. For example, in the MT Pseudo-Sections program, a
number of different sections may be displayed simultaneously, each one
representing different components of one or more datasets.
Nearly all WinGLink modules include a number of functions which can
be used to apply the display settings of one window (e.g. one x-section
display) to one or more other currently open windows. For example, if
the view area of one x-section is set to cover a selected length of a
profile, say from 2 10km, and all other windows currently display the
entire profile length, the display area of the other windows can be
adjusted by first selecting the master window, then using the Window |
Copy View Area menu command to activate the function, and then
clicking each window which is to be adjusted to the view area of the
master window:

WinGLink provides a number of commands which function in an

identical manner. The available commands vary from module to module,
but generally include functions such as:

A guide to using WinGLink

Copy Size

Copy View Area

Copy Grid Parameters

Copy Display Options

Copy Ranges

12BCommon Functions 13-11

Copying Screen Contents

For display and presentation purposes, it is often necessary to capture the
screen contents. All WinGLink modules provide two functions for this
purpose:
-

Copy to Clipboard

and
-

Copy to Bitmap

The Copy to Clipboard utility, accessed with the Window | Copy to

Clipboard menu command, copies the current map or section to the
clipboard for pasting into other Windows-based applications.
The Copy to Bitmap utility copies the current map or section to an
external file. After selecting the Window | Copy to Bitmap command,
you are prompted to enter a file name under which the image is to be
stored.

Editing and Formatting Stations

Setting the Display Options for the Stations of a
Project
An ancillary window, called the Projects Window, can be opened to
control the display and the editing of the stations of each project.
On the View menu, select Projects Window.
A typical Projects Window looks like this:

For each project:

Check
To apply the corresponding option to all project
box:
stations:

13-12 12BCommon Functions

Display names

Display symbols

Display 1D model (X-Sections only)

Post vertical dataset values

A guide to using WinGLink

Note: The new settings are applied to all windows but do not become
active until a given window is clicked

Applying the Same Display Options to the

Stations of All Projects in Maps and X-sections
Global commands are available to set the same display options for the
stations of all projects displayed in a map. For example, to show the
station names for all projects in a map or X-section

Open the Project Window using the View | Project Window menu
command, then click the heading N :
The following dialog box opens:

Formatting the Appearance of the Station

Names, Symbols and Posted Values for Each
Project
Stations can be displayed with different font size, color and symbol by
saving the settings in the Project Station Properties.

To Edit the Stations Properties for a Project:

1. Select the Stations | Properties command or:
2. Open the Project Window using the View | Project Window
menu command.
3. In the Project Window, click the symbol of the project whose
stations you want to format. The symbol of the active project
will be displayed with a bold red border
4. Double-click the project symbol or select the Stations |
Properties menu command.
5. The Station Properties dialog box opens, similar to the
following:

A guide to using WinGLink

12BCommon Functions 13-13

6. Select the appropriate tab and set fonts and symbols for the
project stations as desired.
The Station Properties window for projects of type Wells (WL) contains
an additional tab which includes options specific to well courses:

The station format used in

the Maps program can be
different from the station
format used in the sections
programs.

The format settings saved for the stations of a project in a map are used
for every map containing the stations of that project. Different settings
can be saved for displaying sections, but the settings saved for one
section will be used on all sections.

The Category and Pattern Editors

WinGLinks Category and Pattern editors are used to create patterns and
assign them to specific categories. These features are used, for example,
to associate a specific pattern to a given layer of strata in a well or to
assign a pattern to a specific region in a map or section in the Interpreted
Views and Montage (IVM) program.

13-14 12BCommon Functions

A guide to using WinGLink

In addition to IVM and the Well Editor, the Category and Pattern editors
is available in the X-Sections and 2D Inversion modules. The categories
are centrally stored in the database. Thus, regardless of the program in
which categories are edited or new categories created, the modifications
are reflected throughout the database.
Once categories, or types of layers, have been created, any time another
layer of that type is encountered in a section within the database,
WinGLink automatically performs filling.

To Assign Fill Patterns to Layer Data:

1. Select the Tools | Category Editor menu command to open the
Category Editor:

Displayed in the Category frame are all existing categories.

Categories are created automatically when importing layer data
into WinGLink and can also be created using the Add New
button located at the bottom of the left column.
The elements in the Item frame are the description elements
contained in layer-data files which were linked to the given
category type during import. New items can be created using
the New button located in the upper right corner of the
Category Editor.
2. Select a category and item with the mouse. The current pattern
type is displayed in the Pattern Type dropdown box.
3. Click the arrow at the right end of the Pattern Type dropdown
box to open a box containing all available fill patterns. Choose
back color and fore color for the filling using the provided
drop-down boxes.
4. The Pattern Editor, described below, can be used to create new
patterns. This editor can be opened using either the button
provided in the Category Editor or by selecting the Tools |
Pattern Editor command on the main menu.
The Import function, which is called up using the Import button in the
Category Editor, provides a function for importing entire categories from
other databases. If you import a duplicate category, the Category Editor
can be used to merge the two categories together.

A guide to using WinGLink

12BCommon Functions 13-15

Upon closing the Category Editor, well courses are filled with the
appropriate fill patterns:

The Pattern Editor

The Pattern editor is used to create and edit fill patterns. Theses patterns
can be used, for example, to fill shapes used in cultural data layers or as
fill patterns to describe layers of vertically distributed data, e.g. wells.
Patterns created in the Pattern Editor are available in the property
windows of all elements which support fill patterns, both in IVM and in
other WinGLink modules. In the main WinGLink modules, this feature is
available only for sections which contain well courses, e.g. X-Sections.
To open and use the Pattern editor:
1. Select the Tools | Pattern Editor menu command to open the
Pattern Editor:

13-16 12BCommon Functions

A guide to using WinGLink

2. To create a new pattern, position the mouse over the Editing

window, then click and hold down the left mouse button. Slide
the mouse across the edit window to create a pattern. You may
alternatively click individual squares to create a pattern. When
finished, click the Save button.
3. To edit an existing pattern, open the Select Pattern dropdown
list. Make any changes to the pattern, then click the Save button
to overwrite the pattern with your changes, or Save As to
save your changes to a new pattern.
Note: The only color available in the pattern editor is red. When using
patterns as a fill, you may, however, select both foreground and
background colors when assigning the pattern in the Category Editor.

Printing
Overview
To print the section or map displayed in the active window, select the
File | Print menu command. This opens another window, the Layout

A guide to using WinGLink

12BCommon Functions 13-17

Definition window. Here, the map or section is represented by a white

rectangular box, surrounded by axis tic marks.

Other boxes are shown representing the:

color scale: use the mouse to move or resize this item.

legend, info and title box: these items can be moved, resized
and edited.

scale and scale bar: this item can be moved, resized and
edited. To edit, enter the desired scale and choose from
different scale bar formats.

Information on changing display parameters of these elements is

provided further below.
A red border
indicates the paper size with respect to the size of
the items to be printed. To change the paper size, use the Printer button.
This button is also used to set the printer
Margins and page orientation are set using the Setup button.
Each box can be sized and edited interactively until a satisfactory output
layout has been obtained. The appearance of the final presentation can be
checked by pressing the Preview button.
When ready, click the
printer.

button to send the map or section to the

Setting the Printer

On the Layout Definition form, click the

button.

Setting up the Page

To set the page margins:
1. Click the Setup button.
2. Set the margins and the orientation and click the OK button.

To set the page size:

1. Click the

13-18 12BCommon Functions

button.

A guide to using WinGLink

2. From the dropdown list, choose the printer and click the
Properties button.
3. The printer driver dialog box opens; select the paper size.
4. Exit the printer driver dialog box.

Modifying the Print Layout

For a given map or section, a print layout consists of the position of the
items to be printed (and whether or not they will be printed) as well as
their positions on the printout and their sizes. These items are represented
by either white rectangular boxes in the layout page or, for the smaller
items, by scaled-down versions the items. These include:
Map, Title, Legend, Info, Color scale, Map Scale, North Arrow (maps
only)
After you have defined a layout, you can save it and apply it to the same
or other maps at a later time.
Items included in the layout can be selected by clicking the Display
button at the top of the window:

Use the mouse to select/deselect the items to be displayed.

Moving and Resizing Items on the Print Layout

Any of the print items can be moved with respect to the page margins and
resized.

To Move and Resize Objects Using the Mouse:

1. Click the item; a white dot appears next to each of the vertices.
The mouse pointer changes to a four headed arrow.
2. To move the item, left-click the item and move the mouse
while holding down the button; release the button to drop the
item.
3. To resize the item, move to one of its vertices until the mouse
pointer turns to a double-headed arrow; left click and hold
down the button; move the mouse to resize the item and release
the button when the desired size has been reached.

A guide to using WinGLink

12BCommon Functions 13-19

To Move and Resize Objects Using the Keyboard:

1. Click the item; a white dot appears next to each of the vertices.
The mouse pointer changes to a four headed arrow.
2. To move the item, hold down the CTRL key and press one of
the cursor keys.
3. To resize the item, hold down the SHIFT key and press one of
the cursor keys.
4. To move or resize multiple items, click the items while holding
down the SHIFT key and follow steps 2 - 3.

To Change Display Parameters

Double-click any of the screen items to open a parameter window in
which the display parameters for the given element can be edited.

Editing the Textual Print Items

Each of the Title, Legend and Info items can be subdivided into one or
more frames in which text can be edited and formatted. Frame text can
include fields linked to the active database, e.g. area name, equipment
used, etc.

To Edit the Contents of the Title, Legend or Info Print

Items:
1. Right click the item frame to be edited. On the shortcut menu,
select Edit Frame Text

2. Edit the frame text. Words enclosed in <> signs are fields taken
from the database. Additional fields may be added by using the
Add Field button.

13-20 12BCommon Functions

A guide to using WinGLink

3. You can format the text using the buttons located in the toolbar
at the top of the window. Click OK.

Frames can be added and removed. Insert frame adds a frame just before
the frame which was right-clicked; Add frame adds a new frame in the
last position.

Changing the Scale

The map scale can be redefined. If the scale is changed, the size of the
map on the print pages will be modified accordingly and vice versa.

To Redefine the Scale:

1. Double-click the map scale.
2. Enter the desired ratio in the scale field.

3. Click the OK button.

The scale also changes if the map item is resized.
Example
Before map resizing

After map resizing

A guide to using WinGLink

12BCommon Functions 13-21

Splitting the Printout Over Several Pages

A map or section may be enlarged in such a way that, when sent to the
printer, it is split and printed on more than one page.
Whenever you drag an item outside the boundaries of a page or resize an
item so that it falls outside the page, new pages are added to the layout in
order to print all the items.

Saving a Layout
To Save a Print Layout:
1.

Click

and select Save as

2.

Enter the new layout name and click the OK button.

Loading a Layout
To Load a Previously Saved Print Layout:
1. Click
and select Load .There can be more than one
layout for each value type. Note that you may select a layout
which is associated with a value type different from the one
being printed:

2. Select the source and one of the available layouts; click the OK
button.

Printing to File
In addition to the direct output to a selected printer, the Print functionality
found throughout WinGLink can be used to send printer output to a
number of file formats:

13-22 12BCommon Functions

Printer specific (e.g. *prn, *ps). The printer-specific format is

dependent on the output types supported by the printer
driver. A PostScript (ps) file can be output by printing to a

A guide to using WinGLink

PostScript printer driver, regardless of whether a PostScript

printer is actually connected to the computer.

EMF

CGM

PDF

To Print to Files of Type Other Than PDF:

1. Select the File | Print menu command as you would to print to
a printer.
2. Select the Print to File checkbox in the Options section of the
Printer Setting dialog box.
3. Select the desired file format from the dropdown list:

Important:
When printing to EMF of CGM files, note the following: Although
output is not sent to a physical printer, the paper properties of the printer
selected in the Printer section of the Printer Settings dialog are used. Each
output file can be considered to be a page of printer output. Because the
entire output is sent to a single file, however, you must ensure that the
paper size selected for the printer is large enough for the entire print area,
i.e. fits within the red border which defines the first page of output in the
Print Preview screen. Any information outside of the first page is clipped
in the output file.

To Print to PDF Files:

The driver used to create PDF files, the Acrobat Distiller available from
Adobe, functions in the same way as a regular printer driver. PDF files
can be created only if this software has been installed on your system.
1. Select the File | Print menu command as you would to print to
a printer.
2. Select the Acrobat Distiller printer from the Printer section of
the Printer Settings dialog box and set the properties as required
by clicking the Properties button.
3. Do not select the Print to File checkbox in the Options
section.

A guide to using WinGLink

12BCommon Functions 13-23

13-24 12BCommon Functions

A guide to using WinGLink

14: Maps

Overview
The primary uses of the Maps program are to:
- manage stations
- create profiles
- create and display contoured and color-filled maps of the different
values associated with the stations of a project
In this chapter we will first present an overview of how the program
creates maps and will then provide general instructions on how to create
maps, including information on creating and working with profiles as
well as managing stations. The chapter will conclude with detailed
information on working with specific data types in the Maps program.

Getting Started with the Maps Program

This section provides an overview of basic functions of the Maps
program, including:
-

Creating a new map

Creating a profile

Assigning stations to a profile

This is the bare minimum for preparing a WinGLink project for use with
section-based modules, such as 2DMT, X-Sections and Pseudo-Sections.
Detailed information on creating specific map types, managing stations
and working with specific data types is provided in the sections which
follow.

Creating a New Map

The first time the Maps program is started for a given project which
already contains stations, the program opens with a dialog box which
contains options for creating standard map types for the given data type.
At a minimum, this dialog box contains an option for creating an
elevation map. When beginning work with a new project, the elevation
map is a often good place to perform the initial administrative work
which, depending on data type, needs to be taken care of with a new
project, i.e. profile creation, assignment of stations.

A guide to using WinGLink

13BMaps 14-1

Starting the Maps Program and Creating an Elevation

Map:
1. In the WinGLink Shell, use the mouse to select the project for
which a map is to be created.
2. Click the Maps icon.
3. The program starts with the Open Map dialog box. Select the
Elevation checkbox and click the Open button to continue:

4. If creating the elevation map for the first time, the program now
prompts you to select the gridding options:

The Grid using default parameters option generally provides

suitable gridding results. Select the second option to set the
individual gridding parameters. Information on setting these
parameters can be found further below in the Map Grids
section of this chapter and in the Common Functions chapter
of this manual.
Provided the project contains at least two stations with
elevation values, the Maps program opens with the elevation

14-2 13BMaps

A guide to using WinGLink

map for the data:

Creating and Using Profile Traces

A profile trace is a polygonal line added to the database area and to
which individual stations can be associated. A profile trace added to a
map is available to all projects in the database and can be used for:

Constructing sections along the profile by adding stations

to the trace and using the station datasets to build different
types of sections (examples: pseudo-sections, imaged
sections, etc.).

Extracting an interpolated value profile from the grid of a

map (example: interpolated Bouguer anomaly profile).

Constructing a value profile by adding stations to the

trace, and plotting the station values vs. the distance along
the profile (example: Bouguer anomaly profile using station
values).

The use of the same profile trace for all type of sections is the basis for
the integrated display of interpretive sections. For example, a 2D gravity
model can be easily superimposed on a resistivity cross section because
they are referenced to the same profile trace.

Adding a Profile Trace

1. Select the Profiles | Add profile trace menu command.
2. Move the mouse pointer to the location at which you would like
to insert the first node of the trace.
3. Click the left mouse button, release it and move the cursor to
the next node.
4. To draw more nodes, repeat the above step; click the right
mouse button to add the last profile node.

A guide to using WinGLink

13BMaps 14-3

5. Enter a name for the profile trace.

6. If you would like to add another profile trace, press the Next
button and repeat steps 2-5.
7. Click the Close button.

Editing the Nodes of a Profile Trace

1. Select the Profiles | Edit profile trace menu command.
2. Click the profile trace you would like to edit.
3. Edit the name and/or the longitude and latitude values of the
nodes which define the trace:

4. Click the OK button.

Adding Stations to a Profile Trace

This section explains how to associate existing stations to profile traces
in order to construct value profiles or sections. For help on how to insert

14-4 13BMaps

A guide to using WinGLink

new stations at a regular spacing along a profile trace, see Inserting New
Stations Along a Profile Trace in this chapter.
The basic commands used to construct a section along a profile trace are
activated by pressing:

To Switch to Profile Mode

1. Click the profile trace which to you would like to add stations;
the profile trace turns red to indicate that is selected.
2. If the selected profile trace consists of more than one segment,
the unselected segments are displayed in light green.

To Add One Station at a Time

1. Click the arrow button and then click the symbol of each station
to be added to the profile.
2. Added stations turn red.

To Add All Stations Located Within a Given

Distance from the Profile:
1. Click the button shown above, then left-click the profile trace
and hold down the mouse button.
2. Resize the band by moving the mouse pointer away from the
profile trace
3. Release the mouse button when band has reached the desired
size.
4. Selected stations turn red

To Select Another Profile or Profile Segment

1. To activate another profile, click the button shown above, then
click the new profile trace. For multi-segment profiles, each
segment is edited separately and should be edited as a separate
profile

To Return to Station Mode (or select Profiles |

goto Station Mode)
1. Click the button shown above to return to station mode.
Alternatively, you may use the Profiles | goto Station Mode
menu command to return to station mode.

Shown below is a selected profile in profile mode with attached

stations:

A guide to using WinGLink

13BMaps 14-5

Note: The program can handle over 32,000 stations on a single profile.

Creating Maps
Each time the Maps program is launched, the stations of the project
which is currently highlighted in the WinGLink Shell are loaded. For
multiple projects, i.e. integrated projects, the stations of all member
projects are loaded.
When running the Maps program, you may open many maps at the same
time, one for each type of value. For example, for gravity data, maps may
be open for elevation, observed gravity, terrain correction among
others. New maps can also be created by importing, computing or
extracting new values. The resulting maps can then be saved and
reopened during subsequent sessions.
The user is presented with a list of all maps which have been saved
during previous sessions when the Maps program is launched as well as
given the option of creating standard maps available for the given data
type.

Items Displayed in a Map

Maps are displayed by combining the display of different items, which
the user can interactively modify by editing the respective data and
properties. The items represented in a WinGLink map

14-6 13BMaps

A guide to using WinGLink

are:

Item

Meaning

Stations

The stations contained in the current project and those

of any attached project. Each project can be assigned a
different symbol to identify its stations. Stations are
plotted with their names, values and symbols.

Color
Ranges

For each map, the value distribution is organized in

ranges of different colors. Default color palettes are
available. The user may also create new or modify
existing palettes.

Contour
Lines

Annotated contour lines are drawn based on the

defined value ranges. The user can define the contour
interval and the line thickness.

Profiles
Traces

Polygonal lines can be added to the area to serve as a

base for profile and section construction. Profiles are
elements of a map which are shared by any other maps
contained in the database.

3D MT
Meshes

3D MT meshes, in the Randy Mackie format, which

have been imported into a WinGLink database, can be
superimposed onto MT project maps.

Parameter Values Used to Generate Maps

Each map contained in a WinGLink database is defined by the name of
the displayed parameter, e.g. elevation or observed gravity. The values
used to build each map are:
1. The values of the parameter at each station of the project
2. The interpolated values of the same parameter
whereby interpolated values are added to the maps by one of the
following methods:
-

interpolating the parameter values at each station

importing an external grid

transforming an external grid

Creating Standard Maps

As will be described in more detail, each project type has associated with
it certain standard maps. These maps are available for all projects of a
given type. For example, the standard maps available to gravity projects
include elevation, observed gravity and terrain correction. They represent
fixed, measured values. The standard maps available with a given project
type are listed in the Open Map dialog box which appears when the Maps
program is started. This dialog box can also be opened with the File |
Open Map menu command.

A guide to using WinGLink

13BMaps 14-7

Creating New Map Definitions

About Map Definitions
In addition to the standard maps mentioned above, it is possible to
generate maps using values extracted from a given data set. With MT
data, for example, it is possible to extract a resistivity map for a specific
tensor component at a given frequency. The number of possible maps is,
therefore, limitless. Each time a new map is created in a project, the
definition of the parameter values used to generate the map is saved in
the database and made available to all other projects. The same map can
then be created using the data contained in any other project, if available.
Assume, for example, that we have a database which contains two
different MT projects:
Prj_1 and Prj_2
We create the map of Apparent resistivity at T=100 sec by extracting it
from the station datasets of Prj_1:

This map definition will then be available in the list of existing map
definitions when the Maps program is started for the Prj_2 project, or any
other MT project:

Thus, the same map definition (Apparent resistivity at T=10 sec ) can
be used to extract equivalent values from any other MT project without
needing to recreate the map definition..

Types of Map Definitions

Different project types have associated with them different data types
from which data can be extracted to generate new maps. In the example

14-8 13BMaps

A guide to using WinGLink

used above, we created an apparent resistivity map for the XY

component at a period of 10 seconds.
Associated with the various project types are also map types which can
be generated on the basis of user-defined parameters, e.g. induction
arrows at a specific frequency for MT data:

Options for generating new map definitions can be accessed with the File
| New Map menu command. The figure below shows the options
available for an MT project:

Creating a New Map

In addition to the standard map types associated with a given project
type, the Maps program provides a number of different methods for
creating new maps. New maps can be created using station values, either
imported or entered in the Maps program via the keyboard or by
combining two existing maps.
The options for creating new maps can be accessed with two options
available with the File | New Map menu command:

Enter Values from Keyboard/File

Combine Maps

Entering Values from the Keyboard/File

1. Select the File | New Map menu command and click the Enter
Values from Keyboard/File option. The Maps program
displays the following window, instructing you to open the

A guide to using WinGLink

13BMaps 14-9

View Data window:

2. On the Stations menu, click View Data or click

toolbar.

in the

3. The data sheet form for the new value type appears. Listed in
the first five columns (from left to right) are the station names,
states, latitudes, longitudes and elevations. The sixth column is
empty and will be used to enter the values.
4. Enter the station values in the data sheet. You may leave some
values blank.

5. Alternatively, you may import the data from an external file by

executing the File | Import menu command. The file must
contain at least the station ID and the value to be imported,
though may also contain coordinate and elevation information.
The program guides you through the import process using the
Import Wizard described in the Data Import chapter of this
manual.
6. After entering/importing the data, select the File | Exit menu
command; confirm changes by clicking the Yes button.
7. Enter the Name, Unit and # of decimals for the new value type.
Click the OK button:

When selecting this option, a new map definition is created with a default
name Value ( ). The map properties can be accessed and modified at a
later time by selecting Map Properties from the File menu.

Adding or Subtracting Map Values

14-10 13BMaps

A guide to using WinGLink

New maps can also be created by combining (adding or subtracting) the

values of two existing maps.
1. Select the File | New Map menu command and click the
Combine Maps option.
2. Select the source map and click the Next button.
3. Select the operator (Add Map or Subtract Map) and click the
Next button.
4. Select the second map and click the Next button.
5. Enter the name for the computed map and click the Finish
button.

Creating Maps by Merging Data from Different

Projects
The data source for a given map is dependent on the project type. As
described in the WinGLink Shell chapter of this manual, WinGLink
gives the user the option of creating two different types of projects: single
and integrated.
If an integrated project, containing for example two projects named Prj_1
and Prj_2, is created grouping the two projects, any created map will
include station data from both projects.
Separate maps can be generated for each project by opening the single
projects, i.e. the projects which are members of the integrated projects, in
the Maps program. Gridding is performed on basis of the stations
contained in each project.

Loading an Existing Map

To Open a Map:
1. Select the File | Open Map menu command.
2. Select the map by clicking the check box located to the left of
each map name.
3. Click the Open button.
Each map opens in a separate window. Use the options provided on the
Window menu to switch between or tile the windows

Map Grids
Gridding a Map
To display map contours and color fill ranges, the station values must be
interpolated on a regular grid. This operation creates a two-dimensional
array of values, also referred to as the map grid.

A guide to using WinGLink

13BMaps 14-11

Regridding a Map Using Different Parameters

This option lets you create a new grid by resampling the current map
grid:
1. Select the window containing the map you would like to regrid.
2. Select the Grid Tools | Resampling menu command:

3. Enter the new grid step and the grid endpoints

4. Click the Compute button.
A window is opened for the new map with the new grid. Use the File |
Save menu command to save this map. Station values can be extracted
from this new map using the Extract Value command described below.

To Interpolate the Parameter Values:

1. Open the map which contains the values to be interpreted.
2. Select the Gridding menu | New Grid menu command
3. The numbers in parenthesis show the coordinates of the stations
having maximum and minimum Northing and Easting. The new
grid boundaries can be entered in the fields located above each
of these numbers.

4. Choose the preferred Gridding Option (Normal / Logarithmic);

5. Complete the fields with the values for the Interpolation
Radius, Spline Weight and Smoothing Factor.
6. Click the Compute button.
When the station data are changed as the result of subsequent editing, a
new map grid must be created in order to show an updated map.

To Regrid the Map Using the Previous Grid Settings:

1. Select the window containing the value you would like to
regrid.
2. Select the Gridding | Regrid menu command.

14-12 13BMaps

A guide to using WinGLink

To Enable the Gridding of Masked Nodes:

1. Select the View | Display Options menu command. In the
Display Options dialog, select the Grid masked nodes
checkbox on the General tab:

Extracting Station Values From Grids

This option assigns to each station the value calculated by interpolating
from the grid nodes the value at each stations location, as defined by the
station coordinates.
1. Select the window which contains the map.
2. Select the Stations | View Data menu command or click the
button.
3. Click the Value column header.
4. Choose Operators | Extract Value from the Grid menu.
5. Select the File | Exit menu command and confirm the changes.

Importing External Grids

External grids can be imported into WinGLink and added to the current
project. All standard grid formats are supported, e.g. USGS, Surfer,
Geopack, LCT.

To Import an External Grid into the Current Project:

1. Load the map into which you wish to import the grid, or
2. Create a new map which will correspond to the imported grid.

A guide to using WinGLink

13BMaps 14-13

3. Select the File | Import Grid menu command. WinGLink

supports the standard formats shown below:

4. Select the appropriate format for the grid which is to be

imported from the Files of type list.
5. In the Grid Import window, select the XY units of the grid. If
the grid is very large, you can reduce the number of data points
which are imported by making the appropriate selections in the
Read every fields.

6. If necessary, use the Grid Tools | Resampling menu command

to resample the grid using user-defined values.

Exporting grids
Map grids created in WinGLink can be exported to external files in a
number of different formats for use in other applications or for importing
into another WinGLink project.

To Export a Grid to an External File:

1. Create or open the map for which the grid is to be exported
2. Select the File | Export Grid menu command and select the
desired file format:

14-14 13BMaps

A guide to using WinGLink

Adding and Editing stations

Importing Stations From a Text File
Station coordinates, elevations and values can be imported from external
text files (columnar data). Station data can only be imported into single
projects. When the current project is an integrated project, the import
function is disabled.

To Import Stations From a Text File:

1. Load the map into which you would like to import the value or
2. Select File | New Map | Enter Values from Keyboard/File to
create a new map using the imported data.
3. On the Stations menu, click View Data or click the
on the toolbar.

button

4. The Maps datasheet form appears. Listed in the first five

columns (from left to right) are the station name, states,
latitudes, longitudes and elevations. If you selected a map other
than elevations, two additional columns appear on the right
side: a column for the value and a column for the value status.
5. Select the File | Import menu command on the datasheet menu.
6. Browse the directories to select the file to be imported and click
Open.
7. The WinGLink Text File Import Wizard starts. Refer to the
instructions provided in the Data Import chapter of this
manual for more details.
8. When finished, use the File | Exit menu command on the
datasheet menu to exit the datasheet. Click Yes to confirm the
import.
9. If the data have been imported into a new map, the Map
Properties form will open. Assign the map a name, a
measurement unit (used only in legends) and the number of
decimals to be saved for each imported value. Click OK.
The file containing the data which are to be imported must be a text file
organized in columns where one of the columns contains station names
and the other three columns contain the station longitude, latitude and
elevation. Another optional column may contain a value to be imported.
Warning: The WinGLink import function identifies stations by name.
This may cause the program to overwrite existing data if the import
options are not set correctly.

A guide to using WinGLink

13BMaps 14-15

Importing New Values for Existing Stations

The import stations function can also be used to import new values for
existing project stations or to update them by importing revised data from
a text file.
Note: This procedure is only enabled for single projects.
To import new values for existing stations:
Make sure that the file to be imported has at least two columns:

one column containing the values to be imported

one column containing the corresponding station name

Load the map into which the file containing the new or updated data are
to be imported.
Refer to Importing Stations From a Text File above for detailed
instructions.
When selecting the fields in the file to be imported, skip any field that
should not be imported or updated.
At the end of the import process, a window opens which contains
information regarding the number of stations contained in the imported
file which were merged, skipped or appended..
A station is merged if a station with the same name is found in the
destination project. In this case the existing station takes the value
imported from the file as well as the values, if any, of other fields not
tagged with the Skip keyword.
A station is skipped if no station with the same name is found in the
destination project and no field of the imported file is assigned to be
latitude or longitude for the station.
A station is appended if no station with the same name is found in the
destination project: the station is added to the current project and is
assigned the values of any field not tagged with the Skip keyword.

Using the Datasheet to Add, Delete or Edit

Stations
The Maps program has a built-in datasheet which can be used to add,
delete and edit the station information used when building a map. To
open the datasheet, select the Stations | View Data menu command or
click the

button on the toolbar.

Adding Stations
1. Click the left-most cell of the first empty row:

2. Enter the fields described in the column headers. If unedited,

the Active and Value Status fields are automatically filled with
the YES and NO values, respectively.

14-16 13BMaps

A guide to using WinGLink

Deleting Stations
1. In the datasheet, highlight the rows of the stations which are to
be deleted (use the Shift and Ctrl keys for multiple selection.)
2. Press the Delete key, and confirm the delete command by
clicking the OK button.

Editing Stations
1. Click the cell which contains the field to be edited.
2. Edit the data.

Applying Operators to Station Values

1. Click the

button to open the datasheet.

2. Select Operators from the menu in the datasheet window, then

choose the desired operator and enter the requested parameters.
3. Warning: When saving the map, choose the Save As
command if you do not want to overwrite the original data.

Extracting Elevations from Grids

1. Click the

button to open the datasheet.

2. Select any element in the Elevation column (i.e. the column

heading or an elevation value).
3. Select Operators from the menu in the datasheet window, then
choose the Extract Elevation from Grid menu command.
Here, select either the Using project topography or Using
Area topography option.
4. The program then automatically extracts the elevation values
from the specified source and uses these values in the elevation
grid.

Updating Extracted Values After Editing Stations

If editing is performed on stations after parameter values have been
extracted, the corresponding map can be updated with the new values
using the File | Update Map command.

Using the Interactive Graphic Editor to Add,

Delete and Edit Stations
Station editing can be performed using an interactive graphic feature of
the Maps program.
Note: When working with integrated stations, the operations listed below
apply to the project currently selected in the Project window. It is only
possible to delete, move or edit stations belonging to that project.
Likewise, new stations are added to the current project.

Adding Stations
1. Select the Stations | Insert Station menu command.

A guide to using WinGLink

13BMaps 14-17

2. Move the mouse pointer to the location on the map at which

you would like to place the station then click.
3. Fill the Insert Station window with the appropriate field values.
4. Continue adding all desired stations.
5. Right-click the mouse or press the Esc key to stop adding
stations.

Deleting Stations
1. Select the Stations | Delete station menu command.
2. Move the mouse pointer over the station you wish to delete and
click.
3. In the window which then opens, place a check mark to the left
of the stations to delete the station, then click Delete.
4. Right-click the mouse or press the Esc key to stop deleting
stations.

Editing Stations
1. Select the Stations | Edit station menu command.
2. Move the mouse pointer over the station you wish to delete and
click.
3. Edit the value field and select the value status (ON/OFF).
4. Click the OK button.
5. Right-click the mouse or press the Esc key to stop editing
stations.

Moving Stations
1. Select the Stations | Move station menu command.
2. Move the mouse pointer over the station you wish to move and
left-click.
3. Move the mouse pointer to the location on the map where you
would like to place the station to be moved and click.
4. The Move Station window opens. In the ID field, enter the
name of the new station; fill the elev field with the elevation
and edit the x and y fields if necessary. If you selected a map
other than elevations, you can supply the value for the new
station and its ON/OFF status as well.
5. Click the OK button.

Inserting New Stations Along a Profile Trace

This interactive operation is used to automatically insert stations along a
profile trace at regular distances:
1. Make sure the desired profile trace is on your map. If not, add a
new profile trace.
2. Select the Stations | Insert stations along profile menu
command.

14-18 13BMaps

A guide to using WinGLink

3. Move the cross-shaped mouse pointer to a location on the

desired profile trace and click it to select the profile.
4. The Insert Stations dialog box opens:

5. Fill the fields as appropriate.

6. Click the OK button to insert the stations.
Note: The program can handle over 32,000 stations on a single profile.

Profile Traces and Value Profiles

The general procedure for creating profiles and assigning stations to them
is described in the Getting Started with the Maps Program section of
this chapter. The description here is limited to:
-

Viewing profile values

Working with sections

Exporting profiles

Viewing Profile Values and Displaying the

Frequency Spectrum
To display a sectional view of the profile in a separate window:
1. Select the Profiles | goto Profile Mode menu command or
click the
trace.

button. This enables you to select the profile

2. Select the Profiles | Select Profile menu command.

3. Click the profile to be displayed as a section.

A guide to using WinGLink

13BMaps 14-19

4. Select the View | Profile Graph menu command to display the

profile window:

This window displays one of two different graphs, depending which

button is enabled.
XY Graph
The observed values of the stations attached to the profile are plotted as
red dots.
The interpolated values extracted from the map grid along the profile
trace are displayed as a continuous gray line. The y-axis of the graph
represents the values along the profile, while the x-axis represents the
distances along the profile trace.
Spectra
Spectra calculated along the profile are plotted vs. frequency.

Constructing Sections Along Profile Traces

As described in brief in the Getting Started with the Maps Program
section of this chapter, before 2D sections can be created in other
WinGLink modules, the following steps must be performed:
1. Add a profile to the database area
When a profile trace is added to a map, the trace is saved in the
database and can be used in any other map of any project
contained in the database. Profile traces are elements of the area
to which the database refers.
5. Add stations to the profile
These stations provide, in the case of vertical soundings or
wells, the datasets needed to build the section. In the case of
gravity and magnetic projects, the observed anomaly values are
extracted along the profile trace from the gridded map, and the
stations associated to the profile provide the information on the
measured values .
When Maps is launched on a single project, the stations contained in the
project can be added to a profile trace to construct the project sections.
When Maps is launched on an integrated project, the stations of each
member project can be added to a profile trace, if not yet associated.
Note: A station added to a profile trace in an integrated project is also
added in its original project.

14-20 13BMaps

A guide to using WinGLink

Stations from many different projects can be added to a given profile

trace. As a result, integrated sections can be obtained by using, for
example, equivalent datasets from MT, EM and DC projects (i.e. imaged
sections, 1D models, cross sections).

Exporting Profiles
Use the Profiles | Export Profiles menu command to export all profiles
visible from within either the current project or all profiles in the
database to an external text file. By default, only the visible profiles are
exported; to export all profiles in the database, select the Export hidden
profiles checkbox.

MT Maps
Mapping MT Parameters
To Plot Resistivity and Phase Curves
1. On the File menu, select the New Map | Miniature Curves
menu command:

2. Make the desired settings and click the OK button. The

resistivity and phase curves for each sounding of the project are
calculated and plotted in a box centered on the station locations

A guide to using WinGLink

13BMaps 14-21

to give a global view of the curves in the survey area:

To Plot Polar Diagrams

1. On the File menu, select the New Map | Polar Diagrams menu
command:

2. Enter the central frequency for which the polar diagrams should
be calculated, as well as the other parameters requested in the
dialog window.
3. Click the OK button to display the polar diagrams for that
frequency.
4. Repeat the steps described above to display maps of polar
diagrams for other frequencies.
5. On the View menu, select the Display Option menu command
to edit the size of the polar diagram on both monitor and
printer.

To Plot Induction Arrows

1. On the File menu, select the New Map | Induction Arrows
menu command:

14-22 13BMaps

A guide to using WinGLink

2. Enter the central frequency for which the induction arrows

should be calculated, as well as the other parameters requested
in the dialog window.
3. Click the OK button to display the induction arrows for that
frequency.
4. Repeat the steps described above to display maps of induction
arrows for other frequencies.
5. On the View menu, select Display Option to edit the size of
the real and imaginary arrows on both monitor and printer.
6. On the View menu, check Legend to display the unit-length
reference segments.
Note: In WinGLink, induction arrows (real and imaginary) always refer
to geographical North.

Extracting Parameter Values from Station

Datasets or Models
In addition to creating maps for the MT parameters as described above,
maps can also be created for a number of different MT parameters at a
given period/frequency or depth/elevation. Using available options, it is
possible to generate maps for any standard MT component, measured or
derived, at a specific period or frequency. Maps can be extracted at a
given depth or elevation using values resulting from 1D, 2D or even 3D
modeling.

Extracting Parameter Values

1. On the File menu, select the New Map | Extract Parameter
Values menu command.
2. Select the desired extraction key from the list of available
options: At constant period/frequency, At constant
depth, or At fixed elevation... Shown below is the dialog
which for extracting at a constant period or frequency:

A guide to using WinGLink

13BMaps 14-23

3. Select the parameter value to be extracted from the drop-down

list.
4. Specify whether to extract by period or frequency.
5. Click the OK button; a window for the new map opens.
6. On the Gridding menu, select New Grid; set the gridding
parameters as necessary.

Updating Extracted Values after Editing Stations

If editing is performed on stations after parameter values have been
extracted, the corresponding map can be updated with the new values
using the File | Update Map command.

Extracting a Map from 3D Meshes

If one or more 3D MT meshes have been imported into a WinGLink
database, it is possible to extract maps at any specified depth or elevation.
Note that this option is available only in MT projects.

To Extract a Map from a 3D Mesh:

1. On the File menu, select the New Map | Extract Map from 3D
Model menu command; select from the available options: At
constant depth or At fixed elevation.
2. In the Extract map dialog box which opens, select the source
3D mesh, value (resistivity, conductance or transverse
resistance) and depth or elevation:

14-24 13BMaps

A guide to using WinGLink

3. After clicking the OK button to confirm, a gridding window

appears. Accept the default values or make any desired changes
and click the Compute button to extract the map.

Displaying 3D Meshes
3D meshes which have been imported into WinGLink can be
superimposed onto MT projects maps. Profiles projected onto a 3D mesh
can be used in the 2D MT and X-Sections programs to extract sections
from a mesh.

To Display a 3D mesh:
1. Open an MT project
2. On the Maps toolbar, click the 3D Model selection button:

3. The 3D Model selection window opens, listing all models

contained in all MT projects in the database. Select the desired
model with the mouse and click the OK button:

4. Depending on the current view area settings and the geographic

coordinates for the 3D mesh, the mesh may or may not be
displayed on the map after selecting the mesh. You can force
the mesh to be displayed by altering the view settings. To do
this, open the View Area window with the Window | Set View
Area menu command:

A guide to using WinGLink

13BMaps 14-25

The two mesh-specific options in the Auto Range area of the

window, Grid Area and 3D Mesh will force the mesh to be
displayed on screen. The Grid Area option attempts to fit the
entire grid area onto the map, whereas the 3D mesh option
zooms in on the map far enough to display the entire mesh on
the map. By selecting all of the options in the Auto Range area
of the window, you can ensure that all map elements are visible
on the map.
5. The 3D mesh can be toggled on and off by selecting the Hide
Model / Show Model commands, which can be accessed by
clicking the 3D Model selection button:

Note: For details on importing 3D meshes, refer to section Importing

3D Meshes in the Data Import chapter of this manual.

TDEM Maps
Extracting Parameter Values From Station
Datasets or Models
As with MT data, maps can also created for a number of different TDEM
parameters at a given period/frequency or depth/elevation. Using
available options, it is possible to generate maps from observed or
modeled resistivity or voltage at a given time, resistivity or conductance
at a given depth/elevation from a smooth or layered model.

Extracting Parameter Values

1. On the File menu, select the New Map | Extract Parameter
Values menu command.

14-26 13BMaps

A guide to using WinGLink

2. Select the desired extraction key from the list of available

options: At constant period/frequency, At constant
depth, or At fixed elevation... Shown below is the dialog
which for extracting at a constant period or frequency:

3. Select the parameter value to be extracted from the drop-down

list.
4. Depending on the section made above, specify the
time/frequency or depth/elevation for the extraction operation.
5. Click the OK button; a window for the new map opens.
6. On the Gridding menu, click New Grid; set the gridding
parameters as necessary.

Updating Extracted Values After Editing Stations

If editing is performed on stations after parameter values have been
extracted, the corresponding map can be updated with the new values
using the File | Update Map menu command.

Gravity and Magnetic Maps

Gravity and Magnetic Station Anomalies
Computing the Free Air Anomaly
A map of the free air anomaly can be calculated by selecting the File |
New Map | Free Air Anomaly (FAA) menu command.

Computing the Bouguer Anomaly

The Maps program can calculate the simplified (no terrain correction) or
complete Bouguer anomaly for the stations of a gravity project, assuming
that the observed gravity and terrain correction values have been entered
for each station. For details on how to calculate the terrain correction,
please refer to the next section, Terrain Correction Maps.
For stations with missing observed gravity values, the Bouguer anomaly
computation will return an empty value.
Observed gravity values can be imported from text files using the
WinGLink text files import wizard, as detailed in section Importing
Stations From a Text File in this chapter.

A guide to using WinGLink

13BMaps 14-27

Computing IGRF (Magnetic Projects)

This command calculates the international geomagnetic reference field
(IGRF) at each magnetic project station.
1. With the Maps program launched from a magnetic project,
select the File | Compute IGRF menu command.
2. A window appears informing you which reference field will be
used to calculate IGRF. To continue, click the OK button.
A new map named IGRF is created.
Note: The IGRF is computed using the project date entered in the project
properties when the project was created. To correct this date, exit Maps
and modify the project date using the menu command Project |
Properties or pressing the Project Properties button in the main
Database window:
The IGRF-10 model data are used for the IGRF calculation.

Removing IGRF (Magnetic Projects)

With this option you can subtract the IGRF from the magnetic field map.
1. Load the magnetic field map.
2. Select the View | Stations Data menu command or click the
button.
3. Click the Value column header.
4. From the datasheet menu, select Operators | Remove IGRF.
5. Select the File | Exit menu command and confirm the changes.
6. Save the new map with an appropriate name.

Aeromag (Magnetic Projects)

The magnetic anomaly values for aeromag maps are calculated at the
observation point. The observation point is one of the following:
1) Ground survey: Data are collected at ground level
2) Drape survey: Data are collected at a constant positive distance from
the ground level
3) Constant altitude survey: Data are collected at a constant elevation
above the ground level
To select the observation point property:
1. Open the magnetic (MG) project in Maps.
2. Load the value "AeroMag".
3. Select the File | Map Properties menu command. For cases 2
and 3 a flight altitude must be specified, where 0 is the ground.
A drape survey with a fight altitude=0 is equivalent to a ground
survey.

14-28 13BMaps

A guide to using WinGLink

Gravity and Magnetic Field Transformation

Filtering (Low-, High- or Band-Pass Filters)
Use this option to low/high/band-pass filter 2D data grids.
Note that, following conventional terminology, the terms low and
high pass refer to spatial frequency, i.e. 1/wavelength. To eliminate
short-wavelength noise, therefore, a low pass filter is used, and viceversa.
LOW PASS

the minimum wavelength to be passed is requested.

HIGH PASS

the maximum wavelength to be passed is requested.

BAND PASS

wavelengths in the entered range are passed.

Several filters are available for minimizing the effects of ringing (i.e.
leakage of unwanted frequencies into the desired output): square, Bartlett
and Hamming-Tukey. The anti-ringing factor is the narrowness of this
filter: a value of 0 minimizes its width in the frequency domain, while a
value of 10 is so broad that the effects of filtering are minimal.
To filter a grid:
1. Select the Grid Tools | Filtering menu command.
2. Enter the filtering parameters and click the OK button.
3. If you wish to have station values extracted from the new grid,
select Yes when prompted.
The filtered grid is assigned to a new map.

Polynomial Fitting
With this option, you can obtain the regional and residual field of a
selected map.
The regional field is approximated with an nth order polynomial surface.
The residual field is the difference between the polynomial surface and
the selected maps grid.
Both the regional and the residual fields are obtained as maps.
To obtain the regional and residual field of a map:
1. Select the Grid Tools | Polynomial fitting menu command.
2. Enter the name for the map that is to contain the regional field.
3. Enter the name for the map that will contain the residual field
4. Enter the degree of the polynomial surface and click the OK
button.
5. If you wish to have station values extracted from the new grid,
select Yes when prompted.

Derivatives
This option can be used to calculate the 1st horizontal and vertical, and
the 2nd vertical derivatives. This transformation makes use of the fact that
nearby disturbing sources have a greater effect on gradient maps than on
anomaly maps.

A guide to using WinGLink

13BMaps 14-29

The 1st horizontal derivative is calculated directly in the space domain

(see Blakeley and Simpson, 1986). The remaining two are calculated by
conventional Fourier transformation. As usual, the use of derivatives is
limited by their tendency to emphasize noise.
To calculate the derivative of a grid:
1. Select the Grid Tools | Derivatives menu command and the
type of derivative you wish to apply.
2. Select the map containing the input grid (the current map is the
default).
3. Enter the name for the new map that will contain the output
grid.
4. Click the OK button.
5. If you wish to have station values extracted from the new grid,
select Yes when prompted.

Up/Down Continuation
This option allows one to compute anomalies as they would be observed
on a surface parallel to but below the observation surface
(DOWNWARD) or above the observation surface (UPWARD). The user
must enter the level of continuation in kilometers.
DOWNWARD CONTINUATION emphasizes the effect of local shallow
anomalies. This may lead to very noisy maps if the level of continuation
is too large (a maximum continuation level of 2*grid step is
recommended).
UPWARD CONTINUATION will produce smoothing of the anomalies.
To carry out an upward/downward continuation:
1. Select the Grid Tools | Up/Down Continuation menu
command
2. Select the map containing the input grid (the current map is the
default).
3. Enter the name for the new map that will contain the output
grid.
4. Enter the continuation parameters and click the OK button.

Computing Pseudo-Gravity Anomalies

This operator applies only to magnetic project data. It functions by
reducing the magnetic field to the pole (assuming that remanence effects
are negligible) and filtering with the appropriate frequency-domain
operator. The output requires scaling by a factor equal to

|m a | / G
where:

14-30 13BMaps

ma

apparent magnetization (susceptibility x field strength)

the corresponding assumed density contrast

is the gravitational constant and does not need to be

entered

A guide to using WinGLink

You will also have to enter the values for the inclination and declination
of geomagnetic field at the survey location.
This is a useful method for viewing complex magnetic data as it tends to
eliminate much of the clutter caused by dipolar fields.
To compute the pseudo-gravity anomaly:
1. Select the Grid Tools | Pseudo Gravitymenu command.
2. Select the map containing the input grid.
3. Enter the name of the output grid (or accept the default name).
4. Fill the remaining fields and click the OK button.
5. A new map is created. If you wish to have station values
extracted from the new grid, select Yes when prompted.

Computing Pseudo-Magnetic Anomalies

This operator applies only to gravity project data, and is used to compute
the pseudo-magnetic anomaly from the gravity anomaly. The output
requires scaling by a factor equal to

G / |m a |
where

m a apparent magnetization (susceptibility x field strength)

the corresponding assumed density contrast

is the gravitational constant and does not need to be entered

You will also have to enter the values for the inclination and declination
of geomagnetic field at the survey location, assuming that the desired
result is to be comparable with observed magnetic data. When the field is
calculated at the magnetic pole, it is (except for the scaling factor)
equivalent to the first vertical derivative of the gravity field.
For example, suppose that the intensity of the geomagnetic field is
47000nT; assume that the source magnetic susceptibility is 1000mcgs
and we wish to replace this with rock of density contrast 1.0gm.cm-3.
The magnetization to be entered is then 47000 x 1000 x 10-6 = 47 nT
To compute the pseudo-magnetic anomaly from a gravity anomaly:
1. Select the Grid Tools | Pseudo Magneticsmenu command.
2. Select the map containing the input grid (which should be the
gravity anomaly).
3. Enter the name of the output grid (or accept the default name).
4. Fill the remaining fields and click the OK button.
5. A new map is created. If you wish to have station values
extracted from the new grid, select Yes when prompted.

Reduction to the Pole

This function converts magnetic data which have been recorded in the
inclined earths magnetic field to data which would have been produced
by a vertical geomagnetic field (see Baranov, 1957; Gunn, 1975, p.306).
The primary use of this function is to simplify magnetic maps obtained in

A guide to using WinGLink

13BMaps 14-31

areas with low magnetic latitudes. Symmetric anomalies then result from
simple vertical bodies, with the maximum located above the source. The
assumption is made that all magnetic anomalies in the survey area are
caused by magnetization in the direction of the current geomagnetic field.
The following parameters must be entered:
- Inclination of geomagnetic field
- Declination of geomagnetic field
To perform a reduction:
1. Select the Grid Tools | Reduction to the Pole menu
command:

2. Select the map containing the grid to be reduced.

3. Enter the name of the output grid (or accept the default name).
4. Enter the inclination and declination of the geomagnetic field.
Click the Suggest button, and the program will calculated
recommended values.
5. If you would like to have the mean value of the input grid be
removed from the output grid, select Remove Mean Value.
6. A new map is created. If you wish to have station values
extracted from the new grid, select Yes when prompted.

Vertical to Total Field Transformation

If data obtained with a vertical-field fluxgate magnetometer need to be
compared with more modern total-field measurements, they can be
transformed using this module.
The theoretical background for this is given by Gunn (1975, pp 306-307).
The user is required to enter the following parameters:
- Inclination of geomagnetic field
- Declination of geomagnetic field
To transform the vertical field to total field:
1. Select the Grid Tools | Vertical to Total field menu
command
2. Select the map containing the vertical field data;.
3. Enter the name of the output grid, which will contain the total
field data (or accept the default name).

14-32 13BMaps

A guide to using WinGLink

4. Enter the inclination and declination of the geomagnetic field.

5. If you would like to have the mean value of the input grid be
removed from the output grid, select Remove Mean Value.
6. A new map is created. If you wish to have station values
extracted from the new grid, select Yes when prompted.

Terrain Correction Maps (Gravity)

The WinGLink Maps program provides functionality for calculating
terrain corrections to take into account local and distant topographic
features. These corrections can then be used in the calculation of
complete Bouguer anomalies for stations contained in WinGLink gravity
projects.
The approach used involves combining the inner terrain correction (ITC)
and outer terrain correction (OTC) to calculate the total terrain correction.
The ITC, which corrects for local topographic features, is performed
using the Hammer methods. The OTC, which corrects for more distant
topographic features, is performed using one or more external grids
containing digital elevation models (DEM) for the area of interest.
Terrain correction data can also be imported from external text files
directly into the Maps program for both new as well as existing stations.
As with other map types, calculated terrain correction values can be
exported to external text files. These external files contain station ID,
coordinates, elevation and data value, in this case terrain correction.
External files can then used to import station and terrain correction data
into other projects, providing a convenient tool for combining project
data.
The total terrain correction is the sum of the outer and inner terrain
corrections. The order in which the individual correction values are
calculated is irrelevant. The following discussion describes first how to
create a terrain correction map, followed by how to calculate the inner,
and then the outer terrain correction.

Creating a Terrain Correction Map

Among the default map types available for Gravity projects within the
WinGLink Map program is the Terrain Correction map. The values
contained in this map are used in the calculation of the complete Bouguer
anomaly map.

To Create a Terrain Correction Map:

1. Open WinGLink, and in the main database window, select a
project of type Gravity [GR]; in the right-hand panel, click the
Maps application icon.

A guide to using WinGLink

13BMaps 14-33

2. The Open Map dialog box opens. Select the Terrain

Correction map:

3. After clicking the Open button, the Maps program prompts you
to select the type of gridding to be used for the map. If opening
the map for the first time, opt to continue without gridding, as
two or more stations with values are required in order to
calculate a grid.

Calculating the Inner Terrain Correction

The calculation of the inner terrain correction calculation is based on the
Hammer method (Geophysics, v. 4, pp. 184-194, 1939.). This method
involves creating a set of concentric rings, or zones as they are referred to
here, each of which is divided into a specified number of equal-sized
segments. The average elevation for each of these segments is entered
relative to the elevation specified for a given station. In this way, the
topography immediately surrounding each station can be defined and the
inner terrain correction calculated.

To Calculate the Inner Terrain Correction for a Station:

1. Continuing with the terrain correction map created above, open
the Data Sheet window by either selecting the Stations | View
Data menu command or by clicking the
toolbar.

button on the

2. The data sheet window for terrain correction maps contains, in

addition to geographic coordinates, columns for ITC, OTC and
Value. The value column in this case represents the total terrain
correction and, unless the value has been edited manually
updated during a file import, is equal to the sum of ITC and
OTC.
To set the ITC value for a station, position the mouse over the
cell in the ITC column for the station in question and click.

14-34 13BMaps

A guide to using WinGLink

Now click the arrow which appears at the right edge of the cell:

3. Click the arrow to open the Inner Terrain Correction window in

which the set of zones is defined and relative elevation values
are entered.:

The Inner Terrain Correction window, shown above, is divided

into three areas. The set of zones is defined in the ITC Structure
frame, located in the upper-left corner of the window. This
frame contains a spreadsheet with four columns. The first
column, Z, designates the zone name, Min and Max specify the
respective minimum and maximum radii of the circles which
define each zone, and Div. specifies the number of segments
into which the zone is to be divided.
Zones can be added and removed using the buttons provided at
bottom of the ITC Structure frame. The program allows the
creation of up to 5 zones, each of which may be divided into up
to 12 sections. In addition, the program forces zone continuity,
i.e. the Max and Min values of two adjacent zones must be
identical.
The current zone configuration is shown in the display panel to
the right of the ITC Structure frame. Changes made to the
number of zones and the zone definitions are reflected

A guide to using WinGLink

13BMaps 14-35

immediately in this display panel.

The elevation values for each of the segments are entered in the
Zones frame of the Inner Terrain Correction window. The
upper area of this frame contains a frame with option buttons
for meters, degrees, and %. When using the meters option
(default), the values are entered as elevation values relative to
the actual station elevation, i.e. if the average elevation of
Section 2 of Zone C is determined to be 1000 m and the actual
station elevation is 900m, a value of 100 m would be entered
for this section.
Depending on how the average elevation values are determined
for the individual sections, it may be more convenient to use
the degrees or % options. When using degrees, specify the
number of degrees relative to the horizontal plane projected
from the station location to a representative point in the given
zone. When using the percent option, specify elevation
difference between the station location and the zone section as a
percentage. As the observation may not necessarily be made at
the station elevation, specify in the Observation Height field
the height above the station elevation from which the
measurement of the zone elevation was made, i.e. if a transit of
height 1.7 m was used to make the measurements, enter 1.7 in
this field.
After specifying how the zone values are to be entered, enter
the relative elevation values for each segment in the
spreadsheet-like table.
4. Click OK after entering values for all of the sections. The
values can be edited at a later time by reopening the Inner
Terrain Correction window for the station.
The inner terrain correction value is calculated immediately after closing
the Inner Terrain Correction window:

The inner terrain correction value for each station is to be calculated

using the procedure outlined above. ITC values cannot be manually
entered in the ITC column of the Data Sheet window.

Calculating the Outer Terrain Correction

Unlike the inner terrain correction, which must be performed separately
for each station, the outer terrain correction makes use of one or more
digital elevation models to calculate the effect which non-local
topographic features have on each station contained in the map.

14-36 13BMaps

A guide to using WinGLink

To Calculate the Outer Terrain Correction:

1. Continuing with the terrain correction map used above in the
description of the inner terrain correction, open the OTC Grid
Selection window by selecting the File | OTC Grid Settings
menu command:

2. To add a grid, position the mouse over a line in the Grid

filename column and click. Now click the arrow which appears
at the right edge of the field to open the Import Grid window.
Browse the directories until the desired grid has been found;
click the Open button. All standard grids are supported: e.g.
Geolink, USGS, Surfer, Geopack, Geosoft, LCT).
3. Set the parameters for each grid as necessary. The Max Dist.
value specifies the correction distance from each station. Select
the Show Extent checkbox to display the area covered by he
given DEM. Select the units used in the DEM in the two
columns to the right.
The Station elevation projection drop-down list contains three
options for the station elevation: None, Inv. distance linear,
and Inv. distance square. Select None to use the actual station
elevation in the calculation of the OTC. The Inv. distance
linear and Inv. distance square options extrapolate station
elevations from the given DEM using either a linear or
quadratic algorithm, respectively, based on the mesh values and
the geographic coordinates of the stations.
To view the physical parameters which define a grid, click the
grid name in the Grid Filename column to select the grid, and
then click the Grid Info button located in the bottom part of
the screen. The Grid Info window opens, displaying the grid
name and type, min. and max. X and Y values, X and Y step
sizes and numbers of rows and columns.
4. After setting the digital elevation models, select the Compute
TC command on the File menu to calculate the terrain
correction. Computation progress is indicated by a progress bar
in the status bar. Upon conclusion of the calculation, a log
window is displayed which lists any encountered problems.

Total Terrain Correction

The total terrain correction is the sum of the outer and inner terrain
corrections. Thus, a value for the total terrain correction exists for a given

A guide to using WinGLink

13BMaps 14-37

station provided one of the two terrain correction values has been
determined.
To view the values in tabular form, open the Data Sheet window by
either selecting the Stations | View Data menu command or by
clicking the

button on the toolbar:

Neither the ITC nor OTC values can be edited manually. It is however,
possible to change the total terrain correction value by selecting the field
with the mouse and overwriting the value. Any changes are retained until
the terrain correction is recalculated using the Compute TC command on
the File menu, in which case the total terrain correction is again set equal
to the sum of the ITC and OTC, or until terrain correction data are
imported from an external file.
To update the map grid, or if no grid yet exists for the terrain correction,
click the Regrid command on the Gridding menu.

Importing and Exporting Terrain Correction Data

As with other types of value data, it is possible to import and export
terrain correction data from/into the Maps program. In this way, terrain
correction data, including station coordinates, can be passed from one
project to another as well as to and from other applications.
Terrain correction data are imported into the Maps program in the same
way as other types of value data. The data must be in text format and
organized by column. The files should include station ID, geographic
coordinates, elevation and the values for total terrain correction.

To Import Terrain Correction Data:

1. Open a terrain correction map, then open the Data Sheet
window by either selecting the Stations | View Data menu
command or by clicking the

button on the toolbar.

2. On the File menu of the Data Sheet window, select the Import
command.
3. In the File Import dialog box which opens, browse the
directories until you have found the file to be imported; select
and click the Open button.
4. The File Import wizard opens. This Wizard guides you through
the import process, step by step, prompting you for details
regarding the file structure and the assignment of the column
headings and units. For further details on how to use this

14-38 13BMaps

A guide to using WinGLink

Wizard, please refer to the Data Import chapter of this

manual. For further details on how to use this Wizard, please
refer to the Data Import topic in the of the WinGLink help
system.
5. After specifying file format in the Import Wizard and clicking
the Finish button, the Maps program imports the file. A status
report is then displayed in an info box, indicating the number of
stations merged, appended or skipped:

Click the OK button to conclude the import process.

6. To update the map grid, or if no grid yet exists for the terrain
correction, click the Regrid command on the Gridding menu.
Terrain correction data can be exported from the Maps program as text
files with fixed-width columns. These files can be imported into maps in
other WinGLink projects with no difficulty.

To Export Terrain Correction Data

1. Open a terrain correction map, then open the Data Sheet
window by either clicking the Stations | View Data menu
command or by clicking the

button on the toolbar.

2. On the File menu of the Data Sheet window, click the Export
command to open the Export Data dialog box:

3. In the XY Coordinates area of the dialog box, select the format

in which the data are to be exported. The format specified here
does not have to be identical to the current format, i.e. any
required conversions are performed by the Maps program
during file export. Likewise, specify the order of the X and Y
coordinate values in the Options area of the dialog box. After
specifying a file name, click the OK button.

A guide to using WinGLink

13BMaps 14-39

Well Maps
Creating a New Map from Numeric Well Data
As with other value types, it is possible to create maps at specific depths
using numeric values imported for well stations. (For details on importing
well courses and well layer data, please refer to the Data Import
chapter of this manual.)

To Create a New Map from Numeric Well Data:

1. On the File menu, select the New Map | Extract Parameter
Values menu command.
2. Select the desired extraction key from the list of available
options: At constant depth,or At fixed elevation... Shown
below is the dialog which for extracting at constant depth:

3. All of the numeric data imported to the active wells project

should be listed in the Extract drop-down list. Select an item
and enter a depth.
4. The program displays the number of stations extracted and
number skipped during extraction.
5. If data were extracted for at least two stations, you will be able
to grid the map (specify how you would like the map gridded in
the Gridding Window which opens following extraction).
Note: When extracting parameter values from well maps, note that the
position of the point at the specified depth or elevation may not
necessarily be coincident with the station coordinates. The position is
instead that at the specified depth along the well trace. This location is
indicated by a dot on the new map.

14-40 13BMaps

A guide to using WinGLink

15: Wells

Overview
This chapter focuses on the use of the Well Data Editor. Following a
detailed description of how to use the program, an overview is provided
on how to work effectively with well data within WinGLink. There,
references to the appropriate locations of the manual can be found for
instructions on how to use wells in the respective WinGLink modules.

Using the Well Data Editor

The Well Data Editor provides a powerful interface for working with well
courses, including tools for editing and displaying well traces as well as
for editing and assigning display properties to layered and numerical data.
Note that layered and numerical data can be edited and saved only if the
WinGLink license includes the WL_2 module.
Note: While well traces can be imported directly into the Well Data
Editor (as well as into the WinGLink Shell), layered/numerical data, such
as lithologic data or measured values, cannot. These data types must
instead be imported into the database in the main WinGLink shell. For
details, please refer to the Data Import chapter of this manual.

To Start the Well Data Editor:

1. In the main Database window, use the mouse to select the
Wells project (WL) which contains the well trace(s) and
layered/numerical data to be edited.
2. Click the Well Data Editor icon
in the applications panel
of the WinGLink Shell to open the Well Data Editor. In
addition to all wells contained in the project, the Open Well
dialog box lists the available data types, which include the well
course and any imported layered or numerical data types, e.g.
lithology, pressure, temperature:

A guide to using WinGLink

14BWells 15-1

The upper left panel of the dialog box lists all well traces
contained in the current project. To the right are the well course
and data types available for the well selected in the upper left
panel. The lower left panel displays information about the
selected well. Shown in the right is an overview map; the
currently selected station is displayed in red.
Note that after making a selection and opening a well window,
the Open Well dialog box closes. This can be reopened by
selecting the File | Open menu command.

To View and Edit Well Courses

1. To open the well course for a specific well, select the well in
the upper left panel, then select the Well Course checkbox.
Click the Open button to display the Well Course spreadsheet:

2. Each field can be edited manually. Note that when editing the
elevation, the program automatically calculates the vertical
depth and vice versa. Note, as well, that that elevations must be
in decreasing order, though several identical elevation values in
succession are possible (horizontal traces).

15-2 14BWells

A guide to using WinGLink

3. After either editing a well course point or entering a new point,

click the green check button on the toolbar:
Only after this button has been clicked are the changes
acknowledged by the program. Any elevation values which are
not in decreasing order will trigger a warning message:

4. To delete a row, press the Delete key on the keyboard.

5. The delete operation as well as any other action performed in
the datasheet windows can be undone using the Undo / Redo
buttons on the toolbar:

6. To save changes made to a well course, either click the x box in

the upper right corner of the spreadsheet, which will open a
dialog box prompting you to save the changes, or use the File |
Save menu command.

To Import Well Courses

Well courses can be imported into an existing well using the File |
Import menu command. It is not possible to import new wells into a
database from the Well Data Editor. This can only be performed in the
WinGLink Shell. For details, please refer to the Data Import chapter of
this manual.

To Import Well Course Data Into an Existing Well:

1. In the Well Data Editor, open the well course into which well
course data are to be imported.
2. Use the File | Import menu command to open a standard
Windows dialog box for selecting the file which contains the
well course data.
3. After selecting the file, the Data Import Wizard for text files
opens:

A guide to using WinGLink

14BWells 15-3

Make the appropriate settings for the given data file and
continue with Next.
4. In the next screen, specify the units for coordinates and
elevation and the column headings:

5. Click the Next button to execute the import.

To View and Edit Layered Data

1. As with well courses, first select a well in the left frame of the
Open Well dialog box, then select a checkbox next to a layered
data type. Note that only those data types which have been
imported for the given well and are not currently open are

15-4 14BWells

A guide to using WinGLink

available for selection:

2. The From and To measured depths, which define the layers,

can be edited. New layers can be appended in the bottom field.
While layers may overlap, the bottom layer takes priority.
Layers need not be in order of depth.
3. Each layer can be assigned an item type by placing the mouse
pointer in the respective field in the Item column and then
clicking the arrow button to display the drop-down list:

All layer types associated with the current category are listed
and are available for selection. The appearance associated with
the selected item is automatically displayed after selecting an
item.
Categories, the associated layer types, and the appearances of
each layer type can be defined with the Category and Pattern
Editors, which can be opened with the Tools | Category Editor
menu command. This command is available in the Well Data
Editor only when a layered data window is open.
For information on how to use the Category and Pattern
Editors, please refer to the description in the Common
Functions chapter of this manual.
4. To save changes you have made, either click the x box in the
upper right corner of the spreadsheet, which will open a dialog
box prompting you to save the changes, or use the File | Save
menu command.

To View and Edit Numerical Data

1. Use the Open Well dialog box to open the edit window for the
desired numerical data type:

A guide to using WinGLink

14BWells 15-5

Make changes or add new layers as with layered data. Layers

do not need to be in order of depth.
2. To save changes you have made, either click the x box in the
upper right corner of the spreadsheet, which will open a dialog
box prompting you to save the changes, or use the File | Save
menu command.

To Display Sectional Views of Well Data

A sectional view can be displayed for the active spreadsheet window by
clicking the Sectional View button on the toolbar:

Depending on which spreadsheet type is active, the sectional view

window displays the well course with the respective layer types, e.g.
lithology, layered data or numerical data. Shown below is the sectional
view of well POZO 1:

The slide bar in the bottom right part of the screen can be used to change
the users perspective of the well course, allowing the user to view the

15-6 14BWells

A guide to using WinGLink

well course from all angles. The blue and red dots at the top of the
sectional view correspond to the blue and red dots on the compass view
in the bottom left corner of the window to provide a frame of reference.

Working with Well Data in WinGLink: An Overview

Provided below are references to the chapters of the manual which
include information on working with well data, including both well
courses and layer information, e.g. lithologic information.
Please refer to the chapters referenced in parenthesis for detailed
instructions on working with wells in the respective WinGLink programs.

A guide to using WinGLink

WinGLink Shell: used to import well courses and layer data.

(Data Import)

Maps: used to assign wells to profiles (Maps)

Well Data Editor: used to edit and display well courses (Wells)

X-Sections: used to create cross sections of well log data (XSections)

Sections: wells, both well courses and, in certain cases, layer

data, can be viewed in all WinGLink modules which support
sections, e.g. 2D Inversion and X-Sections. (2D MT, X-Sections)

Interpreted Views and Montage: used to prepare documents for

presentation. (Requires WinGLink license option WG-2, see
www.geosystem.net for details.) (Interpreted Views and
Montage)

14BWells 15-7

16: MT Soundings

Overview
The Soundings icon is displayed in the program menu whenever a
sounding project is selected.
When a sounding project (MT, TEM, DC, etc.) is selected and the
program launched, the stations of the selected project are loaded
together with their original datasets.
The discussion in this chapter is limited to the MT Soundings program.
For each station, this program can be used to:

Compute and display the parameter curves and a number of

MT parameters

Import/export sounding data

Edit sounding data

Compute a 1D smooth and layered inversion model

As described at the end of this chapter, many of the functions available

for individual soundings can also be performed in batch mode on any
number of soundings contained in the current project.

About Editing
Edits performed on sounding data are saved in the "edited data" section
of the database. The original data are not overwritten and can always be
restored using the File | Reload Original Data menu command.
The edited data which are saved by the MT Soundings program are used
by other WinGLink programs:

A guide to using WinGLink

Edited resistivity curves, as well as phase and tipper, are used

to calculate resistivity pseudosections.

Smooth and layered 1D models are used to calculate imaged

sections and cross sections, respectively.

Curves and 1D models are also used to extract parameter

maps in the Maps program.

15BMT Soundings 16-1

Sounding Data Which are Saved in the Database

For each station of the current project, the following datasets are saved in
the WinGLink database:

Original Data
Apparent resistivity and phase as imported from external files or entered
by keyboard. Original curves can always be recovered to restart the
editing process using the Soundings menu command File | Reload
Originals.
Impedances:
Impedances (if available) are saved in the database. If impedances are not
saved in the database, editing functions such as decomposition or static
stripping are not enabled.
Power spectra:
Power spectra are read during the import from EDI files and are used to
compute impedances, if requested, but are not saved in the database.

Edited Data
Edited curves are initially constructed by assigning to each data point the
same value of the original curves. At the end of each editing session, the
edited values are saved in the database, separately from the original
values.
Edited curves are used by default to construct pseudosections along
profiles.

Smoothed Curves
These are calculated from the edited curves using the selected smoothing
routine. These curves may optionally be used instead of the edited curves
to construct pseudosections along profiles.

Smooth 1D Model
One smooth model is saved for each sounding. This provides a
preliminary guess model for the layered inversion routine and is also used
to produce imaged sections along profiles.
Both Bostick and Occam models are calculated and saved, one for each
sounding. For each sounding, the user must specify whether the TE or
TM curve is to be considered the 1D curve and used by the inversion
program.

Layered 1D Model
One layered model is saved for each sounding. These models can be
displayed along profiles in WinGLinks section programs and used to
generate gridded sections the X-Sections program. The 1D curve used to
calculate the layered model is the same curve used for the smooth model.

16-2 15BMT Soundings

A guide to using WinGLink

Opening, Saving and Printing Sounding Data

To Open Soundings from the Station List
1. Select the File | Open from List menu command
2. Select the station(s) you wish to open:

3. If you want to display only the active stations, select the Active
Station check box.
4. Click the Open button.

To Open Soundings on the Station Map

Select the File | Open from Map menu command; a simplified location
map for the project station is displayed:

Opening Soundings by Clicking Individual Stations:

1. Click the

A guide to using WinGLink

button.

15BMT Soundings 16-3

2. Click the stations you wish to open; the selected stations turn to
red:

3. Click the

button.

Opening All Soundings Within a Given Area:

1. Click the

button.

2. Left-click the mouse on a corner of the area of interest and drag

it to define a rectangle on the map. When releasing the mouse
button, all stations in the rectangle will turn to red.
3. Click the

button.

Open All Soundings Associated with a Profile Trace:

1. Click the

button.

2. Left-click the mouse on the profile or on a segment of the

profile trace of interest. All stations previously added to that
profile trace turn red, indicating selection.
3. Click the

button.

Viewing Parameter Curves

Each window can be set to show the parameter curves or the 1D model
for each sounding.
On the View menu, select from the available display options:

Note on MT ellipticity:
Ellipticity is calculated using the definition given by Ranganayaki
(1984, Geophysics, 49;1730-48):

Ellipticity =

16-4 15BMT Soundings

| Z ' xx Z ' yy |
| Z ' xy + Z ' yx |

A guide to using WinGLink

where the denotes rotated impedance tensor.

Ranganayaki points out that this quantity is limited as a
dimensionality indicator because even at places where Zxx = Zyy,
the fields could be influenced by an anomaly and require 3D
resistivity structure in order to describe their variation. This has
been shown to be especially true at low frequencies. This
deficiency can be offset by calculating skew, which increases at
low frequencies where the impedance tensor is affected by a
larger volume of the earth.
Note on induction arrows
In the MT Soundings program, induction arrows are displayed with
the arrows pointing away from the conductor, i.e. the Weise or
Schmucker convention. The display properties of the arrows, i.e.
length and convention cannot be changed in the Soundings
program. They can, however, be altered in the Maps program
which also provides functionality for displaying induction arrows.
Please refer to the "Maps chapter of this manual for details.

Setting Diagram Ranges and Scale

To Set the Ranges and Scale for the Plot Diagrams:
1. Select the View | View Options menu command:

2. For each parameter, set the automatic range option or enter the
max. and min. values to be plotted. The axis scale can be set to
linear or logarithmic for many plots.
3. The settings made here apply to all window.

Printing Curves and 1D Models

To Print Station Curves
1. Select the station by clicking on its window;

A guide to using WinGLink

15BMT Soundings 16-5

2. Select the File | Print menu command.

3. Select the printing options and click the Print button:

Importing Sounding Data

In general, sounding data are imported into WinGLink using the import
functionality provided in the WinGLink shell (see the Data Import
chapter of this manual for details).The MT Soundings module includes an
option, however, for importing new data into an existing sounding.
Import functions are available for:
-

EDI files

Text files

Keyboard entry

Note: This function cannot be used to import new stations into the
current project.

To Import MT Data from an EDI File

1. Open the sounding into which the data are to be imported
2. Select the File | Import new data| From EDI Filemenu
command
3. Browse the directories and select the file you wish to import.

16-6 15BMT Soundings

A guide to using WinGLink

4. In the Plot Parameters frame, select the desired options:

If you select the Recalculate from existing spectra option, the

program uses the spectra contained in the EDI file.
If the file does NOT contain spectra, the program uses
impedances.
If the file does not contain impedances, the program uses the
plot parameters contained in the file.
Impedances are rotated back to 0 degrees regardless of the
values in the ZROT block in the EDI file. The impedances are
then rotated to the value specified in the Rotate to section of
the import window.
The tipper rotation is specified in the TROT block in the EDI
file. If this block is not present, it is assumed that the tipper is
rotated to 0 degrees and no back rotation is performed during
import, regardless of the values present in the ZROT block.
Following the back rotation, the tipper values are rotated to
the value specified in the Rotate to section of the import
window.
Note: Any previously saved sounding data are lost when new data are
imported.

To Import Datasets from Text Files:

1. Open the sounding into which the data are to be imported
2. Select the File | Import new data | From Text Filemenu
command
3. Follow the instructions given by the Import Wizard (refer to the
Data Import chapter of this manual for details.)
Note: Any previously saved sounding data are lost when new data are
imported.

A guide to using WinGLink

15BMT Soundings 16-7

To Enter Data from the Keyboard:

1. Open the sounding into which the data are to be imported
2. Select the File | Import new data | From Keyboardmenu
command
3. The program alerts you that any existing data will be lost.
4. A dialog window opens prompting you to select what type of
data are to be entered:

5. In the next window, specify whether the frequency or period

data are to be entered:

6. In the Data Import window, enter the data in the appropriate

columns:

16-8 15BMT Soundings

A guide to using WinGLink

When finished, use the File | Save menu command to store the
data in the database

To Export MT Data to an EDI File

1. Select the station by clicking on its window.
2. Select the File | Export EDI File menu command:

3. Click the Options button to open a dialog window in which the

parameters to be written to the EDI file can be selected:

A guide to using WinGLink

15BMT Soundings 16-9

Make the desired selections and click the OK button when

finished
4. Enter a name for the EDI file to be created.
5. Click the Save button.

Activating / Deactivating Stations

The checkbox located in the upper area of each sounding display window
can be used to activate and deactivate the current station. The
active/inactive status applies to the station in all WinGLink modules, i.e.
sounding data associated with deactivated stations are not included in
2DMT inversions.

Analyzing MT Data
The MT Soundings View Form
The following figure shows the MT sounding data form:

16-10 15BMT Soundings

A guide to using WinGLink

TE/TM mode
selector

Click this button to change which curve corresponds to

TE mode. In the above example, the xy curve is selected
for TE mode (therefore, the yx is for TM mode)

1D model
validation

This text is displayed whenever the 1D model of the

station needs to be recalculated because a change was
made on the curve.

Invariant
display

If this option is checked, the invariant curves for

resistivity and phase are shown. The invariant resistivity
is calculated as the geometric mean of rhoXY and
rhoYX; the invariant phase is calculated as the arithmetic
mean of the two.

Smooth type

Indicates the algorithm used to calculate the smoothed

curves.

Current
rotation

Indicates the rotation (if any) applied to the impedances.

XY, YX
curves

The original curves are displayed in gray, the edited

curves in red (XY) or blue (YX); the continuous curves
represent the smoothed data.

Static
stripping

If present, this text indicates that the edited curves have

been static stripped.

To Rotate Station Impedances and Tipper

1. Select the station by clicking on its window.
2. Select the Rotate command from the menu to open the Curves
Recalculation dialog box:

A guide to using WinGLink

15BMT Soundings 16-11

3. In the Rotate to frame, select the rotation type and rotation

angle.
4. To rotate tipper, specify the rotation type and angle in the fields
to the right of the Hz label.
5. In the Apply To frame, select whether the rotation is to be
applied to all stations or to the active station only.
6. Click OK.

To Perform a Decomposition on the Active Station

1. Select the station by clicking on its window.
2. Select Rotate.
3. In the Impedances Rotation frame, select the decomposition
type.
4. In the Apply To frame, select whether the rotation is to be
applied to all stations or to the active station only.
5. Click OK.

To View a Polar Diagram Map

1. Close all open stations. The Special command is now displayed
on the main menu.
2. Select Special | Polarization Maps.
3. If you are already in polarization maps mode, select File | New.
4. Enter the values for central frequency, sampling frequency and
tolerance; the frequency range is determined using these values.
5. Click OK.

16-12 15BMT Soundings

A guide to using WinGLink

6. To switch back to station view mode, select File | Close All and
then Special | Soundings.

To Display a Miniature Map of Resistivity and Phase

Curves
1. Close all open stations. The Special command is displayed on
the main menu.
2. Select Special | Miniature curves.
3. To switch back to station view mode, select File | Close All and
then Special | Soundings.

Editing Sounding Data

The Edited Curve
When sounding data are entered or imported by the Soundings program,
they are saved as original data in a reserved area of the database and
are never modified unless new data are imported or synthetic data are
saved as original data (see the 2DMT Modeling chapter of this manual
for details). At the same time, a duplicate dataset is generated and saved
in a different area of the database for use by editing functions. When an
editing session is carried out on the sounding data, it is carried out on this
second dataset, which is referred to as the edited curve of the sounding.
Saving changes following an editing session means saving an edited
curve. This curve is used by default in calculating 1D inversion models
and pseudosections.
Sounding data can be edited by:
1. Opening the data spreadsheet and entering new edited values.
2. Starting the graphic interactive Edit form by selecting the Edit
command.

Editing Sounding Data in the Spreadsheet

Sounding data can be viewed and edited using a spreadsheet which shows
original and edited data together in a common window.

To Open the Data Spreadsheet:

1. Select the File | Edit Data menu command.
2. The soundings data are displayed in columns. Columns with
original data are gray and the header has a suffix (o) indicating
that the data of the column are original data. Original data
cannot be edited.
3. On the Data menu, use:

A guide to using WinGLink

Arrange columns to select the type of sounding data to be

displayed

Format to set a fixed format for each data column

Operators to apply arithmetical operators to a column

15BMT Soundings 16-13

Sort to sort a selected data column

4. On the File menu, select:

Save Data to store any editing changes

Exit to return to the sounding View form

Export to file to export the displayed data to a text file

Interactive Sounding Editing Form

The interactive Sounding Editing form is opened by selecting the Edit
command from the menu when a sounding window is selected:

The form includes commands for performing various editing functions:

Selecting Data Points

Single point selection
Click to select/unselect for editing single data points on the curve.
Multiple points selection
Click to select/unselect for editing all data points included in a userdefined range: click and drag the mouse to define the area.

Zooming in on the Curve

Zoom in
1. Click a point in the curve diagram and release the button.
2. Move the mouse to define the zoom area.
3. Click and release the left mouse button.
Zoom out
Click to reset the previous view.

16-14 15BMT Soundings

A guide to using WinGLink

Note: this button is available only after the Zoom in button has been
used. It remains available until the original curve size is restored.

Saving Editing Changes

Save button
Saves the editing changes. These changes must be confirmed when
closing the station window in the main menu in order to store them in the
database.

Editing Data Points

Masking data: Using the appropriate buttons, it is

possible to mask individual modes at each frequency, either across all
modes or for individual modes. Changes made here are reflected
throughout the database, i.e. in the 2D Inversion and Pseudosection
modules.
Note that the Mask Tipper button is enabled only when tipper display is
enabled using the dropdown list at the top of the screen:

Select the Tzx & Tzy display option to display the two tipper components
in separate windows.
The vertical scaling of the tipper magnitude and Tzx/Tzy components can
, which appears
be set using the Tipper Vertical Scaling button
towards the left end of the tool bar when either Tipper Magnitude or
Tzx/Tzy are visible. Clicking this button opens the Tipper Scaling dialog
box:

Settings made here are retained in subsequent WinGLink sessions.

Shift data points
1. Click and select the data points to be shifted by single or
multiple selection.
2. Move the data points to the desired positions and click the left
mouse button.
3. Click the Shift button again to confirm the action.

A guide to using WinGLink

15BMT Soundings 16-15

Calculate and display a smoothed curve

Click the button to display the smoothing options
Cancel the current action
Undo button
Undo all the editing changes made since the last time the curve was
saved. All editing steps can be undone provided the station has not yet
been saved since editing.

Swapping
Swapping allows you to assign a data point of the XY curve to the YX
curve (at the same frequency) and vice versa. This is useful where
analytic rotation results in inconsistent mode assignment.
To swap the data points of apparent resistivity or phase curves:
1. Open the station or select its window if already open.
2. Select the Edit command from the main menu.
3. Click the

button.

4. Click the data point(s) you wish to swap with the left mouse
button.
5. Click the

button again.

Note: To swap the entire curve, use the right mouse button at Step 4.

Static Stripping
Static stripping is an analytic technique for eliminating the frequencyindependent offset of one apparent resistivity curve from the other.
To perform static stripping on an apparent resistivity curve:
1. Select the Edit command on the main menu.
2. Click the

button.

3. Click a data point on the curve and release the mouse button.
4. Move the curve to the desired location and click the left mouse
button.
5. Click the

button again.

Normally, you would select a point at the high-frequency end of the

curve. Practical experience suggests that most static shift cases result in
one curve being moved down relative to the other. You therefore move
the lower curve up to the higher one.
When the original apparent resistivity curve is dragged to its new
position, a scalar multiplier of the e-field value is derived. This is applied
to a recalculation of all the impedances of that sounding. Thus, when you
click Strip for the second time, you should see the hour-glass symbol,
indicating that this calculation is taking place. The curves are then

16-16 15BMT Soundings

A guide to using WinGLink

redrawn. Only the apparent resistivity curves are affected by this

procedure.
If the data show a very large static shift, or are strongly 3D at high
frequencies, the results can sometimes be unstable. You may need to
repeat the operation several times.

Static Shifting
Static shifting allows you to vertically shift all data points of a curve.
To statically shift a curve:
1. Select the window with the sounding to edit
2. Select the Edit command on the main menu.
3. Click the

button.

4. Click one of the curves data points and release the button.
5. Using the mouse, move the curve to the desired location. The
amount of static shifting is displayed in the bottom of the
window:
This number is a scalar factor that multiplies the original
resistivity values of the curve. If equal to 1, the curve is not
shifted.
6. Click and release the left mouse button.
The apparent resistivity range changes so that the curves appear centered
in the display box.
A useful guide for determining the resistivity level to which a curve
should be shifted is obtained by displaying the pseudo-MT curve for a
co-located TDEM station.
To reset the static shift to zero:
1. Click the
2.

button.
to run Smoothing routines

to add/subtract 360 to phase data points

to show pseudo-MT curve from TDEM model

Calculating Smoothed Curves

Resistivity and phase smoothed curves can be calculated from the edited
curves using three different techniques. They are automatically updated
whenever further editing is made on the curves.
To (re)calculate a stations smoothed curves:
1. Open the station or select its window if already open.
2. Select the Edit command on the main menu.
3. Click the

A guide to using WinGLink

button.

15BMT Soundings 16-17

4. Select Smooth Options and click the OK button.

The available smoothing options are described below
Sutarno phase consistent smoothing
This is an application of the Hilbert transform to give an apparent
resistivity curve from the phase curve. (Sutarno, D. and Vozoff, K., 1991,
Phase-smoothed robust M-estimation of magnetotelluric impedance
functions: Geophysics, 56, 1999-2007). It is used primarily to confirm
that apparent resistivity and phase are consistent.
D+ smoothing
D+ relates apparent resistivity and phase of the same component (xy or
yx) through a D+ function. In essence, this finds the one-dimensional
earth which best fits both parameters. The procedure has been shown to
be valid for most 2D data and for some 3D cases.
The errors attributed to the data can be those estimated by the original
data processing or can be imposed by the user. In the first case, the two
parameters (apparent resistivity and phase errors) are left at the default
value of -1. In the second case, the user can estimate the errors (e.g.
10%). By appropriately selecting errors, one parameter can be downweighted at the expense of the other. Reference: Beamish, D., and
Travassos, J.M., 1992, The use of the D+ solution in magnetotelluric
interpretation. Jo. Appl. Geophys., 29, 1-19.
Numerical smoothing
Numerical smoothing is an FFT-based low-pass filter which calculates an
independent smooth curve for each of the four components. It does not
have an underlying geophysical process to support it, but may
nevertheless be useful in certain noisy situations. The user selects a
smoothing factor which gives an appropriate result. 0 gives no smoothing
at all, and useful values are typically << (half the number of data points).
Reference: Press et al., 1989. Numerical Recipes, pub. Cambridge
University Press, Section 13.9.

Adding 360 to Phase

This feature is useful in the case of phase curves which wrap around the
normal -180 to +180 range:
To add 360 to data points of a phase curve:
1. Select the Edit command from the main menu.
2. Click the

button.

3. Select the data points of the phase curve you want to shift.
4. Click the

button again.

To subtract 360 from data points of a phase curve:

1. Select the Edit command from the main menu.
2. Click the

button.

3. Select the data points of the phase curve you want to shift.
4. Click the

16-18 15BMT Soundings

button again.

A guide to using WinGLink

Computing Pseudo-MT Curve from Co-Located TDEM,

Schlumberger Sounding Model or DC Model
Displaying the pseudo-MT curve for a co-located TDEM or DC station
A well-established procedure in MT surveys is to use co-located timedomain EM (TDEM) or DC soundings to correct for static shift
(Sternberg, B. K., Washburne, J. C. and Pellerin, L., 1988, Correction for
the static shift in magnetotelluric using transient electromagnetic
soundings: Geophysics, 53, 1459-1468; Pellerin, L. and Hohmann, G.
W., 1990, Transient electromagnetic inversion: A remedy for
magnetotelluric static shifts: Geophysics, 55, 1242-1250.). In WinGLink,
we assume that central or coincident loop TEM or DC soundings have
been edited and inverted, either in WinGLink or using TEMIX/RESIX
(Interpex products for TEM and DC data, respectively) and then imported
into WinGLink.
The appropriate sounding is selected using the procedure shown below.
The imported 1D model is used to calculate a forward MT response.
Using static shift, the observed apparent resistivity curves can then be
shifted along the resistivity axis to coincide with the values suggested by
the TDEM or DC response.
To display the MT curve calculated from a TDEM or DC model:
1. Select the Edit command from the main menu.
2. Click the

button.

3. Select the EM or DC Project containing the EM/DC station.

The project must contained in the current database:
select the EM or DC station located at the MT station being
edited.

Note: Either EM Station or DC Station is displayed to the left

of the dropdown list depending on the type of station selected.

Common Problems in MT sounding Editing

There are some problems which can occur while editing MT soundings.
A list of the most common problems is given below, together with the
solution:
Problem: Strip button is disabled in the Edit form
This may happen for one of the following reasons:
1. You did not rotate the impedances after importing the EDI file.
Solution: exit Edit and rotate impedances.
2. You ran a La Torraca or Torquil Smith decomposition.
Solution: exit Edit and reload original curves.

A guide to using WinGLink

15BMT Soundings 16-19

3. The station comes from the import of an EDI file which had
neither impedances nor spectra.
Problem: Calculated smooth curves are no longer displayed
This happened because:
1. You reloaded the original curves. Solution: calculate the
smoothed curves again.
Problem: Smoothed curves are not recalculated after shifting data
points
This may happen because:
1. The smoothed curves were calculated using the Sutarno
option. With this option, the smoothed curves are recalculated
from impedances and not from the plot parameters.
Problem: When running D+ smoothing, an invalid command
message is shown
This may happen because:
1. A La Torraca or Torquil Smith decomposition has been
previously applied, and
2. You did not specify the Rho Err % and Ph Err %. Normally,
these parameters are initialized with the default value of -1,
which means that the variances found in the EDI file will be
used. However, since the La Torraca decomposition eliminates
these variances, they can no longer be used. Solution: try D+
smoothing again, and specify a value (in the 1-100% range) for
both Rho Err and Ph Err.

Reloading Original Curves

This action overwrites the edited curves of a station with the original
curves.

To reload original curves:

1. Select the station by clicking its window.
2. Select the File |Re-Load Original menu command.
After reloading, the smoothed curves and the 1D models need to be
recalculated.

1D Inversion
1D Inversion: Overview
The 1D Model menu command starts the inversion program for the
station whose window is currently active.
The main steps involved in the inversion process are:
Set curves to use
for inversion

16-20 15BMT Soundings

The inversion can be run using the edited or

smoothed curve. The curve selection button,

A guide to using WinGLink

located on the bottom bar, allows the user to

change the selected curve at any time. The
models must be recalculated when the curve
to be used is changed.
For each sounding, the TE, TM or invariant
curve (i.e. one of the three) can be used to
calculate an inversion model. A mode
selection button allows the user to change
the selected curve at any time. The models
must be recalculated when the mode to be
used is changed.
Calculate the
smooth inversion
model

For each station, one smooth model is

calculated and stored in the database. This
model will be used to produce imaged
sections for the project.
Two types of smooth models can be
calculated and saved separately: the Bostick
model and the Occam model (the respective
Bostick and Occam imaged sections will be
calculated).

Guess the layered

inversion model
from the smooth
model

A layered model can be guessed from the

calculated smooth models. The number of
layers is entered by the user by editing the
inversion settings or by editing the model
with interactive graphic commands.
Only one layered model is saved for each
station. A guess model selection button
allows the user to change which smooth
model is to be used for the guess routine.

Edit the initial

model using the
graphic model
editor (optional)

An interactive graphic editor allows the

editing of layers thicknesses and resistivities.
The response is displayed in real time.

Run the inversion

and save the model

The inversion process can be run with a

given number of iterations and predefined
RMS fitting degree. Resistivity and/or
thickness values of one or more layers can
be kept fixed.

The 1D Inversion Window

The following figure shows the 1D inversion window:

A guide to using WinGLink

15BMT Soundings 16-21

To Select the Curve to be Used for Inversion

1. Select the 1D Model menu command to enter the inversion
mode for the active sounding.
2. Click the
button, located at the bottom of the
form, to select the edited or smoothed curve for inversion.
button, located at the bottom of the form,
3. Click the
to switch between TE/TM and invariant curve to be used as the
1D curve.
4. Recalculate the model whenever you change the selected curve.

To Calculate the Occam Model for the Current Sounding

Curve:
1. Click the
button, then fill the fields in the Start
Model frame and specify the max. number of iterations:

The Occam model and the corresponding curve are displayed with
magenta lines.

16-22 15BMT Soundings

A guide to using WinGLink

The Bostick MT model is automatically computed for the selected 1D

curve.
The Bostick model and the corresponding curve are displayed with blue
lines.

To Guess the Layered Model from the Smooth Model

1. Use the 1D Model command to enter the inversion mode for
the active sounding.
2. Calculate the smooth model (magenta lines), if you have not
already done so.
3. Click the

button:

4. The layered model will be guessed (green lines).

Click the
button on the bottom bar to switch between
Bostick and Occam as guess models.

A guide to using WinGLink

15BMT Soundings 16-23

To Import a Model Created for a Different Station:

1. In 1D Modeling mode, click the Edit button to open the 1D
Model Parameters dialog:

2. Here, click the Import button to open a dialog box which

contains all available stations:

.
3. Select the desired station and click Import. Note that any
changes to the imported model are not reflected in the original
model.

To Run a Layered Model Inversion:

1. Use the 1D Model command to enter the inversion mode for
the active sounding.
2. Click the

button.

3. The inversion is started using the model shown with green lines
as the starting model and the inversion parameters set for the
sounding.

16-24 15BMT Soundings

A guide to using WinGLink

Graphic Editor for 1D Layered Models

The layered model can be edited graphically using drag-and-drop
operations.
The resulting resistivity curve is updated in real-time, allowing you to
compare the fit with the observed curve.

To Graphically Change the Resistivity of a Layer:

1. Click the vertical line which denotes the layers resistivity. Two
black dots appear on its edges indicating that this line can be
moved:

2. Release the mouse.

3. Move the mouse pointer to the selected line; the arrow pointer
changes to a double-headed arrow.
4. Left click and hold down the button; drag the line to the new
layer resistivity delimiter position.
5. Release the mouse button. The resistivity curve coming from
the layered model is recalculated and redrawn.

To Graphically Change a Layers Thickness

1. Repeat the procedure used to change a layers resistivity, but
instead select one of the horizontal lines which delimits the
layer and move it to the desired position.

Batch Commands
A group of batch procedures are available for performing selected
operations on a set of user-selected stations. To start a batch procedure:
1. Close all open stations.

A guide to using WinGLink

15BMT Soundings 16-25

2. The Batch Tools command will appear on the main menu:

3. Select the desired operation.

4. Enter the parameters as requested.
Operations available in batch mode include:

Curve smoothing

1D inversion modeling

Printing

Impedance rotation

Tipper rotation

Exporting edited curves as EDI files

Masking/ unmasking parameter values

Static stripping

Static shifting

Swapping modes for a specific frequency range

EDI export; this function also includes options for exporting

static shift values to an external text file. File format for the
static shift file is: station name, xy shift, yx shift.

Batch 1D forward: Enables the selection of an existing 1D

model and the computation of the MT forward response for
all selected stations. In addition, the user can specify whether
synthetic data should overwrite the observed data.

Special Menu Commands

The Special menu, which is available on the menu bar when no
soundings windows are open, contains a number of special display and
edit functions:
-

16-26 15BMT Soundings

Quick View

A guide to using WinGLink

Quick Edit

Miniature Curves

Polarization Maps

Quick View
The Quick View function provides a way to display multiple soundings
in the same Window. To open the Quick View window, select the
Special | Quick View menu command:

Use the check boxes at the top of the window to select the components to
be displayed.
The Stations Map window, which can be toggled on and off with the
corresponding check box in the upper right corner of the window,
indicates the positions of the stations which are currently open (black
squares) as well as the position of the active station (red square).

Quick Edit
The Quick Edit function, accessed with the Special | Quick Edit menu
command, opens the MT Soundings edit window without requiring that
individual stations be opened. To select a station for editing, using the
Station drop-down list at the top of the screen. Limitation of this function
is that only editing can be performed; in order to model and perform
inversions, the stations must either be opened individually or a batch
operation performed.

Miniature Curves
Select the Special | Miniature Curves menu command to display a
miniature curve map with all stations in the current projects:

A guide to using WinGLink

15BMT Soundings 16-27

Polarization Maps
Similar to the Miniature Curves function, the Polarization Maps option
on the Special menu can be used to display polarization maps for a
specific frequency. After selecting the menu command, a dialog box
appears prompting you to specify a central frequency, in addition to
several other parameters, for the polarization maps:

Click the OK button to generate the specified polarization map:

16-28 15BMT Soundings

A guide to using WinGLink

A guide to using WinGLink

15BMT Soundings 16-29

17: MT Pseudo-Sections

Overview
The Pseudo-Sections program reads the apparent resistivity vs.
measuring parameter values for each station associated with a profile,
then interpolates them to display a section showing the lateral variation
along the profile.
Pseudo-sections can be generated not only for station data, but also for
2D model responses calculated using the 2D MT module. In addition, it
is also possible to calculate difference pseudo-sections for sections of the
same type on the same profile. Comparisons can, thus, easily be made
between 2D models created along a given profile.
Each pseudo-section is defined by a profile trace and its associated
stations, which supply the datasets with the corresponding data.
With the Pseudo-Sections program, multiple sections can be open at any
time. Pseudo-sections may also be opened along multiple profiles. Each
section is displayed in a separate window.
Apparent resistivity and apparent phase are displayed as pseudo-sections
in a single window. Tipper pseudo-sections are displayed in a separate
window.
The curves used to generate the pseudo-sections can be viewed and
edited, one at a time, by clicking the vertical dotted line below each
station on the section.
A limited amount of station editing is possible in the Pseudo-Sections
program: data points can be masked and stations can be
activated/deactivated. Edit operations are stored in the database and apply
throughout WinGLink, i.e. in Maps and MT 2D Inversion.

Creating a New Pseudo-Section

To create a new MT pseudo-section
1. Construct a new profile, as described in the Maps chapter of
this manual.
2. Make sure you have imported or entered the field data for each
station of the new section. You can use the MT Soundings
program to check that the stations have data. The MT
Soundings program uses the edited data, if available, or the

A guide to using WinGLink

16BMT Pseudo-Sections 17-1

smoothed data, if requested. Alternatively, the original field

data can be recalled.
3. Start the Pseudo-Sections program.
4. In the PseudoSection Selections window, which opens
immediately after starting the program, select from the existing
pseudo-sections. If no pseudo-sections have yet been created
for the current project, the selection window is empty.

5 After selecting the Create new pseudosection option and

clicking the OK button in the PseudoSection Selection window,
the Profile and Value Selection window, shown below, opens:

In the Data Source section of the window, specify whether you

17-2 16BMT Pseudo-Sections

A guide to using WinGLink

would like to use station or synthetic data for the pseudosection. If using station data, the program uses smoothed
curves, if available, by default.
Synthetic data, the model response returned by the 2D
Inversion program can be used as the data source by making the
appropriate selection in the Data Source frame, then selecting
the model to be used.
Note that when making a selection, you must be consistent with
the data source, i.e. it is not possible to open station and
synthetic data without first closing and reopening the Profile
and Value Selection window.
Pseudo-sections which are already open are not available for
selection in the Available Values frame.
6. The section is displayed and can now be edited and saved in the
database for future modifications or printing.

Gridding the Profile Data

The data of the stations used to generate each pseudo-section must be
gridded in order to display contours and color ranges.

To Grid the Profile Station Data

1. Select the section you want to grid.
2. Select the Gridding | New Grid menu command. A form
similar to that shown below this is displayed:

3. The numbers in parenthesis on the gray background show the

maximum and minimum values of the data; the current value to
be used to define the grid extent must be entered in the fieldbox close to each number.

A guide to using WinGLink

16BMT Pseudo-Sections 17-3

4. In the Step X field, enter the step in the specified units. This
number determines the number of columns in the grid, which
will be shown in the center white box, representing the section.

5. In the T intervals per decade field, enter the number of grid

rows per decade.
6. Fill the fields with the values for the interpolation radius, spline
weight and smoothing factor.
7. Click the OK button.
Note: As the interpolation radius increases (values >5), the gridding
algorithm attempts to fill any holes present in the data by interpolating
between relatively distant data points. When creating difference pseudosections (see below), we therefore recommend using a low interpolation
radius (2) to prevent the creation of misleading differences.

To Display Color Ranges and Contour Lines

Click the

button to display/hide color ranges.

Click the

button to display/hide contour lines.

Displaying Station Dataset Values

On the View menu, select the Projects Window, if not already
displayed:

Select the V box to display the values of the dataset at each station.
To update the display of the section, click the section with the mouse.

Displaying Profile Intersections

If any other profiles in the database intersect the current profile, the point
of intersection can be displayed by enabling the View | Crossing Traces
menu option:

Note: This display option applies only to the current window.

17-4 16BMT Pseudo-Sections

A guide to using WinGLink

Deleting Pseudo-Sections
Any unopened pseudo-section contained in the current project can be
deleted by selecting the File | Delete Pseudo-Section menu command:

Exporting Grids
Grids associated with the TE/TM modes of amplitude and phase pseudosections can be exported to an external file in a number of different
formats. To export, select the Export Grid menu command on the File
menu.

Editing Data Points

A number of edit operations can be performed on the data associated with
each station. These include masking samples, static shift and station state,
i.e. active or inactive.
Edits made here affect the stations elsewhere in the database. Thus, a
station disabled in the Pseudo-Sections program is not available in the
MT 2D Inversion program.

To Mask or Unmask Station Samples:

1. Click the dataset you wish to edit in the section (the data are
shown as dots below each station. This will bring up the data
window for the station to be edited).
2. Click the
3. Click the

A guide to using WinGLink

button on the station data window.

button.

16BMT Pseudo-Sections 17-5

4. Click the point(s) to be masked. The solid squares become

empty squares after masking:

5. Click the masked point(s) to be unmasked.

6. Click the

button again to confirm your edit changes.

7. Exit the station window, or click another station to edit its data.
8. Use the

button to switch modes.

To Adjust the Static Shift of a Curve

The static shift applied to the apparent resistivity curves can be edited
from within the pseudo-sections program:
1. Bring up the editing window for the desired station by double
clicking on the symbol of the station along the pseudo-section.
2. Click the

button on the station data window.

button to select the curve you would like to shift;

3. Click the
the unselected curve is displayed in gray.
4. Click the

17-6 16BMT Pseudo-Sections

button.

A guide to using WinGLink

5. Move the mouse pointer next to the curve and single-click.

6. Shift the curve by moving the pointer; when the curve is

positioned, single-click.
The amount of the static shifting is displayed in the box labeled S-Shift:

This number is a factor that multiplies the original resistivity values of

the curve. If equal to 1, the curve is not shifted.

To Change the State of a Station

1. Select the Station | Edit Status menu command.
2. Click the station symbols at the top of the profile to toggle the
current state. When disabled, the stations are displayed in light
gray.
Station states may only be altered if the current project is a single project,
i.e. this function cannot be applied to stations contained in an integrated
project.

To Change the TE/TM Sounding in a Pseudo-Section

For each profile, both the TE and the TM pseudo-sections are
constructed. It is possible to specify whether the XY or YX resistivity
curve of a station be used for a TE or TM pseudo-section.
1. Select the Edit | Stations Mode menu command; the station
symbols and names in the active window turn red or blue in
color. If a station is red, it means that the XY curve is used; if it
is blue, the YX curve is used instead.
2. Click the symbol of the station(s) for which you would like to
change the mode. If you change the mode of stations in a TE
(TM) section, the mode of those stations is automatically
changed in the TM (TE) section.

A guide to using WinGLink

16BMT Pseudo-Sections 17-7

This function can only be used if the current project is a single project,
i.e. it cannot be applied to stations contained in an integrated project.
Note: In order to see the effects of changes or edits made to the stations
on the section, you must select the Gridding | Regrid menu command.
Note: Data points for the tipper component can also be masked using
the same technique as is used for the TE and TM components.

Creating a New Difference Pseudo-Section

Difference pseudo-sections can be created for any two pseudo-sections of
the same type, i.e. TE, TM or tipper, which are contained in the same
project. Difference pseudo-sections are displayed as a percentage and
provide a useful tool for determining the differences between models.
The PseudoSections program creates pseudo-sections by copying the
gridding parameters of the first pseudo-section into the second pseudosection. Both sections are internally regridded, i.e. the data are
reimported from the database, whereby any editing changes remain in
effect. The second pseudo-section is then subtracted from the first, i.e. the
grids not the data sources. This difference is then divided by the first, and
the result multiplied by 100%: ((P1 - P2) /P1) * 100%
The same gridding parameters as were used for both P1 and P2 are used
to regrid the resulting difference.

To Create a Difference Pseudo-Section:

1. If not yet created, create two pseudo-sections of the same type
along the same profile as described above.
2. Select the File | Create Difference Pseudo-Section menu
command to open the Difference Pseudosections selection
window:

17-8 16BMT Pseudo-Sections

A guide to using WinGLink

All pseudo-sections which have been created on the selected

profile and which may be used for difference pseudo-sections
are listed.
Note: only TE, TM and tipper pseudo-sections created from
either station or synthetic data may be used to create difference
sections. Difference pseudosections themselves may not be
used.
3. Select two pseudo-sections, one in each of the Pseudosection
frames. Only if the pseudo-sections are of the same type, yet
not identical, is the OK button enabled. The difference pseudosection is calculated and displayed after clicking the OK
button:

A guide to using WinGLink

16BMT Pseudo-Sections 17-9

4. Make changes to the ranges as necessary using the Contours |

Ranges commands.
The various Copy commands on the Window menu are available for
difference pseudosections and can be used to copy gridding and window
parameters between both difference and standard pseudosections. Please
refer to the Common Functions chapter of this manual for further
details.

17-10 16BMT Pseudo-Sections

A guide to using WinGLink

18: MT 2D Inversion

Overview
The MT 2D Inversion program contains two different routines for
running inversions:
1.
A smooth model inversion routine
Developed by Randy Mackie, this routine finds regularized solutions
(Tikhonov Regularization) to the two-dimensional inverse problem for
magnetotelluric data using the method of nonlinear conjugate gradients.
The forward model simulations are computed using finite difference
equations generated by network analogs to Maxwell's equations. The
program inverts for a user-defined 2D mesh of resistivity blocks,
extending laterally and downwards beyond the central detailed zone, and
incorporating topography.
2.
A sharp boundary model inversion routine
Also developed by Randy Mackie, this routine is based on the inversion
of 2D MT data for discrete interfaces and the resistivities of the layers
between those interfaces. The interfaces are described by a series of
nodes, whose horizontal positions are fixed, but whose vertical positions
can vary in the inversion. The interfaces are assumed to transect the
entire model, i.e., there are no closed bodies. The interface varies linearly
between each interface node. The resistivity of each layer is also
described by a set of nodes at fixed horizontal positions within each
layer. The resistivity is assumed to vary linearly between nodes. The
interface and resistivity information is projected onto a finite-difference
mesh for computation, and the inversion calculates the best fitting
interface node locations and resistivity nodal values in order to fit the
observed data.
An assumption common to both routines is that the profile to be
inverted is perpendicular to the electrical strike.

Preparing the Input for the MT 2D Inversion

Program
The preparation of the input for the 2D MT inversion program requires
the use of other programs to edit the data and construct each section.
Refer to the Maps chapter of this manual or the WinGLink Help
System for more details:
MT Soundings

A guide to using WinGLink

17BMT 2D Inversion 18-1

Edit and save observed MT curves.

Assign TE/TM mode for each sounding.

Maps

Construct sections by adding MT stations to a profile trace.

Pseudo-sections

Further editing of data and mode assignment of MT curves.

Masking bad data in each separate TE/TM curve. (The

editing carried out in the Soundings module will mask
frequencies but not individual samples for each separate
TE/TM component)

Creating and Loading Models

Elements of a Model
A typical 2D inversion model consists of:

A Mesh
This is a finite-difference mesh, which must have at least one column for
each station of the profile. Each cell of the mesh is assigned a userdefined resistivity value. The model mesh is the input model for the
smooth inversion routine.
The program allows two types of automatic mesh generation
1. Coarse mesh generation, where the thickness of the rows
increases with depth according to a fixed, pre-assigned scheme
(suitable for most MT data).
2. Fine mesh generation, where the thickness of the rows
increases with depth based on the initial resistivity set for the
model and the frequencies involved (more suitable for highfrequency data).

Resistivity Interfaces
Resistivity interfaces are elements of the model used only by the sharp
boundary inversion routine. The interfaces are polygonal lines added to
the model to create layers of different resistivity, hence assuming a sharp
variation of the resistivity within the mesh.
Model validation criteria: To run a sharp boundary inversion, you need
to define a valid initial model. This is a model with:
1. at least 1 resistivity interface in addition to the default interface
corresponding to the air-earth interface (topography).
2. at least 1 resistivity node on each interface (including the airearth interface).
An error message appears when trying to run a sharp boundary inversion
on models which do not meet the above criteria.

18-2 17BMT 2D Inversion

A guide to using WinGLink

Resistivity Nodes
Resistivity nodes are elements of the model used only by the Sharp
Boundary inversion routine.
The nodes are markers put on the interfaces to define the lateral variation
of the resistivity below the interface. At least one node for each interface
must be set, including the topography which is considered by the
program as the top interface.

Creating and Loading Models

Each profile having stations may have many models associated with it.
To display the list of models associated with a profile, select the File |
Open Model menu command and select the desired profile from the
Profiles box:

In the Models box, select the model name, then click the OK button.
To create a new model, select the New item, then click the OK button.
Each model is based on a finite difference mesh. Whenever a new model
is added, a new mesh is generated with:

at least one column for each station.

the same resistivity for all cells.

a predefined number of rows and columns.

If the Use Topography checkbox is selected, the model incorporates the

topography along the profile according to the following rules:
1. From the area topography grid as defined in the WinGLink
shell.
2. From the project topography grid.
3. From the elevations of the stations attached to the profile.

A guide to using WinGLink

17BMT 2D Inversion 18-3

You can then use the Edit Model commands to modify the current
model. The Edit Model commands are made available when you click
one of the following two icons:
This button starts Edit Mesh mode. The mesh can be edited by:

Adding rows or columns

Deleting rows or columns

Changing the size of a row or a column

Changing the resistivity of the cells

Locking/unlocking cell resistivity values

This button starts the Edit Resistivity Interfaces mode.

This is used to build or edit a sharp boundary inversion model. The
model can be edited by:

Adding model interfaces

Adding resistivity nodes to the interfaces

This button starts the Edit Tears mode.

This is used to define tear areas on a model (use of this function is
described further below).
To exit the edit modes, reclick the same button used to enter the
respective edit mode: the program will ask if you wish to confirm the
changes you made. Use of the edit functions is described further below.

Creating Marine / Amphibious Models

Marine or amphibious models can be created for profiles along which at
least some of the stations have elevations less than 0m. The default
resistivity of cells located between sea level and the sea floor for sections
of submarine profile is 0.33 Ohm.m. This resistivity value remains fixed
during model inversion. Marine/amphibious models are inverted in the
same way as standard terrestrial models.

To Create a Marine (or Amphibious) Model:

1. Select the File | Open Model menu command. The Profile and
Model Selection dialog box opens:

18-4 17BMT 2D Inversion

A guide to using WinGLink

Select the <New> item, and select the Create Marine Model
check box; the Use Topography check box is then
automatically activated.
2. The mesh can be regridded using user-defined block-width
parameters and the water resistivity and default mesh resistivity
values set using the Edit | Reset Marine Mesh menu
command:

Note: All non-water cells are set to the resistivity value set in

A guide to using WinGLink

17BMT 2D Inversion 18-5

the second field; it is not possible to reset only the water

resistivity value.

Default Mesh Generation

Whenever a new model is created, a coarse gridding default mesh is
generated. To set a new default for mesh generation, select the Edit |
Reset Mesh to Default menu command, then choose either Coarse or
Fine according to your needs.
Warning: Resetting the mesh to default will reset the current model.
For more detailed control over mesh generation, select the Edit | Reset
Mesh to Default | User Defined menu command to open the mesh
generation dialog box:

The value set in the Resistivity Value field is used as the value
throughout the mesh. Existing values are overwritten.
Either or both block widths can be reset. You may optionally set the
horizontal and vertical block widths in two separate operations by calling
the User Defined menu command twice. Note, however, that the mesh
resistivity values are reset to the specified value each time the block
widths are reset.

18-6 17BMT 2D Inversion

A guide to using WinGLink

Extracting a Mesh from an Existing Resistivity

Section
1. If not already in Edit Mesh mode, switch to this mode by
clicking the

button.

2. Select the Edit | Background menu command and choose the

Set background grid option. Select the background resistivity
grid to display:

Note: The selected background grid will NOT be displayed

immediately on the screen.
3. Again select the Edit | Background menu command, and now
choose the Show background grid command
4. Select the Edit | Background menu command, and choose the
Extract Mesh from background grid command
For each mesh cell where a grid value is available, a mesh resistivity
value is extracted. Remaining cell values are extrapolated

Filling a Mesh with Values Extracted from a 3D

MT Mesh
Meshes can be extracted from any 3D MT mesh in the current database
along the active profile and the resistivity values contained therein used
as fill values for the current mesh.

To Fill a Mesh with 3D MT Mesh Values:

1. Select the Edit | Fill Mesh with 3D Mesh Values menu
command. A warning message appears indicating that,
depending on 3D model dimensions, the time to extract the
mesh may be on the order of minutes. This is particularly true if
the original 2D mesh contains topography information.
2. After acknowledging the warning, the 3D Models selection box
opens:

A guide to using WinGLink

17BMT 2D Inversion 18-7

Select the project and desired mesh and click the OK button to
initiate extraction and the subsequent filling of mesh cells.
During this process, 3D mesh cells located along the profile are extracted
from the 3D MT mesh and used as fill for the current mesh. Thus, if the
mesh is not coincident with any part of the profile, no resistivity values
are replaced in the original mesh.
2D meshes generated by the MT 2D Inversion program generally contain
mesh columns which extend well beyond the profile as well as below the
expected maximum depth of penetration to allow the inversion to
incorporate the effects of nearby structures on the predicted impedances.
The 2D meshes extracted from the 3D MT meshes, however, are limited
to values along the profile. Thus, resistivity values of the original mesh
which lie outside of profile are not extracted from the 3D mesh and
remain unchanged.
In addition, if the resolution of the 3D mesh is exceedingly coarse
relative to the original 2D mesh, it is possible that no values can be
extracted from the upper layers of the 3D mesh. In this case, the original
mesh values are retained.

Editing a Mesh
The MT 2D program includes a powerful interface for editing meshes. To
access this interface, either click the
button in the toolbar or select
the Edit | Goto Edit Mesh menu command. This places the program in
the Mesh Edit mode.
Upon entering this mode, both the toolbar and the Edit menu commands
change and now include a number of commands and functions for
performing mesh edit operations.
To exit Mesh Edit mode, select the Edit | Exit Edit Mesh menu
command or reclick the now depressed Edit Mesh button. If any changes
were made to the mesh while in Mesh Edit mode, the program prompts
you to save the changes before returning to the standard program mode.
The individual mesh edit commands are described below.

Adding Rows or Columns to a Mesh

After entering Mesh Edit mode:

18-8 17BMT 2D Inversion

A guide to using WinGLink

1. Click the
button and select Add Row or Add Column; the
pointer changes to a cross hair.
2. In the model window, click the location in the mesh where the
upper bound of the new row [left bound of the new column] is
to be placed. This function effectively splits a row or column
into two; the resistivity values on either side of the new row or
column are identical.

Deleting Rows or Columns from a Mesh

1. Click the
button and select Delete Row or Delete Column;
the pointer changes to a cross hair;
2. In the model window, point in proximity of the upper bound of
the row [left bound of the column] to delete and then click the
mouse left button. When deleting rows, the current row is
deleted and the area previously occupied by the deleted row is
assigned the resistivity value of the next lower row. When
deleting columns, the current column is deleted and the area
previously occupied by the deleted column is assigned the
resistivity value of the column to the right.

Sizing Rows or Columns

1. Click the
button and select Row Height or Column
Width; the pointer changes to a cross hair.
2. In the model window, point in proximity of one of the
row/column boundaries.
3. Click and hold down the button; drag the boundary to the new
position and release the button.

Changing Cell Resistivities

While in Mesh Edit mode, click the box in the Rho window which
contains the new resistivity value you wish to assign to one or more mesh
cells:

Then click:
to change the resistivity of one cell at a time.
Click each cell to change the resistivity value.
to change the resistivity of a group of adjacent cells.
Click the mesh and drag the mouse to include all cells you wish to edit
the resistivity of

A guide to using WinGLink

17BMT 2D Inversion 18-9

to change the resistivity of a row/column (or half row/half

column):
1. select Row/Column selection
2. click the mesh, then click the row/column you want to change
the resistivity of. To change a half row/column resistivity, click
the cell the change should start from in the row or column.
to change the resistivity of all the cells below a given row:
1. select Bottom Space Selection;
2. click the mesh, then click in proximity of the lower boundary of
the row.
to change the resistivity of all the cells left (or right) of a column:
1. select Left/Right Space Selection;
2. click the mesh, then click in proximity of the left/right
boundary of the column.
When setting resistivity values, you are not limited to the values listed in
the Rho window. To set a specific resistivity value, enter a value in the
field provided at the bottom of the window. The appropriate cell color is
selected automatically based on the resistivity values of the next higher
and next lower color ranges.
Note: Changing the resistivity value associated with a color does not
change the values of any cells in the mesh already assigned that color.

Locking/Unlocking Cell Resistivity

The resistivity of cells can be locked so that during the inversion process
their resistivities are not changed.

To Lock Cell Resistivities:

1. Click the
button and select Lock or select Edit |Lock Rho
Value to enable locking mode. While in this mode, the lock
button remains depressed.
2. To lock cells, either select from the options which are listed
when the mouse is positioned over the Edit |Lock Rho Value
command:

18-10 17BMT 2D Inversion

A guide to using WinGLink

then click the mesh with the mouse to lock cell values
or
use the buttons shown below to access the same commands:
From left to right, the buttons are used for cell selection,
row/column selection, band selection, bottom/left/right space
selection, undo locking operation, and terminate/enable
locking.
Note: The first five buttons function as described above only
when the locking button is depressed. Their function is
otherwise dependent on the active edit mode, e.g. edit
resistivities.
Locked items appear with a halftone screening.

To Unlock Cell Resistivities:

button and select Unlock or select Edit | Unlock
1. Click the
Rho Value to enable unlocking mode. While in this mode, the
lock button remains depressed.
2. Cells can be locked and unlocked using commands analogous
to those used to lock cells. Likewise, the buttons described
above can be used to unlock cells.
After either locking or unlocking cells in Edit Mesh mode and returning
to inversion mode, the locked cells are displayed in the mesh with
halftone screening and the inversion parameters are set to take into
account any locked cells.

To Enable/Disable Cell Locking for a Model:

1. Select the Inversion | Settings menu command.
2. The Parameter Settings dialog box opens. Select the Fixed
Parms tab.

A guide to using WinGLink

17BMT 2D Inversion 18-11

3. Select the Fixed Parameters check box.

Note: Halftone screening is used to display locked cells only
when the Fixed Parameters check box is selected.

Defining Tear Areas

WinGLink includes functionality for specifying up to eight tear areas
within a model. Using these zones, the user can define tears in the
smoothing function, i.e. turn off smoothing across a boundary.

To Create a Tear Area:

1. After creating a model, select the Edit | Goto Edit Tear menu
command to enter Edit Tear mode or click the

button.

2. Next, choose a selection mode on the Edit | Set Tear Area

menu:

Selection options are similar to those used elsewhere in the

2DMT module, e.g. for setting resistivities or locking cell
values. Alternatively, you may use the selection buttons on the
toolbar.
3. After choosing a selection option, the tear area menu options
appear (Edit | Set Tear Pattern) and the corresponding
buttons on the tool bar are enabled:

Each of the patterns corresponds to one of the eight different

tear areas.

18-12 17BMT 2D Inversion

A guide to using WinGLink

4. Using the mouse, select the cells to be included in the tear area:

Although the function supports up to 8 different tear areas, a

given cell can be associated with only one tear area.
5. After defining tear areas, exit Edit Tear mode with the Edit |
Exit Edit Tear menu command or by again clicking the Tear
button. Display of tear areas can then be toggled on and off
with the View | Tear menu command.
Tear areas present in a model are included in any smooth inversion
performed on the model.

Editing a Sharp Boundary Model

Editing Sharp Boundary Interfaces
Select the Edit | go to Edit Resistivity Interfaces menu command or
click the

button to enter Edit Resistivity Interfaces mode.

The Edit Interfaces command buttons appear.

Click:
to add an interface
Going from left to right, click with the mouse left button wherever you
want a vertex of the polygonal interface to be added. When finished,
right-click the last vertex you wish to add: the program automatically
completes the right bound of the interface.
to delete an interface
Left-click a segment of the interface to delete.
to insert a vertex
Left-click the interface at the location where you want to insert a vertex.
to delete a vertex
Left-click the vertex to delete.
to move a vertex

A guide to using WinGLink

17BMT 2D Inversion 18-13

Left-click the vertex to move and drag it to the new location along the
interface.

Setting Interface Resistivity Nodes

Select the Edit | go to Edit Resistivity Interfaces menu command or
click the

button to enter Edit Resistivity Interfaces mode.

The Edit Interfaces command buttons appear.

Click:
to add a resistivity node
Left-click an interface where you wish to insert a node. A node will be
inserted with a value of resistivity equal to the value currently selected in
the Rho editor box.
to delete a resistivity node
Left-click the node to be deleted.
to move a resistivity node
Left-click on the node to be moved and move it along the interface.
to edit the value of resistivity for a node
1. Left-click on the Rho editor box and select the value for the
new resistivity.
2. Left-click each node to which you wish to assign the new
resistivity.
Note: Each interface must contain at least one resistivity node.

Locking Interface Vertices and Resistivity Nodes

The positions of interface vertices and the values of resistivity nodes can
be locked by selecting the Edit | Lock menu command while in Edit
Resistivity Interface mode in the MT 2D program. After selecting the
command, click each vertex or node to be fixed. Locked vertices are
indicated by a red cross, locked nodes are indicated by a black circle
around the node.
Be aware that locked vertices and nodes are not necessarily truly
locked. Depending on the values of the Tau for Resistivities and Tau
for Interfaces parameters, vertex and node values may actually be quite
variant. These two parameters, which are set in the Sharp Inv. tab of the
Parameters Setting dialog (Inversion | Settings) control the stickiness
of each of these values. A high value, e.g. 1E8, ensures relatively little
change per iteration, whereas a low value, e.g. 10, restricts only slightly.
Locked vertices and nodes can be unlocked using the command provided
under the Edit | Unlock menu command.

18-14 17BMT 2D Inversion

A guide to using WinGLink

Inversion Settings
Overview
As described below the MT 2D provides a multi-paneled dialog window
which provides extensive options for controlling the inversion process
including, among others, the selection of modes and frequency ranges.
In addition to the options provided here, however, note also that the
masking functions available in the MT Soundings and MT PseudoSection programs can be used to hide individual data points from the
inversion routine. This provides an additional level of control over which
data points are used in model inversions. Please refer to the respective
chapters of manual for additional details.

Main Inversion Parameters

Select the Inversion | Settings... menu command to open the Parameter
Settings dialog box:

Click the Main Parms tab, and select the desired options. Available for
selection are:
_ Invert TM rho and phase data
_ Invert TE rho and phase data
_ Invert Hz transfer function (*)
(*) The program is written assuming an e^{-it} time dependence. Many
processing routines assume e^{+it}. If this is the case, then the data will

A guide to using WinGLink

17BMT 2D Inversion 18-15

need to be conjugated to be consistent with the program. Check the "Take

conjugate of Hz data" box to do so.
Note: While in the Main Parameters dialog box, it is possible to enter an
error value that will terminate the inversion. This last option is only
available for the Sharp Boundary inversion routine.
In the Min/Max Resistivity Values (calculated) area of the Main Parms
window, select the Use Minimum and Maximum resistivity values
checkbox to force the smooth inversion code to restrict the resistivity
values calculated by the code to values between the specified minimum
and maximum values:

Specifying the Data for Which the Inversion is to

be Performed
Select the Data Select. tab of the Parameter Settings window and make
the appropriate settings:
Specifies the lower bound of the observed curves
Min
Frequency
frequency range over which fitting is tried. If you want
to fit all frequencies of the observed curve, specify a
very low value, e.g. 10 E^-5

18-16 17BMT 2D Inversion

Decades

Specifies the upper bound of the observed curves

frequency range on which fitting is tried; it is equal to
Min Frequency * 10 ^(Decades). Values can be set
independently for each of the modes.

Use Station
Data

Will force the program to use the observed curve data

samples. This could lead to a long calculation time
when the data points of the observed curves are not
ordered in the frequency domain. In this case, you may
want to select Use Interpolated Data to cut the
inversion time considerably.

Interpolated
Data

Uses a resampling of the observed curves. The #Freqs

in Decade parameter specifies how many samples per
decade must result from the interpolation. This option
is useful for shortening the inversion time when the
data points of the observed curves are not ordered in
the frequency domain and/or when dealing with curves
with many data points.

Use
Smoothed
Curves

By default, the observed curves used for the inversion

are the edited curves saved by the Soundings program.
Selecting this option will force the program to use the
smoothed curves instead of the edited curves.

A guide to using WinGLink

Smooth Inversion Parameters

The NLCG algorithm attempts to minimize an objective function that is
the sum of the normalized data misfits and the smoothness of the model.
The tradeoff between data misfits and model smoothness is controlled by
the regularization parameter tau. The NLCG algorithm does not try to
automatically determine tau to reach a target misfit. Rather, the user must
run several inversions using different values of tau, and then run the
algorithm until convergence to determine what value of tau will give the
smoothest model and the target misfit. It is possible with real field data
that one would never be able to reach the desired target misfit. In this
case, one would want the tau that gives the smaller RMS error and the
smoothest model. The following parameters are available to the user for
inversion control:
Select the Smooth Inv. tab of the Parameter Settings window and make
the appropriate settings:
The program can solve for the smoothest model or
Smoothest
model or
the smoothest variations away from the apriori
variations
(starting) model. Choosing smoothest variations is
a useful way to do hypothesis testing for different
model parameters or features.

A guide to using WinGLink

Regularization
Laplacian

It is possible to specify either a uniform grid

Laplacian (which assumes for the purposes of
computing the regularization function that the
dimensions of the model are all equal) or standard
Laplacian on the actual model mesh. The uniform
grid Laplacian may produce smoother models, but
at the expense of smearing features both vertically
and horizontally. The standard Laplacian may
produce a rougher-looking model, but the
definition of smoothness is consistent with the
model dimensions. Unless there are reasons to do
otherwise, we recommend using the standard
Laplacian.

Regularization
Order

Option to minimize the gradients (

)of the
) of the model.
model, or the Laplacian (
Variations of this parameter, equal or unequal grid
Laplacian, and the smoothest model or the
smoothest variations give the user a great deal of
flexibility for generating different types of
constraints on the inversion. It is recommended that
you use Laplacian smoothing as the default.
Smoother models can also be obtained with
increasing tau

Tau for
Smoothing
operator

This is the regularization parameter that controls

the tradeoff between fitting the data and adhering
to the model constraint. Larger values cause a
smoother model at the expense of a worse data fit.
The value of tau should optimally be chosen such
that the RMS error for the inversion is between 1.0
and 1.5. A few inversion runs may be necessary to
determine the best tau for each inverse problem.
Additionally, noise in the data and non-2D data

17BMT 2D Inversion 18-17

may prohibit the program from reaching the target

RMS error values. This is especially true for TE
mode data. If you find that the rms does not drop
below 1.5 for any value of tau, you should increase
tau until the rms is 1.5 (or perhaps 1.2) times the
smallest rms you can achieve. Alternatively, you
can increase the error floors until you can achieve a
minimum rms of 1.0 and then increase tau until the
rms is 1.5. Values between 3 and 300 seem to be
typical for most MT inversions and are good
starting points.
Weighting
function

The first option specifies the factor to multiply

horizontal derivatives. A value of 1.0 is
recommended unless you want to increase the
horizontal smoothness.
The second line specifies in the weighting
function. A value of 1.0 is recommended if
. If you set the value to zero,
minimizing
then no weighting is applied to the regularization
term.
The third line specifies the minimum block
dimensions to be used for computing the weighting
function. These are specified in meters. These are
useful for setting a transition from a depthindependent regularization in the shallow part of
the model to a depth-dependent regularization in
the deeper part of the model. Values of 500 1000
meters are recommended as good starting points. If
values of 0.0 are specified, then the model will be
overly rough in the shallow part if using a standard
grid Laplacian , or overly smooth if using uniform
grid Laplacian.
The weighting parameters entered here are sent to
the inversion code only if the Weighting enabled
check box is selected. Otherwise, alpha = 1.0, beta
= 0.0 and min block dimensions =0.0 are sent to the
inversion program. .

Output
sensitivity
map

When selected, the sensitivity map is output by the

inversion routine at the final iteration, regardless of
the preconditioner used. The diagonal part of
1

AT Rdd A is output for each model parameter. This

information can be used to determine those parts of
the model that have the greatest sensitivity to that
data and which parts of the model are relatively
unimportant. This information is in the same
format as the model files and can be viewed as a
mesh by selecting the Display | Sensitivity Map
command. Note: Depending on the input
parameters, the calculation of the sensitivity map
may be time intensive.
Save
intermediate

18-18 17BMT 2D Inversion

When selected, the resistivity values calculated for

each model iteration by the inversion code are

A guide to using WinGLink

models

stored in the database. Upon completion of the

inversion, you can view the meshes for any or all
of the iterations by selecting the Display | Model
Development command. The mesh at a given
iteration number can be saved as a model by rightclicking the model and specifying a new model
name. The intermediate models remain stored in
the database for a given model until a new
inversion is performed on the model

Error Floor
Select the Error Floor tab of the Parameter Settings window.
This is the error floor for the data. Input errors that are below this value
will be reset to this value. Values greater than 1.0 for TM and TE mode
data are recommended. (For small values, percents are equivalent to
natural logarithm errors). The error floor for the phase should be entered
in rho equivalent percent. For example, 1% in rho is equal to 0.29
degrees in phase.
For Hz data, the error floor is an absolute magnitude that should
optimally be chosen relative to the quality of the Hz estimates. A
reasonable starting point might be 0.01 or greater

Static Shift
Select the Static Shift tab of the Parameter Settings window.

Select Stations to Invert for Static Shifts

In this version of the program, the user can specify which data are to be
included in the inversion for static shifts. In other words, you can invert
for static shifts for just the TE mode data, TM mode data, or any
combination for each station. If you want to invert for static shifts for all
data, just select the Invert for Static Shift check box. However, to
specify any combination of data, on the Inversion Menu, select the Edit
Static Shift command. While this command is active, double-click on
each station one at a time to select the static shift option for the selected
station (TE only, TM only, TE&TM). The name of the station on the
topography (normally black color) will change color according to the
static shift settings:
BLACK
- None
- TE only

RED

- TM only

BLUE

- TE & TM

PURPLE

To exit the static-shift edit mode, select the Inversion Menu | Lock
Static Shift menu command.
The static shift values returned by the inversion routine are stored for
each station in the database. Thus, these static shift values will be used in
any subsequent inversions or forward calculations performed on the
model, provided the static shifts are enabled for the respective mode.

A guide to using WinGLink

17BMT 2D Inversion 18-19

Resetting Static Shift Values

The static shift values of all station used in a model can be reset to 1
using the Tools | Reset Static Shift command to open the Static Shift
reset dialog box. The values are otherwise retained, i.e when editing
meshes and when restarting inversions:

Static Shift Settings

18-20 17BMT 2D Inversion

Invert for
static shift

The program can optionally invert for static shifts

of the TM and TE mode apparent resistivities. The
static shift values are included as parameters in the
inversion, and the datum is that the sum of the ln
of the static shifts should sum to zero.
Check the Use screen settings for static shift box
to apply the static shift type for each station.
When this box is not checked, static shifts apply to
all stations for both TE and TM modes.
Note: After manually setting the static shift of
individual stations, both the Invert for static shift
and Use screen settings for static shift check
boxes are automatically selected.

Variance
for
constraint

IF you choose to invert for static shifts, you are

also asked to input a variance and a damping
value. The variance is the variance in the
requirement that the log of the statics sum to zero.
Enter values in percent, like 5.0 or 10.0. Larger
values mean the zero sum constraint is less
important.

Damping
for
constraint

The other parameter you'll have to enter if

inverting for static shifts is the damping term.
Basically, this damps the inversion so that large
changes are not made to the static shifts on the
first few iterations. In other words, you might
want to try to fit the data as good as possible
before allowing changes to the static shifts. Every
three inversion iterations, the program reduces the
damping value by a third. Thus, the static shift
parameters gain in influence as the inversion
progresses. If you want the statics to remain fixed
until later iterations, enter a large value here, like
1000 or 10000. If you want the statics to

A guide to using WinGLink

immediately be changeable, enter smaller values.

A value of zero for the damping means that the
statics are completely free to be changed.

Exporting Static Shift Values

Static shift values can be exported to external files after running an
inversion by selecting the Tools | Export | Import Files Used for
Inversion command. The static shift values are output to the files
statics_vals.te and statics_vals.tm for the te and tm modes, respectively.

Data Errors
Select the Data Errors tab of the Parameter Settings window.
Check this to use the errors of the observed
Use Data
Errors if
curves.
existing
(TE/TM)
Rho,
Phase

If the above option is not checked or the observed

curves have no errors, these are the default
standard deviation errors to use.

Fixed Parameters
If the resistivities of some model cells have been locked, use the options
provided on the Fixed Parms tab to specify whether or not cell locking is
to be used, and the parameter which specifies the amount which the fixed
parameters may change over the course of the inversion.
Certain model parameters can optionally be
Fixed
Parameters
forced to remain fixed through the inversion. Do
not mark this checkbox if you want to override
all the locking performed on elements.
Tau for
clamping
fixed
parameters

If the above option is chosen, then a tau value

for keeping the parameters fixed must be input
(1e5 is recommended - The smaller the value,
the less damping).

Use Tears

Select this check box to enable tear

functionality.

Note: After either locking or unlocking cells, the Fixed Parameters

check box is automatically selected and Tau is set to a default value of
10.

Sharp Boundary Inversion Parameters

Select the Sharp Inv. Parms tab of the Parameter Settings window.
This controls how damped the locked elements
Damping
Factor
will be. The lower the value, the less the
damping.
Tau for
Resistivities/
Interfaces

A guide to using WinGLink

This is the regularization parameter that

controls the tradeoff between fitting the data
and adhering to the model constraint. Larger tau
values will result in smoother variations
amongst the parameters, at the expense of a

17BMT 2D Inversion 18-21

higher data misfits. Higher tau values mean that

the interfaces have less variation, and the
resistivity of each layer is more smoothly
varying.

Running the Inversion

Running a Smooth Inversion
To Run a 2D Smooth Inversion on the Current Model:
1. As described in the previous section, select the Inversion |
Settings menu command to open the Parameter Settings
window and enter the appropriate inversion parameters.
2. Select the Inversion | Run Smooth Inversion menu command.
3. Enter the Max of iterations.

Enter Max of iterations = 0 to run a forward computation and see the

response of the current model.
Once the inversion is started, the algorithm iterates until the maximum
number of iterations specified by the user has been reached or the
program can reduce the RMS no further.
During the inversion, the progress can be monitored via the updated RMS
error shown for each iteration in the Running Smooth Inversion
progress window. Also displayed in this window is the expected time
remaining for the inversion. In addition, the resistivity values for the
mesh cells are updated following each iteration with the new values.
When the inversion is completed, the inverted model is shown as a mesh.
Saving this model will overwrite the initial input model. If you wish to
save the starting model, you should save it as a separate model before
starting the inversion.

Running a Sharp Boundary Inversion

To Run a 2D Sharp Boundary Inversion on the Current
Model:
1. As described in the previous section, select the Inversion |
Settings menu command to open the Parameter Settings
window and enter the appropriate inversion parameters,
including the target RMS error.

18-22 17BMT 2D Inversion

A guide to using WinGLink

2. On the Inversion menu, select Run Sharp Bounds Inversion.

3. Enter the Max # of iterations.

To run a forward computation and see the response of the current model,
set Max of iterations = 0.
Once the inversion is started, the algorithm iterates until the target RMS
error is reached or the user-entered maximum number of iterations is
reached.
During the inversion, the progress can be monitored via the updated RMS
error shown for each iteration.
When the inversion is completed, the inverted model is shown as a mesh.
The resulting resistivity interfaces and resistivity nodes are superimposed
upon this mesh.
Saving the output model overwrites the initial input model. If you wish to
save the starting model, you should save it as a separate model before
starting the inversion.

Running an Inversion Using CS/AMT Data

The inversion parameters are, by in large, the same as those used for
regular MT data, though the options are somewhat limited. Note that only
smooth inversions may be performed for CS/AMT data and that the
inversion routine predates that used for regular MT data.
The MT 2D inversion module is plane-wave only, i.e. it is far-field as far
as CSAMT is concerned. The bipole separations are, therefore, not used
in the 2D calculations. Bipole separations are, however, used in the
calculation of 1D models in the Soundings module.

Computing Synthetic Forward Modeling Results

Forward modeling results, corresponding to a given 2D model, can be
calculated at any time by running an inversion with zero iterations. When
the 2D model is saved, the results are saved as calculated data for the
stations added to the model profile.
If no stations with observed data are available for a given profile,
synthetic 2D forward modeling results can be calculated by:
1. Using the Maps program to insert new stations along the
profile.
2. Editing a 2D model for the profile using the 2D Inversion
program.

A guide to using WinGLink

17BMT 2D Inversion 18-23

3. Running a forward calculation by entering zero iterations for

the inversion.
The computed results are saved as calculated 2D data for the stations of
the profile. At this stage, the stations will still miss the observed data.
To store the forward response as station data, select the Tools | Save
model responses as station data menu command in the 2D MT
inversion program. .
Note: If using the Save model responses as station data command, any
existing station data are overwritten. A warning message to this effect is
displayed and must be acknowledged before the data are saved as station
data.

Presentation of Results
Displaying Models as Sections
The 2D Models are normally shown as a mesh showing the cell
geometries and resistivity values.
Each mesh can be gridded to obtain a section, which can be plotted or
used as a background in other modeling programs.
On the Display menu:

Select Mesh, to display the model as mesh (default).

Select Section, to grid the mesh and display the model as a

contoured section. Choose Gridding to interpolate the
resistivity values the first time you select this display mode.
For details on setting the gridding options, please refer to the
General Functions chapter of this manual

Displaying Response Curves

Response curves can be displayed for each station used in a model by
double-clicking the column directly under a station name:

18-24 17BMT 2D Inversion

A guide to using WinGLink

Provided data are available, curves can be displayed for the real and
imaginary parts of TE, TM and HZ. For HZ data, the tipper can also be
displayed. Error bars can be toggled on and off by selecting the Err
check box. The drop-down list box can be used to open the response
curve for a specific station without closing the window.
The three buttons in the upper right corner of the response curve
windows are used to control print functions:
print the current response curve to the default printer.
open a selection dialog box from which you may select for
printing any or all response curves for stations contained in the current
model. Up to six response curves may be printed on a single sheet.
open the printer settings dialog box.
The status bar in the response curve window contains the RMS and static
shift values for the model, provided an inversion has been run. In
addition, the position of the mouse along the time axis is also displayed.

Displaying Pseudo-Sections
One way to compare the inversion fitting is by displaying the pseudosections of the observed data together with the pseudo-sections of the
calculated data. The MT 2D Inversion program assumes that the observed
pseudo-sections have already been calculated by gridding the observed
data in the Pseudo-Sections program (accessible via the WinGLink
Shell).
To display the pseudo-sections, select the Display | Pseudo-Sections
menu command.

A guide to using WinGLink

17BMT 2D Inversion 18-25

The observed section is displayed above the calculated section. The

calculated section is gridded using the same parameters as the observed
section.

Displaying Multiple Models for Comparison

To Simultaneously Display Multiple Models:
1. Close the active model.
2. Select the Special | Multiple Windows menu command.
3. Select the models to be displayed for each profile.
4. Use the Display | Mesh and Section menu commands to toggle
between the two different views.

Displaying and Exporting Sensitivity Maps

Provided the Output sensitivity map option was selected in the Smooth
Inv. tab of the Parameter Settings dialog box prior to inversion, the
sensitivity map generated by the inversion code can either be displayed
on the screen or output (in the same format as a regular model) for use
outside of WinGLink.
To display the sensitivity map, after running an inversion, select the
Display | Sensitivity Map menu command. To return to the model view,
select the Display | Restore Model command.
To export the sensitivity map, select the Tools | Export | Input Files
Used for Inversion menu command. The sensitivity map will be
exported to a file named [Profile Name]_[Model Name].sens.

Displaying Model Roughness

After running an inversion, the model roughness can be displayed by
selecting the Display | Model Roughness menu command.

Displaying Model Development

The MT 2D Inversion program provides the option of storing and
displaying model meshes at each iteration of an inversion. To enable and
use this function:
1. Select the Inversion | Settings menu command to open the
Parameter Settings dialog box.
2. Select the Smooth Inv. tab. At the bottom of the tab, select the
Save intermediate models check box.
3. Set the other inversion parameters as you normally would, then
perform the smooth inversion.

18-26 17BMT 2D Inversion

A guide to using WinGLink

4. Upon completion of the inversion, select Display | Model

Development to open the selection window:

.
5. A given iteration can be saved as a model by right-clicking the
model window:

Models saved in this way are assigned the same inversion

parameters as the original model
6. To return to the model, select Display | Restore Model.
Note: The model development function is available only for smooth
models.

Displaying 1D Models for Stations

On the View menu, position the mouse over the 1D Models command,
then choose the most appropriate size for the model: small, medium,
large.

A guide to using WinGLink

17BMT 2D Inversion 18-27

Displaying Well Courses

The traces of any wells associated with the current profile can be
superimposed on the current mesh by selecting the View | Wells menu
command. When enabled, the Well Layer Data window appears. This can
be used to toggle the display of any layer data associated with the wells:

Displaying Inversion Reports

In addition to the graphic display of inversion results, the parameters
used in the inversion, inversion errors and calculated TE, TM and HZ
values for each station and period can be viewed and stored as text files.
The inversion reports for a given model remain available until another
inversion is performed on the same model.
To view the parameters used in the inversion and the inversion errors,
select the View | Inversion Log menu command.
To view the observed and calculated TE, TM and HZ values for all
stations used in the model, select the View | Output Data menu
command.
Note: For users of the stand-alone version of the inversion code, the data
presented in the Output Data window are essentially the same as those
output to output_*.dat files.

Taking Notes
Each model has associated with it a note pad, the contents of which are
stored in the database together with the model. To open, select the View |
Notes menu command. Notes stored here may optionally be saved to an
external file by using the File | Save (As) command in the Notes window.

18-28 17BMT 2D Inversion

A guide to using WinGLink

Batch inversion
Executing Batch Inversions
The MT 2D Inversion module can be used to successively execute
inversions on a set of models. Inversions executed in this way make use
of the inversion parameters set for each model in the Parameter Settings
dialog box. All of the inversions to be performed must, however, be of
the same type, i.e. either smooth or sharp, and they must have the same
maximum number of iterations.

To Perform a Batch Execution:

1. Close any open models.
2. Select the Special | Batch Execution menu command
3. In the Batch Execution Selection window which opens, select
the models to be inverted and specify the type of inversion and
the maximum number of iterations to be performed (the last
two parameters apply to all models):

Select the models to be displayed for each profile and click OK

to begin the inversions.
4. Unlike single inversions, the resistivity meshes are neither
updated nor displayed during the inversion process. The current
iteration numbers and RMS values are however, displayed on
the screen. After all inversions have been completed, a
summary window appears, listing the RMS values computed
for each model and any problems encountered.
5. To view the inverted models, use the File | Open Model menu
command as you would to open any model.

Exporting and Importing Models and Interfaces

Exporting Models and Interfaces
Models created and used within WinGLink can also be exported to
external files. In addition to the models themselves, all files necessary for
running an inversion using the stand-alone version of the inversion code,
including the command file for either version 5.0 or 6.7+ of the stand-

A guide to using WinGLink

17BMT 2D Inversion 18-29

alone code, are output. Models can optionally be output in GEMCOM

format.

To Export a Model:
1. Select the Tools | Export menu command. Position the mouse
over the menu command and select either Input Files used for
Inversion or Model in GEMCOM Format
2. When saving the files used for inversion, specify the directory
to which the files should be output as well as the version of the
inversion code with which the files are to be compliant.
Instead of outputting all files used for the inversion, you may,
for the case of sharp boundary models, instead output only
resistivity interfaces by selecting the Resistivity Interface only
check box. This function is useful for transferring complex
resistivity interfaces from one model to another

When exporting models in the 6.7+ compliant format, the static shift
values are exported to the files statics_vals.te and statics_vals.tm for the
te and tm modes, respectively.

Importing Models and Interfaces

Models may be created or modified outside of WinGLink and imported
into the MT 2D Inversion module. In order to import a model, both a
command file (*.CMD) and a like-named model file (*.MOD) are
required. The remaining parameter files, which are used by the standalone version of the inversion code and control parameters such as fixed
cells, static shifts and weighting are optional. Command files must be
compatible with either version 5.0 or newer of Randy Mackies 2D
inversion code. Either smooth or sharp models may be imported.

To Import a Model:
1. Select the Tools | Inversion Model from External Files
menu command.
2. The Import Model window opens. Browse the directories and
select the desired .MOD file; click the OK button.

To Import an Interface:
When working with sharp boundary models, it is possible to export and
import resistivity interfaces a convenient function when working with
various models along the same profile (or profiles with similar structure).
1. Select the Tools | Resistivity Interfaces menu command.

18-30 17BMT 2D Inversion

A guide to using WinGLink

2. Before the import commences, the MT 2D Inversion module

alerts you that any existing interfaces will be lost.
3. If you acknowledged the warning mentioned in step 2 with Yes,
continue by selecting the interface file (*.PAR).

A guide to using WinGLink

17BMT 2D Inversion 18-31

19: MT 3D Modeling

Overview
The 3D Modeling program is used to:

Import, create, edit, print and export 3D meshes

Create views, or slices, of 3D meshes

Calculate the forward response of 3D meshes

Export EDI files calculated for stations positioned on the mesh

using field information returned following the forward
calculation.

Used together with the Maps program for positioning stations and
defining profiles and the X-Sections program, the 3D Modeling program
is the cornerstone of WinGLinks 3D modeling functionality.
3D meshes are used in both the MT 3D modeling program. Though the
functionality is similar in both, there are enough differences that a
separate chapter is dedicated to each. This chapter is the MT 3D
Modeling chapter.
Note: The 3D Modeling program is available with the MT_4 license
option. For details on license options, please refer to the Modules page of
the Geosystem website: http://www.geosystem.net. Prices available upon
request.

How WinGLink Handles 3D Models

3D models are intended to add another dimension, so to speak, to
WinGLinks palette of MT interpretation tools. The suite of 3D-specific
functions included in several of the WinGLink modules provides the
tools necessary for 3D MT modeling including mesh generation, 3D
forward calculation and EDI export.
The 3D forward modeling code developed by Randy Mackie,
MTD3FWD, is implemented in the 3D Modeling program. This forward
modeling code computes magnetic and electric fields at the surface of a
3D electrical resistivity model illuminated by electromagnetic plane
waves. Used as input are a 3D mesh in the format specified at the end of
this chapter and several model parameters, which are also described in
this chapter.

A guide to using WinGLink

18BMT 3D Modeling 19-1

The fields computed by the forward modeling code are automatically

converted to magnetotelluric impedances and tipper upon conclusion of
the forward calculation. These can in turn be used to generate EDI files
for stations contained in the mesh area.
Field values are generated for each column of data. Thus, EDI files can
be generated for any cell in the mesh provided a station, synthetic or real,
is positioned on the cell. The MT impedance and tipper values can be
stored in the active database as well as stored in an external file and
reused to generate EDI files should stations be added to the project at a
later time.
These EDI files, once imported into a WinGLink database, can be
assigned to map profiles and used elsewhere in WinGLink as station data,
i.e. in the MT 2D module.

About 3D Meshes
The 3D Mesh Definition
In order to be conformant with the forward modeling code, the 3D MT
meshes must be in the slightly modified Randy Mackie format as defined
at the end of this chapter. The aforementioned modification refers to the
addition of georeferencing information, which is used to correctly
position the mesh in the survey area.
The coordinate system of 3D MT meshes within WinGLink is illustrated
below:

Note that the origin, or pivot point, of 3D MT meshes in WinGLink is the

center of the top, left, rear mesh cell. Positive mesh rotation is performed
counterclockwise about this point. For details on mesh rotation, refer to
the Mesh Properties section of this chapter.

3D Meshes in WinGLink
3D meshes are specific to MT projects in WinGLink and may thus only
be imported into projects of type MT. Once imported into a database, a
3D mesh remains associated with its project. The 3D Mesh Importer,
which can be accessed both in the main WinGLink shell as well as in the
MT 3D Modeling program, can be used to import 3D meshes from
external files, the active database and other WinGLink databases.

19-2 18BMT 3D Modeling

A guide to using WinGLink

In addition to its forward calculation feature, the MT 3D Modeling

program also provides functionality for mesh creation, editing, importing,
exporting and visualizing.
Once in a project, 3D meshes can be displayed in the Maps program.
Here, stations can be positioned and profiles defined (refer to Chapter 5,
Maps, for details). Map profiles defined on meshes can be used to extract
vertical 2D sections in the X-Section program (refer to Chapter 7,
Sections, for details). In the Maps program, it is also possible to extract
from a 3D mesh maps at constant depth or elevation for
resistivity/conductance. Meshes can be extracted along a profile in the
MT 2D program and used as starting models for 2D inversions (refer to
Chapter 8 for details).

Using the MT 3D Modeling Program

The 3D Modeling icon, shown to the right, is displayed in the WinGLink
database shell whenever the project selected in the Project panel of the
database shell is of type MT.

Selecting a Mesh
1. After clicking the 3D Modeling icon, the following dialog
window opens, listing all 3D meshes available for the current
project:

If no 3D meshes have yet been imported using either the

WinGLink database shell or the MT 3D Modeling program or
created within the MT 3D Modeling program, the table is
empty. For details on importing 3D meshes into WinGLink,
please refer to the next section or section Importing 3D MT
meshes in Chapter 3 of the WinGLink manual. Instructions on
how to create a mesh in the MT 3D Modeling program are
provided later in this chapter.
2. Select the desired mesh with the mouse, then click the OK
button to continue.

A guide to using WinGLink

18BMT 3D Modeling 19-3

Importing Meshes
In addition to the mesh import function available in the WinGLink
database shell, meshes can also be imported directly into the MT 3D
Modeling program.
To import a mesh into an existing MT project from within the 3D
Modeling program:
1. On the Tools menu, select the Import 3D Mesh Model
command.
2. The first of the 3D MT Mesh Import Wizard windows opens.
Specify the data source: from file, the current database, or an
external database.
If you choose to import from either the current database or a
different WinGLink database, additional dialog windows open
prompting you to select the database name (if you selected
external database) and to select the mesh to be imported.
3. In Import Step 2, select the source file. The file must be in the
Randy Mackie format specified at the end of this chapter.
4. In step three of the import process, specify the units of the data
source:

5. In Import Step 4, specify the mesh attributes, including mesh

description which also functions as the mesh name, location
of the rear top left corner as well as the angle to which the mesh

19-4 18BMT 3D Modeling

A guide to using WinGLink

is to be rotated:

6. After specifying the mesh properties, a window opens with a

text entry box into which you can enter any notes you would
like make regarding the mesh. These notes can be viewed and
modified later in the mesh properties window (File | 3D Model
Mesh Properties).
7. In the final step, WinGLink performs the import operation.
Import progress and any encountered errors are displayed on
screen.

Creating Meshes
The MT 3D Modeling program also provides functionality for creating
meshes within WinGLink. The mesh generation wizard can be started
with the File | New menu command or by actuating the New Mesh
button, located at the far left end of the toolbar. As described below, this
wizard presents several dialog windows for entering the parameters
necessary for mesh creation.
In the first of the mesh creation dialogs, you are prompted to enter a mesh
description, which is also used as the mesh name throughout the
database. A notes field is provided in which any information relevant to
the mesh can be entered.
Click the Next button to open the second of the dialog windows. Here,
location-specific parameters and values for basic mesh properties can be
entered:

A guide to using WinGLink

18BMT 3D Modeling 19-5

X,Y,Z: mesh coordinates on the project datum

dx, dy: initial block dimensions in the x and y directions, respectively.
The actual block dimensions will be set on the fourth and fifth wizard
dialog screens using a padding factor.
Rotation: positive degrees of counterclockwise rotation about the top
left, rear column
Rho Value: starting resistivity of the model. We suggest looking at the
high-frequency apparent resistivities from several soundings in the
project and using a representative value.
Air layers: number of air layers on top of the mesh (minimum: 7, ideal:
10)
Click the Next button after entering the parameter values to open the
third wizard dialog window.

19-6 18BMT 3D Modeling

A guide to using WinGLink

First Thickness: Note that this is actually be the first layer under the
topography, which is added later. First, compute the skin depth for the
model at the highest frequency. This can be computed by entering the
value of the highest frequency in the First Freq. field Recall that skin
depth = 500*SQRT(rho/freq). If we take 100Hz to be the highest
frequency, and rho to be 10 ohm-m, then the skin depth is 158 m. With a
flat earth, we recommend a value of 1/10 the skin depth for the thickness
of the first layer (which would be 15 m in this case). When you add
topography, you will be adding several layers of the same thickness on
top, and, depending on the amount of topography, you will need to use a
larger value in order to keep the model size at a reasonable level. A value
as large as 1/5 of skin depth (maybe 1/3 if there is a lot of topography)
may be best. In the example shown above, the thickness of the first layer
is set to 50 m, which is 1/3 of skin depth. If the number of layers of
topography is large, you may need to compromise to reduce the number
of layers to reduce processing time.
Vertical Factor and Layers: You can try various vertical factors to get a
reasonable number of layers and a reasonable depth range. We
recommend starting with a vertical factor of 1.2 and using 25-30 layers,
as additional topography layers will be added later. We recommend that
the thickness of the last layer to be approximately the same as the width
of the first and last horizontal blocks. You can determine those widths by
advancing to the next wizard dialog screen and entering the horizontal
block size as the starting thickness and a padding factor of 1.5. After
determining the width of these blocks, use the Back button to return to
this wizard dialog screen. The number of layers to be contained in the
mesh is set in the Layers field. Each of these layers is displayed with the
corresponding layer thickness and the total thickness at each layer in
green in the lower part of the window.

A guide to using WinGLink

18BMT 3D Modeling 19-7

After entering the parameter values, click the Next button to open the
fourth wizard dialog window, which is used to enter the parameters for
determining the horizontal (x) block size:

dx: Initial block dimension along the x axis. This value was entered in
the first of the wizard dialogs and cannot be edited here.
Last Layer Thickness: Thickness of the last layer used in the model.
This value corresponds to the thickness of the layer specified in the
Layers field on the previous wizard dialog and cannot be edited here.
Padding & Padding Factor: The number specified in the Padding field
determines the number of padding mesh cells on either side of the first
and last stations, respectively, along the x axis. The padding factor
specifies the factor by which the width of the padding cells is increased
as you move away from the mesh center.
You need to look at the minimum and maximum cell dimensions, and
determine what block dimensions will allow you to have a block for each
site (or most of the sites), and still give a reasonable sized model. In some
cases, the block size will be such that two or more sites will fall on the
same block. In that case, youll have to eliminate all but one site. We
recommend making the block size the same in both the x and y directions
if possible.
After entering the parameter values for the mesh size in the x direction,
click Next to open the fifth wizard dialog window. Here, the parameters
for the mesh size in the y direction are entered. As mentioned above, we
recommend making the block size the same in both the x and y
directions.
Click Next to advance to the sixth wizard dialog. Here, the parameters
related to topography are entered:

19-8 18BMT 3D Modeling

A guide to using WinGLink

The Topography Max. and Min. values correspond to the maximum and
minimum station elevations. The Dz Max. and Min. values are the
minimum and maximum possible values which can be entered in the dz
field. All four of these values are fixed and cannot be edited.
Model Top: Sets the elevation of the upper-most block. If the value is set
equal to the Max. elevation specified in the Topography frame, the
topography will include the actual topography of all stations. If the value
entered for model top is less than the max. topography value, the mesh
will extend upward only to this value, effectively slicing off the top of the
mesh.
dz: Thickness of each of the topography layers. The min. and max.
values are the values listed in the Dz Values frame of this dialog. Note
that a small value will result in more layers and, therefore, additional
processing time.
After entering these values, click Next to display the seventh screen of
the dialog wizard. Here, a display of the mesh is presented from above:

A guide to using WinGLink

18BMT 3D Modeling 19-9

Click Next to proceed to the final wizard screen. Here, you are given the
option of removing any isolated cells:

An isolated cell is any top-level cell which is surrounded on all sides by

air. This cells must be removed in order for the forward calculation to be
completed properly.
Click Finish to complete the mesh creation wizard.

Exporting Meshes
Meshes can be exported from the MT 3D Modeling program to files in
the modified Randy Mackie format. Files exported in this way can be
reimported into WinGLink. In addition to the 3D MT mesh file, two

19-10 18BMT 3D Modeling

A guide to using WinGLink

additional files are also exported. A *.LCK file contains information

about cell locking. This file is used by the stand-alone version of the
forward calculation program. A file prefixed with SITES_ and post fixed
with .DAT contains the mesh coordinates of each station, i.e. cell number
and row number. This last file is currently used only for test purposes.
To export a 3D MT mesh, select the Tools | Export 3D Mesh Model
command to open the 3D Model Mesh Export window. Specify a file
name and click the Save button.

The Mesh Navigator

After selecting a 3D mesh, the Mesh Navigator opens in its minimized
state, as shown below. The Mesh Navigator is used to extract and display
planes from the mesh along any of the principle axes. These planes are
referred to as Views within WinGLink.

Once one or more views have been created, the MT 3D Modeling

programs suite of mesh editing functions are enabled. For details on
mesh editing, please refer to the Editing meshes section of this chapter.
As mentioned above, the Mesh Navigator is initially displayed in its
minimized state. Click the Maximize button to include a 3D display of
the mesh in the Mesh Navigator:

A guide to using WinGLink

18BMT 3D Modeling 19-11

The Mesh Navigator serves to extract sectional views of meshes. The red
slice displayed in the mesh corresponds to the currently selected plane. A
specific plane can be selected for a given axial view by entering the
appropriate value in the Plane Number field. Alternatively, the arrow
buttons can be used to cycle through the planes along a given axis,
whereby the double arrows (<< >>) position the selected plane at the
respective outer mesh edge. The slider bar located at the base of the
Selected Plane section of the window, which includes the width/height of
the current plane, functions in a manner similar to the arrow bars with the
added feature that the arrow buttons on the keyboard can be used to cycle
through the layers. If the Immediate Update checkbox is selected, the
view is updated immediately following a plane change. If this checkbox
is not selected, the Update View button must be clicked to initiate the
update.
As an alternative to the arrow buttons on the Mesh navigator, Next
Plane and Previous Plane buttons located on the toolbar can be used to
display each of the planes along a given axis:
Mesh views may also include topography. To include the elevation data,
select the Warped Sections checkbox. The section views created when
this checkbox is selected are warped to fit the mesh to the topography.
To extract a planar view from a mesh:

19-12 18BMT 3D Modeling

A guide to using WinGLink

1. Planar views can be extracted for the selected plane by clicking

the Create View button:

2. Multiple views can be opened along any axis by pressing the

Create View button multiple times. You may also change the
mesh displayed in a given view window by first selecting the
window to be updated, selecting a new plane in the Mesh
Navigator, then clicking the Update View button.
It is possible to zoom in on a particular area of the mesh displayed in the
Mesh Navigator by repeatedly clicking the area of interest on the mesh.
Click the Reset View button in the Mesh View area of the Mesh
Navigator to restore the mesh to its original size.
The compass displayed in the upper right corner of the view windows
serves to provide a frame of reference for better user orientation. In the
view window shown above, the mesh has been rotated +40 degrees as is
indicated by the fine, red arrow. The compass display can be toggled on
and off with the compass button on the toolbar:

Once closed, the Mesh Navigator can be reopened by selecting the Mesh
Navigator button from the 3D Modeling toolbar:

About Views
As mentioned above, views are planes extracted along one of the three
principle axes. As is described in the Editing Meshes section of this
chapter, editing operations on the mesh can be performed in these views,
i.e. rows and columns can be added and deleted and resistivity values
modified.
The MT 3D Modeling program provides several display options for view
windows. These options, which are accessible via the toolbar and/or the
menu bar or shortcut menu, are described below.

A guide to using WinGLink

18BMT 3D Modeling 19-13

A miniature version of the 3D mesh, called the Navigator Preview icon,

is displayed in the toolbar and helps in mentally visualizing the relative
location of the active view in the mesh:
Button operations only apply to the currently active view window. A
given button operation remains associated with a view window, even
when simultaneously working with multiple windows, i.e. selecting the
Split Row button in one view window does not enable the Split Row
button for all other open view windows.
The vertical axis may be displayed with either a linear or logarithmic
depth scale. To switch between the two scales for either x or y plane view
windows, right click on the view window to open the shortcut menu and
select the desired depth scale:

Show Rho Values

Use this button to open and close the Select Rho Value window, which is
similar to the range window found in the other WinGLink modules. This
window is used when editing to select the active resistivity value. The
active resistivity range is indicated in the Select Rho Value window by an
arrow in the left-hand column. A range may be selected by either clicking
a line in the Select Rho Value window or by entering a value in the
Value field. Note that when selecting a value with the mouse, the lower
range value is used as the active resistivity value when editing. The
number of decimals shown in the display can be set in the Decimals field
at the top of the window:

The Rho Values window can also be toggled on and off using the View |
Show Rho Values menu command.

Select View

19-14 18BMT 3D Modeling

A guide to using WinGLink

Use the Select View button to open the View Area window, which is
used to define the bounding rectangle of the mesh displayed in the view:

Changes made to the bounding rectangle in this window are reflected

immediately in the Preview area. To fit the entire mesh within the
window, click the Apply button next to the Fit To All Mesh label in the
AutoRange area of the window .

Fit Mesh
The Fit Mesh button serves the same function as the Apply button in the
View Area window: Click the button to fit the entire mesh to the active
window.
The fit mesh function, as well as many of the functions described in this
section, can also be accessed via the shortcut menu, which can be opened
by right-clicking a View Area window:

Hide Mesh Lines

Hide Fill Colors

Zoom In/Out

A guide to using WinGLink

18BMT 3D Modeling 19-15

When the Magnifying Glass button is selected, the degree of zooming

can be controlled by clicking the left and right mouse buttons: left click
to zoom in, right click to zoom out.

User Zoom
When the Crosshair button is selected, use the mouse to select an area of
the view window. This selected area is then magnified to fill the entire
window.

Numerical Zoom
To exit the User Zoom mode, click the Magnifying Glass button. Click
this button again to exit Zoom In/Out mode. You can now select
predefined numerical zoom values from the dropdown list. Selecting the
User Zoom option disables the numerical zoom function and
automatically selects the Crosshair button.
All Zoom functions can also be selected using the View | Zoom View
menu command.

Pan View
Use the Pan View button to move the area of the mesh which is
displayed in the active View window. While in this mode, the cursor is
displayed as a hand. The cursor returns to an arrow after the mouse has
been used to shift the mesh position once, another toolbar button has been
clicked, or another shortcut menu command selected.

Editing Meshes
Mesh editing can be performed in the MT 3D Modeling program
provided one or more views are open. For details on creating views,
please refer to the Mesh Navigator section of this chapter.
Certain edit operations affect the entire mesh. For example, if a row is
added in the X plane, the Y plane, if displayed, is automatically updated
to reflect the addition. Other operations, such as edits to the resistivity
values, affect only the current view.
In MT 3D Modeling, edit operations are initiated by clicking the edit
buttons and shortcut menu commands described below. Note that most
edit functions do not have a corresponding command in the main menu.

Undo/Redo
The Undo button, the arrow button at the far left, remains disabled until
an edit operation is performed. Once enabled, it can be used to stepwise
reverse all actions performed with any of the edit functions. For example,
if the Set Value function was used to change the resistivity values of five
cells, then columns were deleted, the Undo button can be used to undo
each of changes.

19-16 18BMT 3D Modeling

A guide to using WinGLink

The Redo button, located to the right of the Undo button, remains
disabled until the Undo button has been used at least once. It can be
actuated to reverse the effect of the Undo function. Thus, it can only be
actuated as many times as was the Undo button.
The Undo and Redo functions can also be executed with the commands
available on the Edit menu.

Move
The Move button is used to reposition the mesh relative to the real world
coordinates. Because this function operates on the horizontal plane, the
button is enabled only when a Z-plane is the active view window. To
move the mesh, click the button; the cursor changes to a cross hair with a
diagonal red arrow. Click the mouse anywhere in the mesh area and drag
the mesh to the desired location:

Deactivate the move function by again clicking the Move button. The
new mesh coordinates are reflected in the mesh properties window (File |
3D Mesh Properties) as well as any open Z-plane view window.

Rotate
Like the Move button, the Rotate button is use to reposition the mesh
relative to the rear world coordinates. Here, however, the mesh is rotated
around the pivot point of the mesh, the rear, left corner in the Z-plane. To
rotate the mesh, click the button; the cursor changes to a cross hair
surrounded by a circular arrow. Click the mouse anywhere in the mesh
area and drag the mesh around the pivot point to the desired rotation
angle:

A guide to using WinGLink

18BMT 3D Modeling 19-17

Deactivate the move function by again clicking the Rotate button. The
angle of rotation is reflected by the compass symbol, if activated, in the
upper right corner of the view windows, in the mesh properties window
as well as any open view window.

Flag
Using the flag option, rows or columns in any plane can be marked for
easy reference. Once a flag has been set, a marker appears in all view
windows which contain the given row or column
To use, click the Flag button and select from either of the two displayed
options:

Then click the mouse on the row or column to set the flag:

Flags can be toggled on and off by successively clicking the respective

row or column.
Whereas the Flag button in the toolbar can be used to mark rows or
columns in all view windows containing the selected rows or columns,
the Add/Remove Mark command, accessed in the shortcut menu (rightclick), serves the same function as the toolbar button.

Compass
As mentioned earlier in this chapter, the compass displayed in the upper
right corner of the view windows serves to provide a frame of reference
for better user orientation. In the view window shown above, the mesh
has been rotated +40 degrees as is indicated by the fine, red arrow.

Lock/Unlock
The Lock button is used to lock and unlock resistivity values. Note,
however, that the locked/unlocked status of cells is not used during the
forward calculation performed within WinGLink. Locked cells are used
only by the standalone version of the forward code.
Users of the standalone version of Randy Mackies 3D forward code can
make use of this feature by locking cells as described below, then
exporting the 3D mesh model to an external file. The export function
actually exports three files: a file which contains the mesh model (*.out)
a file which contains the lock state of each cell (*.lck) and a third file
(sites_*.dat), currently used only for test purposes, which contains the

19-18 18BMT 3D Modeling

A guide to using WinGLink

names of the stations located on the mesh. To export the mesh model and
lock file, select the Tools | Export 3D Mesh Model command.
The resistivity values of locked cells remain fixed during the forward
calculation only when using the standalone version of the code.
Locked cells are displayed in the view windows with a dotted grid. To
lock/unlock cells, click the Lock button to enter locking/unlocking mode.
Immediately after clicking the button into the down state, a shortcut
menu appears with two menu commands: Lock and Unlock. Click the
appropriate command. The four buttons to the right of the Lock button,
which are described below, can now be used to lock/unlock individual
cells, rows, columns and regions on the mesh.
Note that the locking/unlocking functions apply only to the current view
in the active view window. You cannot, therefore, lock all cells in a given
column by, for example, locking a cell in the top Z plane.

Cut on Topography
The Cut on Topography function is used to set the resistivity of cells
positioned above the topography to the fixed resistivity value for air.

Set Value
To set the resistivity values of individual cells, select the Arrow button.
Cells clicked while the Arrow button is down are assigned the resistivity
value active in the Rho Value window. Similarly, if locking/unlocking is
enabled (Lock button down), use the Arrow button to lock cell values.
Mesh ranges can be edited as elsewhere in WinGLink by using the Range
Editor, which can be opened by selecting the Edit Ranges command on
the Range menu. Refer to the Common Functions chapter of this manual
for details.

Row/Column Selection
Click the Row/Column button to open a shortcut menu which lists
several selection options. As long as the button is in the selected state,
cell locking/unlocking or setting of resistivities is performed by row or
column.

Wide Selection
The Wide Selection button is used to lock/unlock cells or set resistivities
for all cells to the left, right or below the selection point on the view
window. The behavior of the Wide Selection button is dependent on the
menu option selected from the shortcut menu which appears when the
button is clicked.

Band Selection

A guide to using WinGLink

18BMT 3D Modeling 19-19

The band selection locks/unlocks cells or sets cell resistivities for a

region of the mesh defined by a rectangle created by clicking and
dragging the mouse across the view window.

Split Row/Column
Click the Split button to open a shortcut menu which lists options for
rows and columns. After making the appropriate selection, move the
mouse over the active view window. Position the mouse pointer, which is
now displayed as a pair of scissors with a miniature crosshair, at the point
where the row or column to be split and click. After clicking, the row or
column is split in two at the crosshair. Both halves retain the resistivity
values of the original row or column.

Delete Row/Column
As with the Split button, after clicking the Delete button, a shortcut menu
opens which lists options for rows and columns. Make the appropriate
selection and position the mouse over the active window. Place the
mouse pointer, which is now displayed as a box with a red cross and a
miniature crosshair, on the row or column to be deleted. The row or
column under the crosshair is deleted after clicking the mouse.
When deleting rows, the row directly under the deleted row is extended
upward. When deleting columns, the column to the immediate right of
the deleted column is extended towards the left. The exception to these
rules are the deletion of the bottom row or right-most column. In these
cases the row above the bottom row is extended downward or the column
to the left of the right-most row is extended rightward.

Redim Row/Column
Row and column dimensions can be modified by clicking the Redim
button. As with the Split and Delete buttons, a shortcut menu opens
which lists row and column options. After selecting an option, position
the mouse over the active view window. The mouse pointer changes to
either a horizontal or vertical double-ended arrow when positioned on a
mesh line. By redimensioning the right-most column and bottom-most
row in a view window, it is possible to resize the mesh.

Value shifting
The mesh values displayed in a given view window can be shifted to
either the left or right using the horizontal shift buttons at the right end of
the toolbar. The Shift Left and Shift Right buttons, located at either side
of the Shift Values (horizontal) button with the double arrows, move all
cells by one column to the left or right, respectively. When shifting to the
left, the far-right column retains its values. Likewise, when shifting to the
right, the far-left column remains unchanged. The Shift Up and Shift
down buttons on either side of the Shift Values (vertical) button at the far
end of the toolbar can be used to shift values up and down, respectively.

19-20 18BMT 3D Modeling

A guide to using WinGLink

The horizontal and vertical Shift Values buttons can be used to shift the
mesh by any number of columns to either the left or right / up or down:

The Shift Values windows can also be accessed on the shortcut menu by
right-clicking and positioning the mouse over the Value Editing option.
Note that values are shifted only on the selected plane. To shift
resistivity values for all planes, the operation must be repeated
throughout the model.

Value Editing
The Copy Rho Values and Copy Lock Values commands can be used to
copy all rho or lock values from one view window to another view of the
same plane, to a range of planes or for the entire model. These commands
are accessed on the View Window shortcut menu, which is opened by
right-clicking a view window, then positioning the mouse over the
Value Editing command:

To copy either rho or lock values from one view window to another,
select the respective command, open a new view window of the same
type, i.e. X, Y or Z plane, then select the Paste Values command from
the shortcut menu in the target window. The copied rho or locked values
can be copied to all like-type planes in the model by selecting the Fill
Model with Values command. Use the Bounded Filling command to
specify a range of planes over which the fill command is to apply:

A guide to using WinGLink

18BMT 3D Modeling 19-21

View Area Editing

The view area displayed in one view window can be copied to another
with the View Area Editing commands. Resistivity and lock values are
not copied when using this command, rather the actual mesh view area is
copied from one view to another of the same type.
The Copy View Area command can be accessed on the View Window
shortcut menu by positioning the mouse over the View Area Editing
command to open a submenu. To copy the view area from one window to
another, select the Copy View Area command in one window, then
select the Paste View Area command from the shortcut menu in the
target window.

Anchor Function
The anchor button, which is enabled for Z-plane and map views, is used
to control how the mesh position is recalculated when deleting rows and
columns. If, for example, an anchor is placed on a column with index i
and the you use the Destroy Column function to delete a column with an
index > i, the locations of the columns with an index < i remain fixed.
Thus, this tool gives the user control in how columns and rows are
deleted. Note that this function is not available for the X- and Y-planes.

Editing Meshes: Differences Between the MT 2D

Inversion and MT 3D Modeling Programs
The edit functions in the MT 3D Modeling program are similar, however
not identical, to those available in WinGLinks 2D Inversion program.
The principle difference is the way in which rows and columns are added
and deleted.
Adding rows/columns:
In the 2D Inversion program, rows and columns are actually added. New
rows and columns are assigned the resistivity value currently selected in
the Rho window. In MT 3D Modeling, on the other hand, rows and
columns are not added, but rather split. A given row or column is divided
into two: both halves retain the resistivity value(s) of the original
row/column.
Deleting rows/columns:
To delete a column in MT 2D Inversion, you must click the line which defines a
given row or column. In MT 3D Modeling, you instead position the crosshair on
the row or column which is to be deleted.
Destroying rows/columns
Unlike the Delete rows/columns function, which effectively merges two adjacent
rows or columns, the Destroy functions actually remove the selected row or
column from the mesh. Thus, execution of the Destroy commands, results in a
change in the mesh dimensions. To execute the commands, press the Row /
Column Destroy button (10th button from right in the toolbar) and then select
appropriate function (Row or Column):

19-22 18BMT 3D Modeling

A guide to using WinGLink

Additional edit functions: the Edit menu

A number of additional edit functions can be accessed via the Edit menu:

Replace Values
Use Replace Values to swap all cells with a given resistivity value with a
specified resistivity value:

The number of replaced resistivity values is displayed in the Replaced

field.

Replace Range
This function is similar to the Replace Values function, the difference
being that min. and max. values are specified. Resistivity values between
and including these two limits values are replaced by the specified
replacement value:

A guide to using WinGLink

18BMT 3D Modeling 19-23

Note that the min. value cannot be less than and the max. value cannot be
greater than the respective min. and max. resistivity values in the model.
These values are displayed to the right of the Min. and Max. fields in
parenthesis.

Remove Isolated Cells

In order for the forward modeling code to function properly, there must
not be any isolated mesh cells, i.e. cells without neighbors, which
protrude from the top of the mesh. These can occur during the creation of
relatively coarse meshes when using topography. To remove all such
cells from the model, select the Remove Isolated Cells command.

Show Air Check

This function runs a check to ensure that there are no air cells located
below the model topography.

Show Station Check

After running a forward calculation, it is possible to generate an EDI file which
contains the forward response at a given cell. While it is possible to position more
than one station on a given cell, the EDI files generated for all stations on a
particular cell will be identical. To ensure that there is not more than one station
on any cell, execute the Station Check command:

All cells which contain multiple stations are listed. Either individual stations or
all stations on a given cell can be deactivated.
Exported site files can be read into the MT 3D Modeling program via the Run
Site File button. By working with various site files, it is possible to quickly
change the stations which are used with a given forward calculation.

19-24 18BMT 3D Modeling

A guide to using WinGLink

Station states can be exported to so-called site files with the Tools -> Export Site
File menu command.

Station Decimator
This function gives you the option of extracting a subset of soundings
from all available soundings. Use the X and Y direction fields to specify
the decimation factor along the respective axes. Every nth sounding is
extracted according to the values specified here:

Show Station Status Editor

Unlike the Station Check window, which can be used to edit stations in cells
which contain multiple stations, the Station Status editor can be used to edit the
states of all stations:

Station states can be exported to so-called site files with the Tools -> Export Site
File menu command and reimported into WinGLink in the Station Check window
as described under Station Check.

Remove Air Layers

Use the Edit | Remove Air Layers command to remove all planes which contain
only air.

A guide to using WinGLink

18BMT 3D Modeling 19-25

Remove Isolated Values

The Edit | Remove Isolated Values command is used to remove cells with
isolate values (with respect to the surrounding cell values).

Station Data Options

1D models for MT stations as well as layered/numerical data may be
superimposed on vertical sections, i.e. X and Y views.

To Display 1D Models for MT stations

1. In order to display 1D models, first open the Project Window
(View | Show Project Window) and check the S checkbox
of any projects for which the 1D models are to be displayed. To
display station names and resistivity values, check the N and
V checkboxes, respectively:

2. Display the 1D models by selecting the Show 1D Layer Data

command from the View | Station Data Options menu
extension:

When the Show 1D Layer Data option is enabled, the 1D

model of any MT station for which a model has been created is
superimposed on the 3D mesh, provided the station is located in
the current view window:

3. To toggle between the colored resistivity values in the 1D

models and a vertical line with simple tic marks which indicate

19-26 18BMT 3D Modeling

A guide to using WinGLink

changes in resistivity value, select the Change 1D Layer Style

option from the Station Data Options menu extension.

To Display Wells, Layered Data and Numerical Data

1. As with 1D models, in order to view the well data, the S
checkbox in the Project Window (View | Show Project
Window) must first be selected for the project which contains
the well data. Well traces can be toggled on and off by
selecting/unselecting the S checkbox; well station names and
values can be toggled on and off with the N and V
checkboxes, respectively.
2. Next, make the appropriate selection from the View | Station
Data Options menu extension. After selecting either Show
Well Layer Data Window or Show Well Numerical Data
Window, the respective data window opens which lists the
available data types:

The selection is immediately reflected in the view window.

To Export Data in txrx Format

Stations can be exported in the Randy Mackie txrx format: by executing
the Tools | Export rx and tx files menu command:

Additional Display Functions

Several other display functions are available under the View menu item
in addition to those listed above:

Select Interface Grid

The View | Select Interface Grid menu command is used to
superimpose a profile extracted from a selected elevation grids. Upon
selection of the menu command, the following dialog box opens:

A guide to using WinGLink

18BMT 3D Modeling 19-27

Here, you can the projects from which the elevation grid is to be
extracted as well as the color with which the extracted elevation profile is
to be displayed on the mesh. Extracted profiles are displayed only on
vertical sections.

Mesh Properties
Mesh properties, including name, position and number of air layers can
be edited in the Mesh Properties window. To open this window, select
the File | 3D Model Mesh Properties command:

Description: Mesh name

Mesh position (x,y,z): Coordinates on the project datum
Rotation: Positive degrees of counterclockwise rotation about the top
left, rear column

19-28 18BMT 3D Modeling

A guide to using WinGLink

Air layers: Number of air layers on top of the mesh (minimum: 7, ideal:
10)
lx, ly, lz: Actual mesh dimensions
Notes: Any information you would like stored together with the database

Swap Mesh Function

With the Swap Mesh function, which is located on the File menu, you
can change the corner which is used as the pivot point for the model i.e.
change which corner be used as the upper left corner of the model. When
applied to a mesh, a copy of the mesh is translated in such a way that the
area covered by the final mesh is the same as that covered by the original
mesh.

To Swap a Mesh:
1. Select the Swap Mesh function on the File menu. If a mesh is
currently open, the program prompts you to close the mesh.
2. In the Mesh Swapping window which opens, select the mesh to
which the Swap Mesh function is to be applied:

3. With the mouse, click the corner which is to be defined as the

new pivot point. When selected, a red square appears on the
corner:

4. After selecting the new pivot point, enter a new mesh name in
the Description field.
5. To translate the mesh to the new pivot point, click the OK
button. A progress window appears in the status bar of the main
window. Once the translation process has completed, the Mesh
Swapping window closes.

A guide to using WinGLink

18BMT 3D Modeling 19-29

6. The translated mesh covers the exact same area as the original.
The only difference is the position of the pivot point. This is
indicated by the a corresponding change to the compass
direction. Any rotation operations now performed on the mesh
now rotate around the new pivot point.

Printing Mesh Views

The MT 3D Modeling print form is called up with the File | Print
command:

Individual or ranges of mesh planes can be printed. In addition to the

meshes themselves, legends, text boxes and other relevant information
can also be printed.
Before printing, specify the planes to be printed as well as the area of the
mesh to be printed. The view area to be printed can be set either manually
in the Set View Area section of the window, or using the Fit All, User
Zoom and Pan View buttons located in the lower-right corner of the
window. If desired, horizontal and vertical scaling factors may be set in
the Scale Factors section of the window.
Mesh lines and fill colors are printed by default. To disable these, or
enable mesh warping, make the appropriate selections in the Drawing
Options section at the bottom of the window.
On the Page Layout tab of the Print Form window, you can select and
position various display elements including, among others, mesh, color
ranges and text descriptions. The number of units printed on each page
can also be selected here.
Even though up to four meshes can be printed per page, you can quickly
generate more printouts than intended if the planes to be printed are not
selected correctly on the 3D Model tab of the dialog box.

19-30 18BMT 3D Modeling

A guide to using WinGLink

Forward Model Calculation

Overview
The forward model calculation performed in the MT 3D Modeling
program makes use of the MT3FWD code written by Randy Mackie:
Developed in 1999, MT3FWD is a program to compute magnetic and electric fields at the
surface of a 3D electrical resistivity model illuminated by electromagnetic plane waves. It
is a modified version of D3MTFWD2 released by Mackie and Madden in 1997. The MT
3D modeling algorithm uses the integral form of Maxwells equations to derive a finite
difference approximation for the magnetic field that is second order. Non-divergence of
the magnetic field is enforced by evaluating the magnetic and electric fields on grids that
are staggered relative to one another. The resulting linear system is solved by preconditioned conjugate gradient relaxation. Convergence is considerably enhanced by
explicit correction of residual failure of the non-divergence condition. The algorithm is
discussed in Mackie, Smith & Madden* (1994). However, the program does not employ
the coordinate transformation that converts an isotropic model on a non-uniform grid to
an anisotropic model on a uniform grid.
The program assumes that 2D structure parallel to each edge continues uniformly to
infinity in the direction normal to the edge. The tangential magnetic fields are assigned
using 2D calculations for each edge. The edges parallel to the source magnetic field will
have electric current flowing normal to them and so TE mode calculations are done. The
edges perpendicular to the source magnetic field will have current flowing parallel to
them. In these cases, the tangential magnetic fields are zero.
Relaxation is faster if a good estimate of the solution is provided at the start. The program
interpolates the vertical boundary fields to form the initial guess in such a way that the
fields should already be a solution to the interior fields if the model is 2D rather than 3D.
*[Mackie, R.L., Smith, J.T. and Madden, T.R., Three-dimensional electromagnetic
modeling using finite difference equations: the magnetotelluric example. Radio Science,
29, 923-935, 1994.]

Forward Calculation
Required for input is a 3D MT mesh in the slightly modified Randy
Mackie defined at the end of this chapter. All 3D MT meshes which are
imported into or created in WinGLink fulfill this requirement.
To set the parameters for the forward calculation for the loaded 3D MT
mesh, select the Tools | Forward 3D Model Mesh menu command. The
3D Forward Process dialog box opens:

A guide to using WinGLink

18BMT 3D Modeling 19-31

3D Forward Parameters
Min. Error: Error level at which the forward calculation is stopped.
(1E-4 - 1E-6 recommended)
Relaxations: 50-100 recommended
Air layers: Min. 7, 10 recommended
Convergence factor: Provides control over the speed at which
conversion is reached. A higher value, e.g. 8, *may* reduce the number
of iterations required for convergence at the expense of requiring
additional memory.
Periods:
Min Period: Specifies upper bound of frequency range over which
fitting is tried
#Decades: Number of decades to be used. Maximum period used is thus
equal to the minimum period *10^number of decades
#Periods per Decade: Number of periods per decade
1D Basal Model:

19-32 18BMT 3D Modeling

A guide to using WinGLink

The 1D basal model is used to set the bottom impedance condition that
relates the E and H fields at the bottom of the model. It can be a
homogeneous half-space model or a layered 1D model.
Thickness: Layer thickness in meters
Resistivity: Layer resistivity in ohm.m

Save Output
The forward calculation returns field values which are then transformed
into MT impedances for the purpose of generating EDI files. The field
values are automatically stored in the database when the mesh is saved.
The values may also be written to an external file.
Save to File: Saves the field values to an external file (*.rslt). When
saving to a file, click the browse button to specify the name and path of
the file to which the fields are to be written. Files stored using this option
can be opened in the EDI Export window and used to export EDI files for
any MT station located on the mesh.

Time Requirements
The time required to perform the forward calculation varies dramatically
(approximately cubically) depending on the mesh size. During testing, a
forward calculation performed on a sample 20x20x20 mesh using 1
decade and 3 periods on a 1.4GHz, 512MB RAM computer required 2
minutes. A 35x35x35 mesh, on the other hand, required nearly 20
minutes. A progress bar and message box in the 3D Forward Process
window provides information on the status of the calculation.

Starting the Forward Calculation

To start the forward calculation, click the Start button in the 3D Forward
Process window. If the Save to File checkbox is selected, the Start
button is not enabled until a file has been selected using the Browse
button.
The error of each iteration is displayed in the text box in the lower area of
the 3D Response window.
The Stop button can be used to terminate the calculation.

Exporting EDI Files

The MT impedance and tipper values calculated from the field values
returned by the forward calculation can be used to generate EDI files.
These impedance and tipper values, located either in memory or in an
external file, can be used, in principle, to generate EDI files for any mesh
column. The EDI export is, however, limited to columns containing at
least one MT station. The EDI files of stations associated with the same
column are identical except for the station names.
Stations can be added and removed, as well as activated and deactivated,
in the Maps program. (Refer to Chapter 4, Maps, for details.) Note that
stations do not need to be active or even exist when calculating the
forward model, i.e. they can be added after performing the forward
calculation.

A guide to using WinGLink

18BMT 3D Modeling 19-33

To export EDI files for stations associated with a mesh:

1. On the Tools menu, select the Export EDI File command.
2. The EDI Export window opens:

3. In the Data Input area of the window, specify the location of the
impedance/tipper values.
If you have performed a forward calculation during the current
MT 3D Modeling session or if a forward calculation has been
performed using the current mesh and the impedance values
were stored in the database, the from Memory option is active
in the Data Input area of the window. If not, only the from File
option is available. External files must be files containing
impedance values generated by the MT 3D Modeling program,
i.e. result files generated by the stand alone version of the 3D
forward program cannot be used.
If the from File option is selected, the EDI export cannot be
started until the file has been specified.
4. Click the Locate button in the Data Input area of the window to
open the Locator window:

Use the X and Y fields to adjust the position of the mesh

relative to the stations. The Rotation field may be used to
change mesh rotation. Changes made here are not permanent

19-34 18BMT 3D Modeling

A guide to using WinGLink

and are thus not reflected in the mesh properties window or

elsewhere in WinGLink.
5. Displayed in left portion of the window is a view of the top
plane of the 3D mesh including all stations contained in the
project. Use the two checkboxes Draw Wired Frame and
Draw Shade, located at the base of the window, to change the
mesh display.
The current position of the mouse pointer on the mesh is
indicated in the X and Y fields at the bottom of the window.
6. Select the Include Attached Project Stations checkbox to
export EDI files for all MT stations positioned on the mesh
which are contained in projects attached to the current project
in addition to those contained in the current project.
For details on attaching one project to another project, please
refer to section Attaching a Project to another Project in
Chapter Getting Started.
7. After specifying a destination folder for the EDI files in the
Output Folder field, click the Start button to begin the export
process. The export status is indicated by a progress bar.

Exporting 3D Grid Files

Not only can 3D MT meshes be output to mesh files which conform to
the Randy Mackie 3D MT mesh specification, but they can also be output
to uniform 3D grid files in either the Slicer format or as Dataset files. To
export a 3D mesh to a uniform 3D grid, select the Tools | Export 3D
Grid File menu command to open the 3D Grid File Export dialog box:

Specify the planes to be included in the file and the spacing to be used in
each of the planes. After specifying the file type and an output file name
in the Output section of the dialog box, click OK to export the file.
Note: 3D Grid files exported using the Export 3D Grid File command
cannot be reimported into WinGLink.

A guide to using WinGLink

18BMT 3D Modeling 19-35

Randy Mackie 3D Mesh Specification

The mesh format is that specified by Randy Mackie plus an additional
data block, located at the end of the file, which contains georeferencing
information.
NX, NY, NZ (#s of blocks) [Nair (layers)], [MAP.
VAL[UES]]
X block sizes (NX values in meters)
Y block sizes (NY values in meters)
Z block sizes (NZ values in meters)
1 (layer #)
NX*NY codes or values in free format: x varies
fastest
--------NZ (layer #)
NX*NY codes or values in free format: x varies
fastest
0. resistivity(for code 1) resistivity(for code
2) ....
resistivity(for largest code) [resistivity for
sea water]
end (optional termination text)
--------WINGLINK
ABC (site name)
I J (block numbers)
0000.000 0000.000 (real world coordinates)
0 (rotation)

19-36 18BMT 3D Modeling

A guide to using WinGLink

20: TDEM Soundings

Overview
The Soundings icon is displayed in the program menu whenever a
sounding project is selected.
When a sounding project (MT, TEM, DC, etc.) is selected and the
program launched, the stations of the selected project are loaded
together with their original datasets.
The discussion in this chapter is limited to the TDEM Soundings
program.
For each station, this program can be used to:

Display sounding curves, either as resistivity or voltage

values vs. time

Edit sounding data

Compute a 1D smooth and layered inversion model

Export data (TEM format)

As described at the end of this chapter, many of the functions available

for individual soundings can also be performed in batch mode on any
number of soundings contained in the current project.

About Editing
The results of any editing on sounding data will be saved in the "edited
data" section of the database. Original data will not be overwritten and
can always be restored using the menu command: File | Reload Original
Data.
The edited data saved by the Soundings program are used by other
WinGLink programs:

A guide to using WinGLink

Smooth and layered 1D models are used to calculate imaged

sections and cross sections, respectively.

Curves and 1D models are also used to extract parameter

maps by the Maps program.

19BTDEM Soundings 20-1

Sounding Data Which are Saved in the Database

For each station of the current project, the following datasets are saved in
a WinGLink database:

Original Data
Apparent resistivity as imported from external files. Original curves can
always be recovered to restart the editing process using the Soundings
menu command File | Reload Originals.

Edited Data
Edited curves are initially constructed by assigning to each datapoint the
same value of the original curves. At the end of each editing session, the
edited values are saved in the database, separately from the original
values.

Smooth 1D Model
One smooth model is saved for each sounding. This provides a
preliminary guess model for the layered inversion routine and is also used
to produce imaged sections along profiles.

Layered 1D Model
One layered model is saved for each sounding. These models are
displayed along profiles by the Cross Sections program. The 1D curve
used to calculate the layered model is the same curve used for the smooth
model.

Opening, Saving and Printing Sounding Data

To Open Soundings from the Station List
1. Select the File | Open from List menu command.
2. Select the station(s) you wish to open:

3. If you want to display only the active stations, select the Active
Station check box.
4. Click the Open button.

20-2 19BTDEM Soundings

A guide to using WinGLink

To Open Soundings on the Station Map

Select the File|Open from Map menu command; a simplified location
map for the project station is displayed:

Open Soundings by Clicking Individual Stations:

1. Click the

button.

2. Click the stations you wish to open; the selected stations turn to
red:

3. Click the

button.

Open All Soundings Within a Given Area:

1. Click the

button.

2. Left-click the mouse on a corner of the area of interest and drag

it to define a rectangle on the map. When releasing the mouse
button, all stations in the rectangle will turn to red.
3. Click the

button.

Open All Soundings Associated with a Profile Trace:

1. Click the

button.

2. Left-click the mouse on the profile or on a segment of the

profile trace of interest. All stations previously added to that
profile trace will turn red, indicating selection.
3. Click the

A guide to using WinGLink

button.

19BTDEM Soundings 20-3

Display Options
Each window can be set to show the resistivity/voltage curves or the 1D
model for each sounding.
On the View menu, select from the available display options:

Setting Diagram Ranges and Scale

To Set the Ranges and Scale for the Plot Diagrams:
1. On the View menu, select View Options:

2. For each parameter, set the automatic range option or enter the
max. and min. values to be plotted. The axis scale can be set to
linear or logarithmic for many plots.
3. The settings made here apply to all window.

Sounding Properties
An overview of the sounding properties can be displayed by selecting the
File | Sounding Properties menu command:

20-4 19BTDEM Soundings

A guide to using WinGLink

With the exception of the Corrective Time Shift field, all fields
displayed here are read only. The Corrective Time Shift field can be
used to enter a corrective time shift, e.g. in the event that the value was
entered incorrectly during data acquisition.

Printing Curves and 1D Models

To Print Station Curves
1. Select the station by clicking on its window;
2. Select the File | Print menu command.
3. Select the printing options and click the Print button.

Exporting TEM-Format Files

To facilitate the exchange of TEM soundings between projects and users,
station soundings can be exported to TEM-format files. The TEM format
is a text-based format specified by Geosystem originally created for the
purpose of simplifying the import of TEM data into WinGLink,
regardless of data type, e.g. Sirotem, Geonics or Zonge.
To export a TEM sounding to a TEM-format file, select the File | Export
command from the Soundings menu.
TEM files, created either using the TemMerge program or exported form
the Soundings module, can be imported into WinGLink as described in
the Data Import chapter of this manual.
Note regarding inconsistencies between input and output TEM files:
Due to data normalization procedures, exported TEM files may not
necessarily be identical to the TEM files used for input. This is
particularly true of Geonics soundings which may contain up to three
curves. In this case, the second and third curves are normalized to the
current, TX area, and RX area of the first curve.
In addition, as not all descriptive information contained in the input TEM
file is stored in the database it is not included in the output TEM file.

A guide to using WinGLink

19BTDEM Soundings 20-5

Editing Sounding Data

The Edited Curve
When sounding data are imported into a WinGLink database, they are
saved as original data in a reserved area of the database and are never
modified unless new data are imported. At the same time, a duplicate
dataset is generated and saved in a different area of the database for use
by editing functions. When an editing session is carried out on the
sounding data, it is carried out on this second dataset, which is referred to
as the edited curve of the sounding.
Saving changes following an editing session means saving an edited
curve. This curve is used by default in calculating 1D inversion models
and pseudosections.

Interactive Sounding Editing Form

TDEM sounding data can be edited in the interactive sounding editing
form, which is opened with the Edit menu command:

The form includes commands for performing various editing functions:

Selecting Data Points

Single point selection
Click to select/unselect for editing single data points on the curve.
Multiple points selection
Click to select/unselect for editing all data points included in a userdefined range: click and drag the mouse to define the area.

Zooming in on the Curve

Zoom in
1. Click a point in the curve diagram and release the button.

20-6 19BTDEM Soundings

A guide to using WinGLink

2. Move the mouse to define the zoom area.

3. Click and release the left mouse button.
Zoom out
Click to reset the previous view.
Note: this button is available only after the Zoom in button has been
used. It remains available until the original curve size is restored.

Saving Editing Changes

Save button
Saves the editing changes. These changes must be confirmed when
closing the station window in the main menu in order to store them in the
database.

Editing Data Points

Masking data
1. Click and select the points by single or multiple selection (the
masked points will turn gray).
2. Click the Mask button again to confirm the changes.
3. The points will be hidden from the display
4. Click the Mask button again to restart the masking/unmasking
process.
Shift data points
1. Click and select the data points to be shifted by single or
multiple selection.
2. Move the data points to the desired positions and click the left
mouse button.
3. Click the Shift button again to confirm the action.
Note: The Shift button is enabled only if the sounding curve is plotted as
voltage vs. time. Use the View button at the bottom of the Edit window
to toggle between resisitivity and voltage views.
Cancel the current action
Undo button
Undo all the editing changes made since the last time the curve was
saved. All editing steps can be undone provided the station has not yet
been saved since editing.

Reloading Original Curves

This action overwrites the edited curves of a station with the original
curves.

A guide to using WinGLink

19BTDEM Soundings 20-7

To reload original curves:

1. Select the station by clicking its window.
2. Select the File |Re-Load Original command.
After reloading, the smoothed curves and the 1D models need to be
recalculated.

1D Inversion
1D Inversion: Overview
The 1D Model command starts the inversion program for the station
whose window is currently active.
The main steps involved in the inversion process are:
Set curves to use
for inversion

The inversion can be run using the edited or

smoothed curve. The curve selection button,
located on the bottom bar, allows the user to
change the selected curve at any time. The
models must be recalculated when the curve
to be used is changed.

Calculate the
smooth inversion
model

For each station, one smooth model is

calculated and stored in the database. This
model will be used to produce imaged
sections for the project.

Guess the layered

inversion model
from the smooth
model

A layered model can be guessed from the

calculated smooth models. The number of
layers is entered by the user by editing the
inversion settings or by editing the model
with interactive graphic commands.

Edit the initial

model using the
graphic model
editor (optional)

An interactive graphic editor allows the

editing of layers thicknesses and resistivities.
The response is displayed in real time.

Run the inversion

and save the model

The inversion process can be run with a

given number of iterations and predefined
RMS fitting degree. Resistivity and/or
thickness values of one or more layers can
be kept fixed.

The 1D Inversion Window

The following figure shows the 1D inversion window:

20-8 19BTDEM Soundings

A guide to using WinGLink

Curve Selection
1. Use the 1D Model command to enter the inversion mode for
the active sounding.
button, located at the bottom of the form, to
2. Use the
display the apparent resistivity or voltage curve.

To Calculate Smooth Models

1. Use the 1D Model command to enter inversion mode for the
active sounding.
2. Use the

button to compute a smooth model:

To Guess the Layered Model from the Smooth Model:

1. Use the 1D Model command to enter the inversion mode for
the active sounding.
2. Calculate the smooth model (magenta lines), if you have not
already done so.
3. Click the

A guide to using WinGLink

button.

19BTDEM Soundings 20-9

4. The layered model is guessed (green lines).

To Import a Model Created for a Different Station

1. In 1D Modeling mode, click the Edit button to open the 1D
Model Parameters dialog:

2. Here, click the Import button to open a dialog box which

contains all available stations:

.
3. Select the desired station and click Import. Note that any
changes to the imported model are not reflected in the original
model.

To Run the Layered Inversion:

1. Use the 1D Model command to enter the inversion mode for
the active sounding.
2. Click the

button.

3. The inversion is started using the model shown with green lines
as the starting model and the inversion parameters set for the
sounding.

20-10 19BTDEM Soundings

A guide to using WinGLink

Graphic Editor for 1D Layered Models

The layered model can be edited graphically using drag-and-drop
operations.
The resulting resistivity curve is updated in real-time, allowing you to
compare the fit with the observed curve.

To Graphically Change the Resistivity of a Layer:

1. Click the vertical line which denotes the layers resistivity. Two
black dots appear on its edges indicating that this line can be
moved:

2. Release the mouse.

3. Move the mouse pointer to the selected line; the arrow pointer
changes to a double-headed arrow.
4. Left click and hold down the button; drag the line to the new
layer resistivity delimiter position.
5. Release the mouse button. The resistivity curve coming from
the layered model is recalculated and redrawn.

To Graphically Change a Layers Thickness

1. Repeat the procedure used to change a layers resistivity, but
instead select one of the horizontal lines which delimits the
layer and move it to the desired position.

Batch Commands & Quick View

Running Operations in Batch Mode
A group of batch procedures are available for performing selected
operations on a set of user-selected stations. To start a batch procedure:
1. Close all open stations.
2. The Batch Tools command will appear on the main menu:

3. Select the desired operation.

A guide to using WinGLink

19BTDEM Soundings 20-11

4. Enter the parameters as requested.

Operations available in batch mode include:

Printing

1D inversion modeling

Data export; batch window includes the 1D model worksheet

function.

Quick View
The Quick View option, which is available on the Special menu item
when no soundings windows are open, can be used to display multiple
soundings in a single window. To open the Quick View window, select
the Special | Quick View menu command:

The Stations Map window, which can be toggled on and off with the
corresponding check box in the upper right corner of the window,
indicates the positions of the stations which are currently open (black
squares) as well as the position of the active station (red square).

20-12 19BTDEM Soundings

A guide to using WinGLink

21: DC Soundings

Overview
The Soundings icon is displayed in the program menu whenever a
sounding project is selected.
When a sounding project (MT, TEM, DC, etc.) is selected and the
program launched, the stations of the selected project are loaded
together with their original datasets.
The discussion in this chapter is limited to the DC Soundings program.
For each station, this program can be used to:

Display sounding curves as resistivity vs. AB/2

Edit sounding data

Compute a 1D smooth and layered inversion model

Import sounding data

As described at the end of this chapter, many of the functions available

for individual soundings can also be performed in batch mode on any
number of soundings contained in the current project.

About Editing
The results of any editing on sounding data will be saved in the "edited
data" section of the database. Original data will not be overwritten and
can always be restored using the menu command: File | Reload Original
Data.
The edited data saved by the Soundings program are used by other
WinGLink programs:

A guide to using WinGLink

Smooth and layered 1D models are used to calculate imaged

sections and cross sections, respectively.

Curves and 1D models are also used to extract parameter

maps by the Maps program.

20BDC Soundings 21-1

Sounding Data Which are Saved in the Database

For each station of the current project, the following datasets are saved in
a WinGLink database:

Original Data
Apparent resistivity as imported from external files. Original curves can
always be recovered to restart the editing process using the Soundings
menu command File | Reload Originals.

Edited Data
Edited curves are initially constructed by assigning to each datapoint the
same value of the original curves. At the end of each editing session, the
edited values are saved in the database, separately from the original
values.

Smooth 1D Model
One smooth model is saved for each sounding. This provides a
preliminary guess model for the layered inversion routine and is also used
to produce imaged sections along profiles.

Layered 1D Model
One layered model is saved for each sounding. These models are
displayed along profiles by the Cross Sections program. The 1D curve
used to calculate the layered model is the same curve used for the smooth
model.

Opening, Saving and Printing Sounding Data

To Open Soundings from the Station List
1. Select the File | Open from List menu command.
2. Select the station(s) you wish to open:

21-2 20BDC Soundings

A guide to using WinGLink

3. If you want to display only the active stations, select the Active
Only check box.
4. Click the Open button.

To Open Soundings on the Station Map

Select the File|Open from Map menu command; a simplified location
map for the project station is displayed:

Open Soundings by Clicking Individual Stations:

1. Click the

button.

2. Click the stations you wish to open; the selected stations turn to
red:

3. Click the

button.

Open All Soundings Within a Given Area:

1. Click the

button.

2. Left-click the mouse on a corner of the area of interest and drag

it to define a rectangle on the map. When releasing the mouse
button, all stations in the rectangle will turn to red.
3. Click the

button.

Open All Soundings Associated with a Profile Trace:

1. Click the

button.

2. Left-click the mouse on the profile or on a segment of the

profile trace of interest. All stations previously added to that
profile trace will turn red, indicating selection.

A guide to using WinGLink

20BDC Soundings 21-3

3. Click the

button.

Display Options
Each window can be set to show the resistivity/voltage curves or the 1D
model for each sounding.
On the View menu, select from the available display options:

Setting Diagram Ranges and Scale

To Set the Ranges and Scale for the Plot Diagrams:
1. On the View menu, select View Options:

2. For each parameter, set the automatic range option or enter the
max. and min. values to be plotted. The axis scale can be set to
linear or logarithmic for many plots.
3. The settings made here apply to all window.

Printing Curves and 1D Models

To Print Station Curves
1. Select the station by clicking on its window;
2. Select the File | Print menu command.
3. Select the printing options and click the Print button.

21-4 20BDC Soundings

A guide to using WinGLink

Importing Sounding Data

In general, sounding data are imported into WinGLink using the import
functionality provided in the WinGLink shell (see the Data Import
chapter of this manual for details).The DC Soundings module includes an
option, however, for importing new data into an existing sounding.
Import functions are available for:
-

Text files

Keyboard entry

Note: This function cannot be used to import new stations into the
current project.

To Import Datasets from Text Files:

1. Open the sounding into which the data are to be imported
2. Select the File | Import new data | From Text Filemenu
command
3. Follow the instructions given by the Import Wizard (refer to the
Data Import chapter of this manual for details.)
Note: Any previously saved sounding data are lost when new data are
imported.

To Enter Data From the Keyboard:

1. Open the sounding into which the data are to be imported
2. Select the File | Import new data | From Keyboardmenu
command
3. The program alerts you that any existing data will be lost.
4. In the Data Import window, enter the data in the appropriate
columns:|

A guide to using WinGLink

20BDC Soundings 21-5

When finished, use the File | Save menu command to store the
data in the database

Editing Sounding Data

The Edited Curve
When sounding data are imported into a WinGLink database, they are
saved as original data in a reserved area of the database and are never
modified unless new data are imported. At the same time, a duplicate
dataset is generated and saved in a different area of the database for use
by editing functions. When an editing session is carried out on the
sounding data, it is carried out on this second dataset, which is referred to
as the edited curve of the sounding.
Saving changes following an editing session means saving an edited
curve. This curve is used by default in calculating 1D inversion models
and pseudosections.

Interactive Sounding Editing Form

DC sounding data can be edited in the interactive sounding editing form,
which is opened with the Edit menu command:

21-6 20BDC Soundings

A guide to using WinGLink

The form includes commands for performing various editing functions:

Selecting Data Points

Single point selection
Click to select/unselect for editing single data points on the curve.
Multiple points selection
Click to select/unselect for editing all data points included in a userdefined range: click and drag the mouse to define the area.

Zooming in on the Curve

Zoom in
1. Click a point in the curve diagram and release the button.
2. Move the mouse to define the zoom area.
3. Click and release the left mouse button.
Zoom out
Click to reset the previous view.
Note: this button is available only after the Zoom in button has been
used. It remains available until the original curve size is restored.

Saving Editing Changes

Save button
Saves the editing changes. These changes must be confirmed when
closing the station window in the main menu in order to store them in the
database.

A guide to using WinGLink

20BDC Soundings 21-7

Editing Data Points

Masking data
1. Click and select the points by single or multiple selection (the
masked points will turn gray).
2. Click the Mask button again to confirm the changes.
3. The points will be hidden from the display
4. Click the Mask button again to restart the masking/unmasking
process.
Shift data points
1. Click and select the data points to be shifted by single or
multiple selection.
2. Move the data points to the desired positions and click the left
mouse button.
3. Click the Shift button again to confirm the action.
s

Calculate and display a smoothed curve

Click the button to display the smoothing options

Cancel the current action
Undo button
Undo all the editing changes made since the last time the curve was
saved. All editing steps can be undone provided the station has not yet
been saved since editing.

Reloading Original Curves

This action overwrites the edited curves of a station with the original
curves.
To reload original curves:
1. Select the station by clicking its window.
2. Select the File |Re-Load Original command.
After reloading, the smoothed curves and the 1D models need to be
recalculated.

1D Inversion
1D Inversion: Overview
The 1D Model command starts the inversion program for the station
whose window is currently active.
The main steps involved in the inversion process are:

21-8 20BDC Soundings

A guide to using WinGLink

Set curves to use

for inversion

The inversion can be run using the edited or

smoothed curve. The curve selection button,
located on the bottom bar, allows the user to
change the selected curve at any time. The
models must be recalculated when the curve
to be used is changed.

Calculate the
smooth inversion
model

For each station, one smooth model is

calculated and stored in the database. This
model will be used to produce imaged
sections for the project.

Guess the layered

inversion model
from the smooth
model

A layered model can be guessed from the

calculated smooth models. The number of
layers is entered by the user by editing the
inversion settings or by editing the model
with interactive graphic commands.

Edit the initial

model using the
graphic model
editor (optional)

An interactive graphic editor allows the

editing of layers thicknesses and resistivities.
The response is displayed in real time.

Run the inversion

and save the model

The inversion process can be run with a

given number of iterations and predefined
RMS fitting degree. Resistivity and/or
thickness values of one or more layers can
be kept fixed.

The 1D Inversion Window

The following figure shows the 1D inversion window:

A guide to using WinGLink

20BDC Soundings 21-9

To Calculate Smooth Models

1. Use the 1D Model command to enter inversion mode for the
active sounding.
2. Use the

button to compute a smooth model:

To Guess the Layered Model from the Smooth Model:

1. Use the 1D Model command to enter the inversion mode for
the active sounding.
2. Calculate the smooth model (magenta lines), if you have not
already done so.
3. Click the

button.

4. The layered model is guessed (green lines).

To Import a Model Created for a Different Station

1. In 1D Modeling mode, click the Edit button to open the 1D
Model Parameters dialog:

21-10 20BDC Soundings

A guide to using WinGLink

2. Here, click the Import button to open a dialog box which

contains all available stations:

.
3. Select the desired station and click Import. Note that any
changes to the imported model are not reflected in the original
model.

To Run the Layered Inversion:

1. Use the 1D Model command to enter the inversion mode for
the active sounding.
2. Click the

button.

3. The inversion is started using the model shown with green lines
as the starting model and the inversion parameters set for the
sounding.

Graphic Editor for 1D Layered Models

The layered model can be edited graphically using drag-and-drop
operations.
The resulting resistivity curve is updated in real-time, allowing you to
compare the fit with the observed curve.

To Graphically Change the Resistivity of a Layer:

1. Click the vertical line which denotes the layers resistivity. Two
black dots appear on its edges indicating that this line can be
moved:

2. Release the mouse.

3. Move the mouse pointer to the selected line; the arrow pointer
changes to a double-headed arrow.

A guide to using WinGLink

20BDC Soundings 21-11

4. Left click and hold down the button; drag the line to the new
layer resistivity delimiter position.
5. Release the mouse button. The resistivity curve coming from
the layered model is recalculated and redrawn.

To Graphically Change a Layers Thickness

1. Repeat the procedure used to change a layers resistivity, but
instead select one of the horizontal lines which delimits the
layer and move it to the desired position.

Batch Commands & Quick View

Running Operations in Batch Mode
A group of batch procedures are available for performing selected
operations on a set of user-selected stations. To start a batch procedure:
1. Close all open stations.
2. The Batch Tools command will appear on the main menu:

3. Select the desired operation.

4. Enter the parameters as requested.
Operations available in batch mode include:

Printing

Smooth curve calculation

1D inversion models

Quick View
The Quick View option, which is available on the Special menu item
when no soundings windows are open, can be used to display multiple
soundings in a single window. To open the Quick View window, select
the Special | Quick View menu command:

21-12 20BDC Soundings

A guide to using WinGLink

The Stations Map window, which can be toggled on and off with the
corresponding check box in the upper right corner of the window,
indicates the positions of the stations which are currently open (black
squares) as well as the position of the active station (red square).

A guide to using WinGLink

20BDC Soundings 21-13

22: EM/DC Pseudo-Sections

Overview
The Pseudo-Sections program reads the apparent resistivity vs.
measuring parameter values for each station associated with a profile,
then interpolates them to display a section showing the lateral variation
along the profile.
Each pseudo-section is defined by a profile trace and its associated
stations, which supply the datasets with the apparent resistivity values vs.
the measured parameter (i.e.: AB/2, time, or frequency, depending on the
data type of the project).
With the Pseudo-Sections program, multiple sections can be open at any
time. Pseudo-sections may also be opened along multiple profiles. Each
section is displayed in a separate window.
The curves used to generate the pseudo-sections can be viewed and
edited, one at a time, by clicking the vertical dotted line below each
station on the section.

Creating a New EM or DC Pseudo-Section

To create a new EM or DC pseudo-section:
1. Construct a new profile, as described in the Maps chapter of
this manual.
2. Make sure you have imported or entered the field data for each
station of the new section. You can use the Soundings program
to check that the stations have data. The Soundings program
will use the edited data, if available, or the smoothed data, if
requested. Alternatively, the original field data can be recalled.
3. Start the Pseudo-Sections program.
4. In the Profile Selections window, which opens immediately
after starting the program, select the profile created in the Maps
program for which the section is to be created.
5. On the Gridding menu, select New Grid and enter the
appropriate parameters.

A guide to using WinGLink

21BEM/DC Pseudo-Sections 22-1

6. The section is displayed. The section can now be edited, printed

and stored in the database for future use:

Gridding the Profile Data

The data of the stations used to generate each pseudo-section must be
gridded in order to display contours and color ranges.

To Grid the Profile Station Data

1. Select the section you want to grid.
2. Select the Gridding | New Grid menu command. A form
similar to that shown below this is displayed:

3. The numbers in parenthesis on the gray background show the

maximum and minimum values of the data; the current value to
be used to define the grid extent must be entered in the fieldbox close to each number.

22-2 21BEM/DC Pseudo-Sections

A guide to using WinGLink

4. In the Step X field, enter the step in the specified units. This
number determines the number of columns in the grid, which
will be shown in the center white box, representing the section.

5. In the T intervals per decade field, enter the number of grid

rows per decade.
6. Fill the fields with the values for the interpolation radius, spline
weight and smoothing factor.
7. Click the OK button.
Note: As the interpolation radius increases (values >5), the gridding
algorithm attempts to fill any holes present in the data by interpolating
between relatively distant data points. When creating difference pseudosections (see below), we therefore recommend using a low interpolation
radius (2) to prevent the creation of misleading differences.

To Display Color Ranges and Contour Lines

Click the icon

to display/hide color ranges.

Click the icon

to display/hide contour lines.

Displaying Station Dataset Values

On the View menu, select the Projects Window, if not already
displayed:

Check the V box to display the values of the dataset at each station.
To update the display of the section, click the section with the mouse.

Editing Data Points

A number of edit operations can be performed on the data associated with
each station. These include masking samples, static shift and station state.
Edits made here affect the stations elsewhere in the database. Thus, a
station disabled in the Pseudo-Sections program is not available in the
MT 2D Inversion program.

To Edit Data Points:

1. Double-click the dataset of the sounding you wish to edit in the
section (the data are shown as dots below each station). This

A guide to using WinGLink

21BEM/DC Pseudo-Sections 22-3

opens the sounding window:

2. To enter edit mode, click the

button. Depending on

button or the
is enabled, data points can be
whether the
masked either individually or as groups.
3. Click the

button again to terminate masking.

4. The masking operation just performed can be undone by

clicking the

button.

5. Other stations can be selected for editing from the dropdown

list at the top of the editing window.

To Change the State of a Station

1. Select the Station | Edit Status menu command.
2. Click the station symbols to toggle the current state. When
disabled, the stations are displayed in light gray.
Station states may only be altered if the current project is a single project,
i.e. this function cannot be applied to stations contained in an integrated
project.
Note: In order to see the effects of changes or edits made to the stations
on the section, you must select the Gridding | Regrid menu command.

22-4 21BEM/DC Pseudo-Sections

A guide to using WinGLink

23: X-Sections

X Sections
Overview
The X-Sections program provides a tool for displaying multiple sections
for a specific type of geophysical data side-by-side. Using this program,
it is possible, for example, to display in a single application sections
created for 1D, 2D and 3D models on separate (or the same) profiles.
In order to use this program for a given project, the project must contain a
profile and there must be stations associated with that profile. Sections
can only be generated if the corresponding data have been prepared using
the appropriate modules in WinGLink, e.g. Soundings, MT 2D Inversion,
etc. For further information on creating profiles, please refer to the
Maps chapter of this manual.
Well courses and layer data belonging to stations assigned to the active
profile can be displayed in a section, regardless of project type.
Before starting, note the data sources for the various section types:

1D models: these can be created from DC, EM or MT

projects. Before creating sections from 1D models, make
sure you have used the respective Soundings program to
calculate the smooth and layered resistivity models.
For MT projects, sections can be created using Bostick and
Occam 1D models. Layered 1D models can be superimposed
upon both of these. Note that sections cannot be created for
layered 1D MT models.
2D models: these can be created from MT or CS projects.
The models used in creating this type of section are those
created and used in the 2D Inversion programs. Sections can
be extracted from both standard terrestrial 2D models as well
as from marine models.

A guide to using WinGLink

3D models: these models can be created from MT projects

which contain 3D meshes. X-Sections generates sections of
this type by interpolating along a profile which transects an
area of a 3D mesh. Before a section of this type can be
created, it is necessary to first create one or more profiles in
the MT project which contains the 3D mesh. As sections

22BX-Sections 23-1

produced for 3D meshes are generated by interpolating cell

values along the profile using the resistivity values stored in
the mesh and not station values, it is not necessary to
assign stations to this profile.

Wells: this type of section is created using the layer data

imported for each well station. It is possible, for example, to
import layer data containing temperature or pressure at
various depths along a well course. X-Sections interpolates
these values to generate sections. In addition to creating
sections using layer data in the form of numerical values, XSections can also display well courses and lithologic
information, displayed as user-defined fill patterns along the
well courses.

Vertical data: values measured at depth not associated with

well courses can be used to create sections provided the
stations have been assigned to a profile.

Creating a New X-Section

Described in the following is the general procedure for creating sections
of all project types in the X-Section program. It is assumed here that a
profile has been created and that stations which the corresponding data
have been associated with the profiles and that models have been
prepared.

To Create a New Section:

1. Select the desired project in the WinGLink Shell and start the X
Sections program by clicking the
window.

icon in the program

2. The first window displayed by X-Sections after the program

has been started is the Profile Selection form:

Listed in the Profiles section of the window, in the upper left

corner, are the profiles available for the selected project and the
number of stations assigned to each.
Below this, for projects of type DC, EM or MT, is a drop-down
list containing the model types available for the given project
type, i.e. 1D, 2D and 3D. In the window below the drop-down

23-2 22BX-Sections

A guide to using WinGLink

are the models available in the database for the selected type on
the profile selected for opening.
For projects of type WL (wells), this drop-down list lists all
types of numerical data which have been imported for the all
well stations in the database, i.e. all types of numerical data in
all well projects. Note that sections can be created using
numerical values only if data exist for at least two stations on
the selected profile.
When creating sections extracted from 3D models (MT), the
Source Project drop-down list in the Profile Selection dialog
lists all projects in the database. Select any of the projects to
display the 3D models contained in the given project. As there
is no direct relationship in a WinGLink database between
projects and 3D models, sections extracted from 3D models can
be opened even if the 3D model is not present in the current
project. For informative purposes, however, 3D models present
in the active project are indicated by an asterisk. If the model is
present in a different project, the name of that project listed
next to the 3D model name. If the 3D model is not present in
any project in the database, there is no additional information
displayed.
Sections can be extracted along profiles on 3D models not
containing any stations.
Make the desired selections and proceed to the X-Section
workspace by clicking the OK button.
3. The section is displayed with both smooth and layered models,
if available.
4. If viewing a section for which no grid has yet been created, a
window is displayed prompting you to select the gridding
options.

Gridding the Station Datasets

Each time a modification is made to the stations data or status, the
section must be re-gridded to update the display and show the latest
changes.

To Grid the Station Data:

1. Select the window containing the section.
2. Select the Gridding | New Gridmenu command
3. Enter the grid boundaries and steps:

A guide to using WinGLink

22BX-Sections 23-3

4. Enter the interpolation radius, spline weight and smoothing

factor.
5. Click the OK button.
6. Click the

button to display color ranges

7. Click the

button for contour lines.

To Export a Grid
To export a grid created in the X-Sections program, select the File |
Export Grid menu command. Grids can be exported in most standard
grid formats, including Geolink USGS, Surfer and others.

Activating/Deactivating Stations
The data of any station on the section profile can be excluded from the
processing by the user.
This is done by editing the status of the station. To do this, select the
Stations | Edit Status menu command, then click the station symbol on
the section. By clicking the symbol on the station, the user can change its
status from On or Off and vice versa.
When a station is disabled, its name and symbol are displayed in gray, no
data points are shown below the station on the section, and the station
data are not used when a new grid is calculated.
Note: This function is available in the Pseudo-Sections and X-Sections
programs. Stations enabled /disabled in any Sections module are
enabled/disabled in all section programs, including 2D Inversion.
Station states may only be altered if the current project is a single project,
i.e. this function cannot be applied to stations contained in an integrated
project.
To toggle the enabled / disabled status of a station:
1. Select Stations | Edit Status.

23-4 22BX-Sections

A guide to using WinGLink

2. Click the symbol of the station(s) you wish to disable (if not
shown in gray) or re-enable (if shown in gray).
3. When finished, select Gridding | Regrid to update the display
according to the new station settings on the section.

Displaying Features and Parameter Values

On the View menu, open the projects window if not already visible:

Check the corresponding box to display stations

N=

Names

S=

Symbols

M=

Layered models

V=

Parameter values

The buttons located at the top of each column can be used to toggle all
station values for the respective column on and off. After clicking a
button, a dialog window appears prompting you to specify whether the
respective value should be displayed or hidden.
To update the display of the section after selecting or deselecting
checkboxes, click the section with the mouse.

Displaying the Profile Location Map

A window can be opened in the X-Sections program (or any section
program) which contains a map with the locations of all profiles and the
stations associated with the profile in the current project. The active
profile (on which the section currently being edited is located) is
displayed in red. The locations of stations associated with the active
profile are also shown.
To open the ancillary location map window, select the View | Profile
Map menu command:

A guide to using WinGLink

22BX-Sections 23-5

Profile Intersections
The points at which profiles intersect one another can be displayed on
pseudo-sections with the Profile Intersections function, which is enabled
using the View | Crossing Traces menu command. Profile intersections
are indicated with red labels along the top of the section.

Section Topography
Section topography is extracted according to the following rules:
1. From the area topography grid as defined in the WinGLink
shell.
2. From the project topography grid.
3. From the elevations of the stations attached to the profile.

Viewing Well Courses and Well Layer Data in XSections

Well courses and associated layer data can be displayed in section
programs X-Sections and 2D Inversion. Any well station assigned to the
active profile is automatically displayed when the section is opened:

23-6 22BX-Sections

A guide to using WinGLink

Depending on program settings, the well courses may or may not be

displayed initially.
In the X-Sections program, well traces and layer data can be toggled on
and off using the Projects Window and the Well Layer Data window.
If layer data have been imported, e.g. lithologic data, you may use the
Well Layer Data window to toggle the display of the layer data on and
off. As is described in the Common Functions chapter of this manual,
layer data can be superimposed onto well courses and represented as
user-specified fill patterns using WinGLinks Category Editor.

Working with Vertically Distributed Data in

X-Sections
After importing vertically distributed data, as described in the Data
Import chapter of this manual, and assigning the stations to a profile
using the Maps program, X-Sections can be used to grid the values.

To Work with Vertically Distributed Data in X-Sections:

1. Select a project of type Vertical Data [VD].

A guide to using WinGLink

22BX-Sections 23-7

2. Click the X-Sections program icon. The Profile selection dialog

box opens. Select the profiles and values to be opened:

3. If the grids have not yet been created for the value you have
selected, you will be prompted to select the type of gridding to
be used:

4. Make the appropriate selection and click the OK button.

Regardless of which option is chosen here, the grid parameters
can be modified after the grid window has opened.
In addition to the functions available throughout WinGLink, e.g. color
ranges and contours, and those generally available for sections, e.g.
gridding, area selection etc, the X-Section program offers functionality
for performing arithmetic operations on a given set of values to create a
new value.

To Create a New Value:

1. Select the File | New Value menu command.
2. The New Value dialog box opens. Select the value to be used as
the source from the drop down list, which contains all of the
values available for the profile. Make the appropriate selections
in the remaining fields and click the OK button.
3. To open a grid window for the new value, select the File |
Open menu command to open the Profile and Value Selection

23-8 22BX-Sections

A guide to using WinGLink

dialog box.
4 The properties for a new value or those for an existing value
can be modified by selecting the File | Value Properties menu
command.

Edit the Unit and # of decimals fields appropriately and click

OK. The Name field cannot be modified.

A guide to using WinGLink

22BX-Sections 23-9

24: Gravity and Magnetic 2.75D

Modeling

Overview
The Gravity and Magnetic Modeling program is used to create, edit and
manage 2.75 D models of rock density (gravity projects) or rock
susceptibility (magnetic projects ).
Each model is attached to a profile of the database. One or more models
can be attached to each profile. The profiles must have been previously
defined using the Maps program. The observed anomaly values to be
fitted are automatically associated to each defined profile.
Several models can be displayed simultaneously, each one in a separate
window. An example is shown below:

The upper frame shows the observed anomaly curve (red) and the
calculated anomaly curve (green). The lower frame is used to display and
interactively edit the model. As the editing goes on, the calculated curve
is updated automatically in order to show in real time how the changes
affect the calculated curve and check the fitting of the model.

A guide to using WinGLink

23BGravity and Magnetic 2.75D Modeling 24-1

The values for the observed anomaly curve can be chosen from any of the
values of the project stations. A selection window, which lists all values
available for the selected projects, is available for value selection:

Choosing NONE will allow a forward modeling to be performed with no

anomaly value.
Finally, it is possible to display a background section from any project
(imaged or cross section), thus integrating gravity with any other
information available in the area.
In the example shown below, the deep high resistivity complex is
modeled as the source for the gravity high.

Observed Anomaly Values

The observed anomaly curve can be represented in two ways:

Anomaly Curve with Measured Values

This curve is obtained by using the observed value associated with each
station of the profile.
For each model, the values used to construct the curve can be selected
from the values available for the stations of the project. These can be raw,
edited or processed values (i.e.: measured, filtered, etc.).

Anomaly Curve with Interpolated Values

This curve is obtained by extracting the values along the profile from a
map grid, using a fixed sampling step. The resulting curve is a smooth
curve that may show values in no-data areas, due to the interpolation
process.

24-2 23BGravity and Magnetic 2.75D Modeling

A guide to using WinGLink

The above picture shows an example of observed anomaly curves, with

both station values and interpolated values. The red crosses are the values
of the stations attached to the profile.
The continuous red line is the line extracted from the map of the same
values, sampling the grid at a regular step. The shape of the curve
depends on the gridding parameters that were used in the Maps program.
This curve will not be displayed if the selected station values have not
been gridded in the Maps program.

Selecting the Anomaly

This option lets you change the source of the observed curve.
1.

Select the window containing the model.

2.

Select the File | Load Anomaly Values menu command.

Select the desired value type.

The new observed anomaly curve is displayed. If you cannot see the
calculated curve, do the following:
1. Select the Tools | Set Vertical Shift menu command.
2. Select the Automatic check box and click the OK button.

Changing the Vertical Shift

The vertical shift brings the calculated anomaly curve into the observed
anomaly range by applying a constant value to the whole calculated
anomaly curve.
1. Select the Tools | Set Vertical Shiftmenu command

A guide to using WinGLink

23BGravity and Magnetic 2.75D Modeling 24-3

2. Select the Automatic check box or enter the value and click the
OK button.

Displaying a Section in the Background

With this option, a gridded section from any other project of the database
or bitmap image can be set as the background of the 2.5D gravity model.
1. Create or open a model for your profile.
2. Select the Tools | Set Background menu command.
3. Select the type of section you want to display:

4. Select the project from which the section is to be taken and

click the OK button.

Creating and Defining Models

Creating a New Model
1. Select the File | Open Model menu command.
2. Select the profile with which the new model is to be associated:

3. In the models frame, click << New >>, then click the OK
button:

24-4 23BGravity and Magnetic 2.75D Modeling

A guide to using WinGLink

4. Enter the model name and choose the observed anomaly from
the values list, then click the OK button:

5. The listed anomaly values are the values available for the
stations of the current Project. The anomaly values can be
selected and changed anytime.
6. When creating a new model, an open reference body, which lies
directly underneath the topography, is automatically added to
the model. This body represents an uniform earth, prior to
adding other bodies to the model. Enter the density (and any
other parameters) for this body in the Edit Body form, then
click the OK button.

7. Drag the reference body label to the desired location and drop it
by clicking the left mouse button:

8. Other bodies can now be added to the model.

A guide to using WinGLink

23BGravity and Magnetic 2.75D Modeling 24-5

Opening a Model
Select the File | Open Model menu command: a window opens, listing
the available profiles, a simplified profile location map, and an optional
preview of associated models:

Select the profile by clicking its name:

Select the model by clicking on its name; select the Model Preview check
box to display a simplified sketch of each model.

Click OK.

Deleting a Model
1. If the model you want to delete is open, close its window.
2. Select the File | Delete Models menu command.
3. Select the model you wish to delete.

24-6 23BGravity and Magnetic 2.75D Modeling

A guide to using WinGLink

Editing Models
Editing Commands and Icons
Models can be edited using menu commands or edit icons:

To edit a model using commands, on the Model menu, the

select Body, Vertex, or Label menu command to display the
corresponding editing commands, or

Click the
Icon Bar.

button on the toolbar to display the Editing

Important warning: When an editing command (for example: Add

Vertex) is started, this command remains active after executing the
action, allowing the same command to be applied repeatedly. To
terminate the editing command, click the mouse right button or press the
Esc key.
The currently active action command is indicated in the bottom right
corner of the program window:

Adding Bodies to a Model

Select the Model | Body menu command and then choose the
type of body to be added or

Click the

button to display the editing icons. Click:

to add a body open on both sides

to add a body open on the left-hand side
to add a body open on the right-hand side
to add a closed body

To define the polygonal section of the added body:

1. Move the mouse pointer into the model window, then left-click
where you want the first vertex of the body to appear.
2. Repeat the above step to add at least two more vertices.
3. When finished, right-click the mouse: the program will
complete the body geometry according to the initial body
definition.

A guide to using WinGLink

23BGravity and Magnetic 2.75D Modeling 24-7

4. The Edit Body form appears.

5. Edit the body as detailed in paragraph Editing body properties.
6. Right-click or press <Esc> to stop adding bodies.

Deleting Bodies

Select the Model | Body menu command, and then Delete,

or

Click the

button on the Editing toolbar:

When the mouse pointer becomes cross-shaped: left-click inside of the

body to delete the body. Confirmation is requested before the body is
deleted.
Right-click or press <Esc> to stop deleting bodies

Moving Bodies

Select the Model | Body menu command, and then Move, or

Click the

button on the Editing toolbar.

When the mouse pointer becomes cross-shaped: left-click inside of the

body. To move the body, drag it to the new position and left-click to drop
it.
Right-click or press <Esc> to stop moving bodies.
While moving the body, all clipped vertices remain fixed.
Important: Before moving the body, make sure the Automatic Vertical
Shift option is turned off, otherwise it is calculated and applied at every
move.

Splitting a Body

Select the Model | Body | Split menu command, or

Click the

.button on the Editing toolbar.

To define the polygonal section of the new resulting body:

1. Move the mouse pointer into the model window, then left-click
on a vertex of the source body (where you wish to start splitting
it).
2. Continue to left-click to add vertices inside the source body.
3. Right-click the mouse on another vertex of the source body
(where you wish to stop splitting it).
4. The Edit Body form for the new resulting body is then shown.
5. Edit the body as detailed in paragraph Editing body properties
6. Right-click or press <Esc> to stop splitting bodies.
Notes:

24-8 23BGravity and Magnetic 2.75D Modeling

A guide to using WinGLink

Both closed and open bodies can be split, including the

reference body.

When splitting a body, the common vertices are

automatically clipped and displayed in red.

When splitting the reference body, a new body is added to

the model. Vertices on the topography are clipped to the
topographic profile.

Editing Bodies in a Model

To Add Vertices to a Body:
1. Select the Model | Vertex | Add menu command, or
click the

button on the Editing toolbar.

2. When the mouse pointer becomes cross-shaped, left-click near

the line where the vertex is to be added.
3. Move the mouse pointer to drag the new vertex and left-click to
drop it.
4. Continue adding vertices as desired. The anomaly curve is
updated accordingly.
5. Right-click to stop adding vertices.

Select the Model | Vertex | Add menu command, or

Click the

button on the Editing toolbar.

To Delete Vertices from a Body

1. Select the Model | Vertex | Delete menu command, or
click the

button on the Editing toolbar

2. When the mouse pointer becomes cross-shaped, left-click on

each vertex to delete.
3. Right-click to stop deleting vertices.

To Move the Vertices of a Body:

1. Select the Model | Vertex | Move menu command, or
2. Click the

button on the Editing toolbar.

3. When the mouse pointer becomes cross-shaped, left-click on

the vertex to move
4. Move the mouse pointer to drag the vertex and left-click to
drop it.
5. Right-click to stop picking vertices to move

A guide to using WinGLink

23BGravity and Magnetic 2.75D Modeling 24-9

Important: Before moving the vertex, you may want to make sure the
Automatic Vertical Shift option is turned off, otherwise it is calculated
and applied at every move.

To Clip Two or More Vertices:

1. Select the Model | Vertex | Clip menu command, or
click

on the Editing toolbar.

2. When the mouse pointer becomes cross-shaped, left-click the

vertex to clip.
3. Move the mouse pointer to drag the vertex on the partner
vertex, and left-click to drop it.
4. The clipped vertices turn red.

Setting the Properties of a Body

To edit the properties of a body:
1. Select the Model | Body | Properties menu command, or
click the

button on the Editing toolbar.

2. Double-click with the mouse inside the body to be edited.

3. The Edit Body form opens. Select the desired property tab, and
enter the settings as appropriate:

Wh
en body properties are entered or edited, check the box beside each
property to display it in the label attached to the body.
For example, if you wish to display the strike length and offset of a body,
select the check box <Show in Legend> in the Edit Body form:

24-10 23BGravity and Magnetic 2.75D Modeling

A guide to using WinGLink

The label for a new body is automatically created by the program when
closing the Edit Body form
Each time the body properties are edited, the contents of the Body Labels
are automatically updated.

Moving Body Labels

1. Click the
button on the Editing toolbar, then click the label
and drag it to its new position or simply on the label and move
it.
2. A straight line will connect the label to its old position. To edit
the line, click on one edge, and drag it to the desired location.

Formatting Body Labels

1. Select the Model | Format Labels menu command or rightclick on one label (the format settings are applied to all labels).
2. Enter the desired format setting.

A guide to using WinGLink

23BGravity and Magnetic 2.75D Modeling 24-11

25: Interpreted Views and

Montage

Overview
The Interpreted Views and Montage (IVM) program provides a tool for
displaying multiple layers of geophysical data in a single document. As a
set of medical transparencies might be used to display skin over muscles
over bones, IVM is used to superimpose various types of geophysical
data onto one another, e.g. cultural data and well logs over a 2D model of
magnetotelluric data acquired along the same profile.
IVM is designed to prepare for presentation data which have been
processed and modeled using the various interpretation modules
contained within WinGLink. In addition to displaying raw and processed
data, the program contains several sets of tools for annotating documents.
IVM itself contains no data analysis functionality.

Document Types
The IVM program can be used to create two types of documents:

A guide to using WinGLink

Maps: these documents may contain, among other features,

maps created in the Maps program in WinGLink, cultural
data, stations, profiles and interpretation areas:

Sections: these documents may contain sections created in

WinGLink, e.g. grids and meshes created in the 1D Sections

24BInterpreted Views and Montage 25-1

and 2D MT Inversion modules, as well as cultural data,

station data, profiles and interpretation areas:

In both types of documents, the different features are placed on separate

layers. Each layer is treated as an independent object and has associated
with it an independent set of display properties, i.e. symbol name, font
size, contour colors, etc. Layers can be shown or hidden, and, to use the
medical transparency analogy again, can be moved above or below other
layers.
Both of these document types are stored in the active WinGLink database
as enclosed objects.

Plate Mode
Documents stored in the database can be opened in IVM plate mode,
which provides you with an interface for positioning and annotating
documents with legends, scales, text boxes, and other features on a single
plate. Plates can then be sent to an available printer or to EMF or CGM
files. Plates are stored in the active WinGLink database and, like map and
section documents, can be opened and edited at a later time in IVM.

25-2 24BInterpreted Views and Montage

A guide to using WinGLink

Figure 1 Example of a plate containing a section document, scale box, title box and color
scale.

Getting Started with IVM

Note: IVM can be started only if your WinGLink license agreement
includes the Interpreted Views and Montage option and your dongle has
been correctly configured. Please contact Geosystem for further details.
To open IVM, click the Interpreted Views and Montage button located
at the right side of the main database window in WinGLink:

The program opens with the Document Editor dialog box:

A guide to using WinGLink

24BInterpreted Views and Montage 25-3

Recently opened IVM documents, if any, contained in the active

database, their types, and the profiles with which they are associated are
listed in the box in the bottom half of the dialog box. To view a list of all
IVM documents contained in the database, click the More Files label
in the text box. This opens an additional dialog box which lists for
selection all IVM documents contained in the database.
Note: Documents are stored within the WinGLink database, not as
external files.
To continue, either select an existing document or create a new document
by clicking the Create a New Document option button and either the
Map or Section option button.
If you choose to open a section document, you will be prompted to select
a profile from the profiles contained in the WinGLink database:

25-4 24BInterpreted Views and Montage

A guide to using WinGLink

After clicking OK for section documents, or immediately if you are

creating a new map, the document window opens with the following
message:

After clicking OK, IVM opens either the Map or Section editor, both of
which are described below.

Understanding How IVM Works

Regardless of whether you are working with a map or a section
document, the core functionality is, in principle, the same. Although the
types of layers which can be added to each document type differ, how
they are added to a document, most menu options and dialog boxes
available to the two document types are the same.
Using a section document as an example, this section will introduce the
IVM features and functions common to both document types.
Shown below is a section window which contains a multilayer document,
the toolbars and legends associated with those layers, the Layer
Navigator window, and the Mouse Locator window:

The Document Window

This is the principle area of both the Map and Section editors. Layers, as
they are added, are displayed here in the specified Z-order, the order in
which the layers are stacked on top of one another.
The menu options contained in the View menu item and the
corresponding buttons in the main toolbar can be used to adjust the area
of the document displayed on the screen as in other WinGLink modules.
Document can be enlarged, reduced, panned, or a specific area selected.

A guide to using WinGLink

24BInterpreted Views and Montage 25-5

Changes in the view area are immediately reflected in the scales

displayed along document window.
The entire area of the document window is mouse sensitive. When the
right mouse button is clicked anywhere on this window, a shortcut menu
similar to the following appears:

Which menu commands are listed in the shortcut menu is dependent on

the type of document, the layers contained in the document, if any, as
well as which layer is currently active. The functions listed in this
shortcut menu can, for the most part, also be accessed in either the main
menu bar or from the toolbar. As the submenu command names imply,
these commands are used to add new layers and change the display
characteristics of the individual layers in the document. The function of
each of these and other submenu commands are described in detail later
in this chapter.

Layer Navigator:

The Layer Navigator window is used to manage the layers contained in

the document. The first layer listed below the document name (in this
example Document1), is the top-most layer in the document, i.e. has the
lowest Z-order. In the example shown above, the layer Prod Wells
precedes the layer C Loop EM. If the Z-order of these two layers was
reversed, the wells layer would be all but hidden by the grid. To change
to the Z-order of a document, click the name of the layer which is to be
repositioned with the left mouse button, and drag to the new position in
the Layer Navigator. After repositioning a layer, double-click the layer
name to activate the layer and redraw the window.
The currently active layer is displayed in red. A layer can be activated by
either double-clicking the layer name with the mouse or by clicking the
right mouse button anywhere within the Layer Navigator window to open

25-6 24BInterpreted Views and Montage

A guide to using WinGLink

the Layer Navigator shortcut menu and selecting the Edit menu
command:

Note: Although the available commands vary depending on what type of

layer is active, the four active menu commands shown above are
available for all layer types. When a layer is active, the Edit command
changes to Exit Edit; when a layer is hidden from view, the Hide
command changes to Show. Before a layer can be activated, it must be
visible.
Menu commands Show current only, Copy and Paste are not available
for all layer types.
The document name, the top item in the Layer Navigator, has associated
with it a different shortcut menu:

This shortcut menu can be used to add new layers to the document or to
assign the document a new name.
The toolbars, legends and available menu commands change depending
on what type of layer is active. For example, when the active layer is of
type grid, the display window shortcut menu contains commands for
changing the color ranges and contour lines whereas for a layer of type
station containing well data, this menu might contain, among others, a
command for editing well logs.
The Layer Navigator window is reduced to a title bar by clicking the title
bar with the left mouse button. When the mouse pointer is positioned
over the title bar, the window is automatically restored to its original size.
Likewise, when the mouse pointer is moved off of the Layer Navigator,
the window is again reduced to a title bar. To switch off this auto-close
functionality, click anywhere within the Layer Navigator window, and
the window will remain open. Use the
button, located in the main
toolbar, to toggle the Layer Navigator window on and off.

A guide to using WinGLink

24BInterpreted Views and Montage 25-7

Mouse Locator

The Mouse Locator window displays the mouse position on the on the
map or section. This window can be toggled on and off using the
button located in the main toolbar.

Zoom
IVM provides several zoom functions, all of which are available for both
map and section documents:

Zoom In/Out
When in this mode, click the left mouse button to zoom in on the
document area below the mouse, click the right mouse button to zoom
out. To enter Zoom In/Out mode, click the magnifying glass button to put
the button into the down state:

While in this mode, the mouse pointer is displayed as a magnifying glass.

IVM remains in zoom in/out mode until the magnifying glass button or
another toolbar button is clicked.

Other Zoom Options

Open the dropdown list box to the right of the magnifying glass to list
several zoom options:

Use the numerical options to specify a zoom size.

The Fit option fits the entire document onto the window.
The User zoom option is used to zoom in on a selected area of the
document. To use, select the User option. Immediately after selecting,
the mouse pointer changes to a crosshair with a small rectangle in the
lower right corner of the crosshair. Click the mouse at the desired
location on the document and, keeping the mouse button depressed, draw
a rectangle over an area of the document. This area of the document is
then enlarged to fill the screen.
Note: while the Zoom In/Out button is depressed, only the zoom in/out
functions are available.

25-8 24BInterpreted Views and Montage

A guide to using WinGLink

Vertical Exaggeration
Use the vertical exaggeration option, available in section documents, to
change the scaling of the vertical axis relative to horizontal axis. For
example, with a vertical exaggeration of 10, one unit length on the
horizontal axis is equivalent to ten unit lengths on the vertical axis.
To set the vertical exaggeration, either set a numerical value in the
vertical exaggeration box, located in the toolbar, or use the scroll bars to
adjust the exaggeration to a desired value:

Crossing Traces
Use the View | Crossing Traces menu command to display the points at
which the current profile intersects any other profiles (sections only).

Toolbars
As discussed above in the Layer Navigator section, different layer types
have associated with them different toolbars. These toolbars are floating
windows, each of which contains a set of controls or legends specific to
the given layer.
For example, layers containing station data have associated with them a
Projects Window toolbar, which is used to control the display properties
of the stations contained in a given layer. Depending on the station type,
other toolbars may also be available. Well log stations may have
associated with them toolbars for layer data (lithologic data) which can
be used to toggle on and off stratigraphic features, as well as additional
toolbars for controlling the display of numerical data and depth tags, and
legends which provide details about the patterns used to describe the
stratigraphy.

To Hide and Display the Toolbars Associated with a

Given Layer:
1. Activate the layer associated with the toolbar by doubleclicking the layer name in the Layer Navigator with the mouse.
2. Right click the mouse anywhere on the display window.
3. In the shortcut menu which opens, select the Toolbars
command. All toolbars, if any, associated with the layer are
listed in a secondary menu. Those currently displayed in the
document have next to them a light gray button.
4. To toggle a toolbar on or off, click the toolbar name in the
shortcut menu.
Each of the toolbars is described below:
Projects Window toolbar:

A guide to using WinGLink

24BInterpreted Views and Montage 25-9

Layers containing station or profile data have associated with them a

Projects window which can be used to change how the station data are
displayed in the document. The Projects window serves the same
function in IVM as the Project panel in the main WinGLink database
window. When individual projects are selected in IVM, the Projects
window contains a single project. However, when an integrated project is
selected, all projects which comprise the integrated project are listed:

Consider, for example, the Projects window shown above for an

integrated project. The [N], [S] and [E] buttons toggle on and off the
station name, symbol and elevation, respectively. Project windows for
other types contain similar options, e.g.[T] for toggling on and off profile
traces (map documents only).
Double-click the symbol to the left of the station type to open the Select
Options dialog box to specify colors, fonts, text positions and other
display properties.
Color scale toolbar:

25-10 24BInterpreted Views and Montage

A guide to using WinGLink

The Color Scale window shows the range scale for layers containing
mesh and grid data. Color ranges are set and edited in IVM using the
Range Editor as they are elsewhere in WinGLink. For full details on how
to use this feature, please refer to the Common Functions chapter of the
WinGLink manual.

To Toggle the Color Scale Window on and off for a Given

Layer:
1. Activate the grid layer by double-clicking the layer name in the
Layer Navigator.
2. Right-click anywhere on the display window.
3. Click the Color Scale command from the Toolbars submenu.
Other toolbars
As mentioned above, different toolbars are available for different layer
types. In principle, however, they all function in the same way as the
Projects Window toolbar described earlier. Shown below are three
toolbars available to layers containing well log data:

Clicking the [S] button or checking the check boxes below the [S] button
toggles the symbols for the respective value; enabling or disabling the
checkboxes below the [V] button toggles the value display. Doubleclicking the icons to the right of the checkboxes opens the Select Options
dialog box which provides options for setting various display options.

Legends
Layers containing information too detailed to be displayed in the Section
window itself may also contain a legend window. For example, the
pozo_lith Legend, shown below and in the Section window at the
beginning of this section, contains a legend for the stratigraphy data for
the respective well log stations.

Note: Legends are automatically created when well log stations which
include layer (stratigraphic) data are imported into IVM. Bear in mind,
however, that automatically created legends contain only blank pattern
blocks and the names of the individual layers.
Fill patterns can be created for each of the items contained in a legend
with the Pattern Editor, described later in this chapter.

A guide to using WinGLink

24BInterpreted Views and Montage 25-11

Creating and Working with Layers

Map and section documents may contain the following types of layers:

Grids

Stations

Profiles (maps only)

Cultural data

Interpretation areas

Note: With the exception of cultural data and interpretation areas, which
are created within the Maps and Sections editors themselves, all
geophysical data must exist in the active WinGLink database in its final,
processed form. No data processing is possible within the Interpreted
Views and Montage program.
While the Maps and Section editors both generally support the same layer
types, the actual data which can be displayed in the two editors is, of
course, quite different. The Maps editor is used to display horizontally
distributed data, whereas the Section editor is used to display vertically
distributed data. Despite this fundamental difference, the individual
layers types are handled in the same way in both editors.
A second major difference between the two document types is the
availability of data. When creating a map document, you may select from
all (horizontal) grids, i.e. all map data, and all station data contained in
the active database. Section documents, on the other hand, may only
contain meshes or grids created using stations located along the selected
profile as well as any stations assigned to that profile.
This section describes how to create and work with each of the layer
types listed above. The differences between the two editors, i.e. what
types of physical data can be represented in each of the layer types, will
be indicated at the appropriate points.

Grids
Grid layers in the map and section documents may contain most types of
gridded data stored in the active WinGLink database as follows:
Map documents: all maps created in the WinGLink Maps program
which are stored in the active WinGLink database can be placed on grid
layers within a map document, e.g. elevations, gravity, apparent
resistivity at depth, etc.
Section documents: all section data stored in the active WinGLink
database can be placed on grid layers within a section document. These
include:

Sections extracted from 3D MT meshes (using X-Sections)

2D MT meshes and grids (2D MT Inversion module: MT

data)

1D model images(Imaged Sections module, Vert: EM + MT

data)

25-12 24BInterpreted Views and Montage

A guide to using WinGLink

Creating a Grid Layer

To create a grid layer in a new or existing document:
1. Right-click the mouse anywhere on the document window or
right-click the document title in the Layer Navigator window to
open a shortcut menu. Then position the mouse over the New
Layer command to open the submenu shown below:

Alternatively, you can open the layer-type submenu by clicking

the Add Layer button in the main toolbar:

2. Click the Grid command; the Open Existing Grid dialog box
opens:

Listed in the upper half of the window are all projects contained
in the active WinGLink database. Select a project by clicking it
with the mouse.
Listed in the lower left part of the window are the grids

A guide to using WinGLink

24BInterpreted Views and Montage 25-13

available for the project selected in the upper half of the screen.
Select a grid by clicking it with the mouse.
Click the Show Preview checkbox at the bottom of the screen
to display a preview of the selected grid in the lower right
corner of the window.
Note: When working with section documents, only grids
created along the active profile are available for selection.
3. Click Open to create the grid. The new layer is automatically
selected and assigned the lowest Z-order, i.e. is placed at the
top of the layer stack, as can be seen in the Layer Navigator:

4. Reposition the layer in the Layer Navigator as desired by

clicking the layer name with the mouse and dragging to a new
position in the layer list.

Working with Grid Layers

The same display functions available to grids within the WinGLink
modules which support grids are also available in IVM. The Range
Editor window can be used here to redefine the range distribution of
colors used in the mesh. The display properties of contour lines can be
modified using the Contour Editor.

To Open the Range Editor:

1. Activate the grid layer to be edited by double-clicking the layer
name in the Layer Navigator or by right-clicking the layer name
in the Layer Navigator and clicking the Edit command from
the Layer Navigator shortcut menu.
2. Right-click the mouse anywhere on the document window to
open the document window shortcut menu; select the Color
Ranges command:

25-14 24BInterpreted Views and Montage

A guide to using WinGLink

3. The Range Editor window familiar from other WinGLink

modules opens:

For a detailed description on how to use the Range Editor,

please refer to Chapter 5 of the WinGLink manual, Common
Functions.

To Open the Contour Editor:

1. Activate the grid layer to be edited by double-clicking the layer
name in the Layer Navigator or by right-clicking the layer name
in the Layer Navigator and clicking the Edit command.
2. Right-click the mouse anywhere on the document window to
open the shortcut menu; select the Contour Lines command.
3. The Contour Lines window found elsewhere in WinGLink
opens:

A guide to using WinGLink

24BInterpreted Views and Montage 25-15

Note that the size of the labeling in current database units is

specified in the Size field.
For a detailed description on how to use the Contour Editor,
please refer to Chapter 5 of the WinGLink manual, Common
Functions.

Showing/Hiding Fill Colors

To show or hide fill colors, activate the grid layer, then either click the
button or right-click the mouse anywhere on the document window
to open the shortcut menu; click the Display Options | Hide/Show
Colors command:

The Hide Color command toggles to Show Color when the colors are
hidden.
Showing/hiding contour lines
To show or hide contour lines, activate the grid layer and click either the
button or right-click the mouse anywhere on the document window
to open the shortcut menu; click the Display Options | Hide/Show
Contours command: The Hide Contours command toggles to Show
Contours when the contours are hidden.
Changing the display quality
Two display qualities are available for grid layers: draft and presentation.
Presentation quality produces a more exact representation of the data and
is, thus, more time intensive. To change the display quality, activate the
grid layer and right-click the mouse on the document window to open the
shortcut menu. Select the Display Options | Use Presentation
Quality/Use Draft Quality command. The default presentation quality is
Draft. The menu command changes between Use Draft Quality and Use
Presentation Quality depending on the current selection.

25-16 24BInterpreted Views and Montage

A guide to using WinGLink

Topography Shadowing
A virtual light source can be directed onto elevation maps to generate
shadows:

To toggle the light source on and off, use the shadow button:
located in the toolbar.
Note: The shadow button is only visible for elevation map grids.

Stations
Station layers are used to display station locations for a given project on
an IVM document. Although some station data are displayed in the same
way in both document types, there are some notable differences.
First the similarities. It is possible to display for stations in both
document types the station name, a station symbol and the station
elevation. For most station types, these values can be toggled on and off
using the Projects Window described earlier in this chapter.
The value data associated with stations, e.g. resistivity, Bouguer
anomaly, are, however, generally available only in map documents. This
is due in large to the fact that maps are defined in WinGLink to be sets of
horizontally distributed data. These sets of data consist of the value data
which can be viewed in the WinGLink Maps module. While it is possible
to interpolate between these values to create horizontal grids, even at
depth, it is not yet possible to use WinGLink to transform the values at
depth to vertical sections.
Stations for earthquake projects (EQ) are plotted at true elevation.
WinGLink considers sections, on the other hand, to be sets of vertically
distributed data or models associated with a profile trace, for example
well traces, 1D models or 2D models created along profile.

Creating Station Layers

Display differences aside, station layers are handled the same way in both
map and section document types.
To create a station layer:
1. Right-click the mouse anywhere on the document window or
right-click the document title in the Layer Navigator window to
open the shortcut menu. Then position the mouse over the New

A guide to using WinGLink

24BInterpreted Views and Montage 25-17

Layer command to open the submenu; select the Stations

command.
2. The Select Projects window opens:

Listed here are all projects contained in the database, the type
and number of stations available for selection in each project.
Station layers created for map documents will contain all
stations in the selected project. Station layers created for section
documents, on the other hand, will contain only those stations
positioned along the active profile. If there are no stations along
the profile, na is listed in the Station column.
Select the desired project and click OK.
3. As with other layer types, reposition the station layer in the
Layer Navigator with respect to other layers. if necessary by
clicking the layer name with the mouse and dragging to a new
position in the layer list.

Working with Station Layers

Station layers containing any of the data types supported in WinGLink
have associated with them a Projects toolbar, which is used to set the
appearance of intrinsic station properties on the screen (name, symbol,
elevation as well as format and location of text labels):

Depending on the type of data the station contains and the type of
document, i.e. map or section, the station may also have associated with

25-18 24BInterpreted Views and Montage

A guide to using WinGLink

it a Value Types window, which lists all values available for the stations:

Select the check box(es) to the left of the value names to display the
respective value(s). Click the [V] button located above the check boxes to
display all values. Double-click the symbol to the left of the check boxes
to open the Value Type Properties window for modifying the display
properties of the value data, i.e. font size, text location with respect to the
symbol, vector plots etc:

The Value Types window is generally available only in map documents,

the exception being well stations displayed in section documents. This
exception aside, the values listed in the Value Types window correspond
to the values available in the WinGLink Maps module.
The function of the Label and Font tabs is straightforward. The function
of the Vector Plot tab, shown above, is, however, worth a closer look.
Using the options provided on this tab, vector arrows can be drawn for
MT parameters which are expressed as complex quantities, e.g. tipper.
Because the real and imaginary components of complex quantities are
stored separately within WinGLink, the real portion of the vector must be
linked to the imaginary portion. It is up to the user to link the correct real
quantity to a given imaginary quantity.
Use the radio buttons in the upper left corner to specify how the angular
values are to be displayed: as segments, vectors (segments with

A guide to using WinGLink

24BInterpreted Views and Montage 25-19

directional arrows), or not at all. Select the Hide Value check box to hide
the measured value.
The Module area of the Value Type Properties window contains options
for specifying how the segments are displayed. The Fixed option
(default) specifies that the directional arrow be displayed with a fixed
length for all stations as specified in the Size field. By selecting the
Linked option and selecting one of the values listed in the values field, it
is possible to assign a magnitude to the directional quantity. In this way
you can, for example, link the tipper magnitude at 1 sec. to the tipper
strike angle at 1 sec, thereby constructing the vector quantity:

When linking an angular quantity to a magnitude, the value specified in

the Sizes field serves to amplify the magnitude value.
The Vector Plot tab is available only for MT stations on Maps
documents. Moreover, it is available only for the angular component of a
given complex quantity.
Changing projects
The shortcut menu for station layers includes a command for changing
projects:

Clicking this menu command opens the Select Projects window shown in
Step 2 of the Creating station layers section of this chapter. The project
selected in the Select Projects window replaces the current project. This
function can be useful when working with complex maps or sections
containing cultural data or interpretation areas and you would like to
create similar documents for various projects.

25-20 24BInterpreted Views and Montage

A guide to using WinGLink

Profiles
Profile layers are available only in map documents. As shown below, the
display is similar to that seen in the WinGLink Maps module:

When a profile layer is first created, all profiles in the active WinGLink
database are plotted on the map document. The Projects Window, seen in
the lower left above, can be used to toggle on and off the individual
profile traces and profile names.
Click the symbol to the left of the trace names to open the Profile
Properties window, which can be used to modify text and profile display
properties.

Creating Profile Layers

To create a profile layer, right-click anywhere on the document window
or right-click the document title in the Layer Navigator window to open
the shortcut menu. Then position the mouse over the New Layer
command to open the submenu; select the Profile command.

Cultural Data
Cultural data layers are used to display local cultural features. Several
display elements are available for this purpose:

A guide to using WinGLink

Labels: text labels

Text boxes: text, with extended formatting options and the

option to place a frame around the text.

Shapes: choose from rectangles and ovals; shapes may be

assigned colors and/or filling patterns.

Polylines: may be assigned width and color; polyline

definitions may also be exported to and imported from
external files. May optionally be smoothed.

Free shapes: polygonal shapes. Shapes may be assigned

colors and/or filling patterns. May optionally be smoothed.
May be exported to and imported from external files.

Images: external bitmap images. Images may be resized and

rotated.

24BInterpreted Views and Montage 25-21

Symbols: select from rectangles, circles, crosses and arrows.

Symbols may be assigned color, width and rotation.

With the exception of the cultural data layer type in IVM, cultural data do
not exist in any form elsewhere in WinGLink databases. These features
must, therefore, be created manually using the set of tools provided for
this purpose and described below. Cultural data layers are available in
map documents as well as in section documents.
Several cultural data elements may exist within a given cultural data
layer. Thus, this layer type actually represents a document within a
document. The Z-order of the individual elements within a cultural data
layer can be modified, allowing you to position one element on top of
another. A cultural data layer can also be stored in the active WinGLink
database and reused in other IVM documents.

Creating Cultural Data Layers

To create a cultural data layer:
1. Right-click the mouse anywhere on the document window or
right-click the document title in the Layer Navigator window to
open a shortcut menu.
2. Then position the mouse over the New Layer command to
open the submenu
3. Select the Cultural Data command. The Select Layer window
opens:

4. Listed in this window are all cultural data layers contained in

the active WinGLink database.
5. To create a new cultural data layer, select the <New> item in
the Layer Name column and click OK. Likewise, an exiting
layer can be inserted into the document by selecting the layer
name and clicking OK.
When inserting an existing cultural data layer into a document, you may
insert either the original layer or a copy of it. If you select the Link to
Original checkbox when inserting an existing layer into a cultural data
layer, any change made to the layer will be reflected in other
documents/layers which use the layer, provided they, too, use the layer in
linked mode. If the Link to Original checkbox is not selected when
inserting an existing layer into a document, a new cultural data layer is
created and will be listed in the Select Layer window the next time a
cultural data layer is created.

25-22 24BInterpreted Views and Montage

A guide to using WinGLink

The names of linked cultural data layers are displayed in bold text in the
Layer Navigator when the document is next opened.
Note: To prevent confusion with layer names, when inserting an existing
layer into a document without checking the Link to Original check box,
it is recommended that you rename the layer in the Layer Navigator. The
same name will otherwise be used for two different layers the next time
the Select Layer window is opened.
Instructions on how to create each of the cultural data types follow:
Labels
To create a new label:
1. Click the label button on the IVM toolbar:
2. The mouse pointer changes to a crosshair with a question mark.
Click the mouse at the location on the document at which the
label is to be inserted.
3. The Label Properties dialog box opens:

4. Enter the desired text in the text field. The text display
properties can be edited by clicking the Abc button in the
upper part of the window:

A guide to using WinGLink

24BInterpreted Views and Montage 25-23

In addition to standard text formatting features, the Text Format

dialog box includes an option for rotating the label.
5. After entering the text and setting any formatting properties,
click OK in the Label Properties dialog box to close the
window. The label is positioned on the document at the desired
location with the specified format properties.
Text boxes
To create a new text box:
1. Click the text box button on IVM toolbar:
2. The mouse pointer changes to a crosshair with a question mark.
Click the mouse at the location on the document at which the
text box is to be inserted.
3. The Text Properties window opens:

While similar to the Label Properties window, the Text

Properties window includes additional options for text
alignment, drawing a frame around the text and adding
transparency to the element.
Enter the desired text in the text field. Formatting properties
can be assigned to the text by clicking the Abcoption in the
upper part of the window, which opens the same Text Format
dialog box used for label elements.
4. After entering the text and setting any formatting properties,
click OK in the Text Properties dialog box to close the
window. The text is positioned on the document at the desired
location with the specified format properties.
Shapes
To create a new shape:
1. Click the shape button on the IVM toolbar:
2. The mouse pointer changes to a crosshair with a question mark.
Click and hold down the mouse at the location on the document
at which the shape is to be inserted and, keeping the mouse

25-24 24BInterpreted Views and Montage

A guide to using WinGLink

button depressed, drag the mouse to create a box of the desired

size.
3. Upon releasing the mouse, a shape of the default type appears
(rectangle). The shape properties can be edited by
- double-clicking the shape
- right-clicking the shape to open the shortcut menu; when
open, select the Properties command.
- clicking the Edit Object Properties button on the IVM
toolbar:
The Shape Properties dialog box opens:

In the Color and Lines tab of the Shape Properties dialog box,
set the display properties for the object and select the shape
type (rectangle or oval). Click the Fill check box to enable the
Fill button. The IVM fill feature, which is described in the
Tools section of this chapter, can be used to fill the shape with
a standard- or user-defined fill pattern.

A guide to using WinGLink

24BInterpreted Views and Montage 25-25

4. Click the Size tab to set size properties for the shape:

The Height and Width fields are not active for shape objects.
Positive rotation is counterclockwise about the upper left
corner.
Polylines
To create a new polyline:
1. Click the polyline button on the IVM toolbar:
2. The mouse pointer changes to a crosshair with a question mark.
Click the mouse at the location on the document at which the
polyline is to begin. Move the mouse to the location of the next
vertex and click again. Continue this procedure until the desired
polyline has been created. Double-click the mouse to set the
final vertex.
3. Immediately after setting the final vertex, the Polyline
Properties window opens:

25-26 24BInterpreted Views and Montage

A guide to using WinGLink

Set display properties as desired and click OK. The value

entered in the width field specifies the border width in database
units.
Note: The IVM fill and pattern features are described in the
Tools section of this chapter. The Use Pattern option in the
Line Properties section of the window can be used to augment
the defining line with a pattern, e.g. x marks, circles, triangles.
4. A polyline object can be scaled or resized by first selecting it
with the mouse, then grabbing one of the yellow handles with
the mouse pointer and pulling it to the desired size.
Polylines can also be exported as external text files and then as well as
reimported into other documents.
To export a polyline:
1. Click the polyline object to select it.
2. Right-click the mouse on the document window to open the
shortcut window:

Select from 2D and 3D polylines. 2D polylines are defined by

distance along the profile and depth and can be reimported into

A guide to using WinGLink

24BInterpreted Views and Montage 25-27

other IVM documents. 3D polylines contain actual geographic

coordinates and cannot be reimported.
3. Select the Export command to open the standard Windows
dialog box for saving files.
To import an external polyline definition:
1. Make certain that a Cultural Data layer is enabled for editing in
the Layer Navigator.
2. Right-click the mouse on the document window to open the
shortcut menu:

3. Click the Import Polyline command to open the standard

Windows dialog box for opening files. Browse the directories
until you have found the desired file, then click Open.
4. The WinGLink Import Wizard opens:

The Import Wizard, which is described in detail in Chapter 3 of

the WinGLink manual, guides you through the import process.
After providing the requested information, the polyline data
will be imported from the external file and the object created in
the active cultural data layer.
Closed polylines:

25-28 24BInterpreted Views and Montage

A guide to using WinGLink

Closed polylines are similar to open cousins, the primary difference being
that closed polylines automatically connect the last node to the first node,
resulting in a closed element.
To create a closed polyline:
1. Either click the Closed polyline button on the IVM toolbar:
or right-click the mouse on the document window to open the
shortcut menu and select the Free Shape command:

2. The mouse pointer changes to a crosshair with a question mark.

As with polyline elements, click the mouse at the location on
the document at which the free shape is to begin. Move the
mouse to the location of the next node point and click again.
Continue this procedure until the desired shape has been
created. Double-click the mouse to set the final vertex and
automatically connect the last vertex to the first vertex.
3. After setting the final vertex, the same properties window as for
polylines opens. Set the properties as desired, then click the
OK button.
As with polylines, closed polylines can be exported to external files and
reimported. Refer to the description of polylines above for details.
Images
External graphics files can be imported into cultural data layers. Most
standard graphic formats are supported, including BMP, JPEG, GIF,
PNG, TIFF, EXIF , WMF and EMF. Before they can be imported into
IVM, however, they must first be copied into a folder named images
which is created automatically by IVM the first time the images button is
clicked. This folder is located in the same directory as the current
database on your hard disk. Only images located in the images folder are
available for import.
To place an image in a cultural data layer:
1. Either click the images button on the IVM toolbar:
or right-click the mouse on the document window to open the
shortcut menu and select the Image command.

A guide to using WinGLink

24BInterpreted Views and Montage 25-29

2. The Select Image dialog box opens:

This dialog box lists all images contained in the Image folder
mentioned above. Select the desired image and click OK.
3. The mouse pointer changes to a crosshair with a question mark.
Click the mouse at the location on the document at which the
image is to be inserted.
4. Open the Shape Properties window by double-clicking the
image or by using one of the other previously mentioned
methods for opening property windows. The Shape Properties
window consists of three tabs:

In the Colors and Lines tab, only the options in the Fill
Properties section of the tab are available.
The Make transparent for color option is used to make a
specific color or range of colors transparent. Enable this
function by clicking the checkbox. Select the desired color by
clicking the arrow button. You can specify the sensitivity of the
transparency function with the Color Tolerance scale. With a
low tolerance value (arrow to the left), only colors closely
matching that in the color picker are made transparent. Higher

25-30 24BInterpreted Views and Montage

A guide to using WinGLink

values, on the other hand, make a broader range of colors

transparent. This function can be used, for example, to make
the background of an image transparent.

The options in the Size tab are used to specify image size in
either absolute units or to scale the image to a relative size. The
values entered in the upper set of Height and Width boxes set
the image to the specified size, where the units are the same as
those used in the document axes. The lower set of Height and
Width boxes scales the image to the specified percent value.
When the Lock aspect ratio checkbox is enabled, the height
and width values change in proportion to one another,
preventing the image from becoming distorted as the size is
changed.
When the Relative to original picture size checkbox is
enabled, the scale values displayed are relative to the original
image size, which is displayed at the bottom of the window. If
not enabled, the scale values are relative to the current image
size, i.e. size of the image when the Shape Properties window
was opened.
The Rotation option is not available for image elements.
The origin of images is the lower-left corner.

A guide to using WinGLink

24BInterpreted Views and Montage 25-31

You may set the position of the image to a specific value on an

IVM document using the fields provided in the Position tab.
The X-Coord and Y-Coord fields refer to the lower left and
lower bottom corners of an image, respectively.
If the Lock lower-left corner checkbox is enabled, the image
location is fixed on the screen. While the image can still be
resized, the position of the lower-left corner does not change.
5. Shape objects can be scaled or resized either by using the
options provided in the Shape Properties dialog box or by using
the mouse. To manually resize a shape element, select it by
clicking with the mouse, then grab one of the yellow handles
with the mouse pointer and pull to the desired size.
Note: Options set in the Shape Properties window remain in
effect when manually changing the image size and location. For
example, when the Lock aspect ratio checkbox is enabled, the
image proportions are retained when the image is resized with
the mouse.
Symbols
To place symbol in a cultural data layer:
1. Either click the symbol button on the IVM toolbar:
or right-click the mouse on the document window to open the
shortcut menu and select the Symbol command.
2. The mouse pointer changes to a crosshair with a question mark.
Click and hold down the mouse at the location on the document
at which the symbol is to be inserted and, keeping the mouse
button depressed, drag the mouse to create a box of the desired
size.
3. As with shape elements, a symbol of the default type appears
(arrow). The symbol properties can be edited by

25-32 24BInterpreted Views and Montage

A guide to using WinGLink

- double-clicking the symbol

- right-clicking the symbol to open the shortcut menu; when
open, select the Properties command.
- clicking the Edit Object Properties button on the IVM toolbar:

4. The Symbol Properties dialog box opens:

Chose the symbol type from the dropdown list. Symbols

currently available are: arrows, rectangles, circles and crosses.
Set the remaining parameters as desired. Click OK.

Working with Cultural Data Layers

As mentioned earlier in this section, cultural data layers can themselves
be considered a type of document. They may consist of multiple
elements, each of which is located on a separate layer. They may be
stored in the current WinGLink database and reused in other IVM
documents.
Z-order
To change the Z-order of cultural data elements within a cultural data
layer:
1. Click the cultural data element which is to be repositioned.
2. Right-click the mouse on the document window to open the
shortcut menu. Position the mouse over the Order command
and select either the Bring to Front or Send to Back
command:

A guide to using WinGLink

24BInterpreted Views and Montage 25-33

Bring to Front places an element on the top of the cultural data

layer, Send to Back places an element on the bottom.
Reusing cultural data elements
Cultural data elements can be duplicated within a cultural data layer by
using copy and paste functions.
To create a copy of a cultural data element:
1. Click the cultural data element which is to be copied.
2. Right click the mouse on the document window to open the
shortcut menu. Select the Copy command.
3. Again click the cultural data element which is being copied to
select it.
4. Right click the mouse on the document window to open the
shortcut menu. Select the Paste command. A copy of the data
element appears on the document.
Note: It is not possible to copy a cultural data element from one layer to
another.

Interpretation Areas
Interpretation area layers are used to denote specific areas of interest on a
map or section document. This layer type is similar to the cultural data
layer type in that the layers can be saved in the WinGLink database and
reused on other documents:

25-34 24BInterpreted Views and Montage

A guide to using WinGLink

These layers consist of objects similar to the free shapes used in cultural
data layers. Interpretation areas are drawn on a document in the same
way as shapes. They are provided, however, with additional functionality.
You can:

add, move or remove vertices

change the shape of an interpretation area by moving or

deleting segments

assign colors and fill patterns

split interpretation areas and assign different properties

(colors, fill patterns) to each part of the area

position interpretation areas within interpretation areas

Creating Interpretation Areas

To create an interpretation area layer:
1. Right-click the mouse anywhere on the document window or
right-click the document title in the Layer Navigator window to
open a shortcut menu. Then position the mouse over the New
Layer command to open the submenu; select the
Interpretation command.
2. The Select Layer window opens. Listed here are all
Interpretation areas which are stored in the active WinGLink
database:

To create a new interpretation area layer, select the <New>

item in the Layer Name column and click OK. Likewise, an
existing layer can be inserted into the document by selecting the
layer name and clicking OK.
When inserting an existing interpretation area layer into a
document, you may insert either the original layer or a copy of
it. If you select the Link to Original check box when inserting
an existing layer into an interpretation area layer, any change
made to the layer will be reflected in any other documents /
layers which use the layer, provided they, too, use the layer in
linked mode. If the Link to Original check box is not selected
when inserting an existing layer into a document, a new
interpretation area layer is created and will be listed in the
Select Layer window the next time an interpretation area layer
is created.

A guide to using WinGLink

24BInterpreted Views and Montage 25-35

3. If creating a new interpretation area, IVM displays an info box

instructing you to insert an interpretation area. Confirm by
clicking OK.
4. The mouse pointer changes to a crosshair with a question mark.
Click the mouse at the location on the document at which the
interpretation area is to begin. Move the mouse to the location
of the next vertex and click again. Continue this procedure until
the desired interpretation area has been created. Double-click
the mouse to set the final vertex and automatically connect the
last vertex to the first vertex.

Working with Interpretation Areas

A set of commands are available for working with interpretation areas.
These can be accessed either from the IVM toolbar or via the shortcut
menu. The commands are available only when an interpretation area is
the active layer.

Split an existing body

Use this command to split an interpretation area into two
parts. May be used successively to further subdivide an area.

Create a closed body

Use this command to create a new body on the current
interpretation area. New bodies must be entirely contained
within an existing body and may not intersect any other
bodies existing in the body into which the new body is being
inserted.

Body union
Use this command to unite two bodies. These may be either
two halves of one body or a body enclosed with another. The
two bodies to be united must be clicked. The entire area will
take the properties of the second body which is clicked.

Move vertex
Use this command to drag a vertex to a new position.

Move segment

Delete vertex

Delete segment

After clicking any of the above command buttons or after selecting one
of the corresponding shortcut menu commands, IVM is in edit mode. The
respective command remains active until you:

Click a different command button.

Right-click the mouse on the document window to open the

shortcut menu and select the Exit Edit command.

25-36 24BInterpreted Views and Montage

A guide to using WinGLink

Activate a different layer in the Layer Navigator.

Create a new layer.

GEOTiff Maps
What are GEOTiffs?
The GEOTiff specification provides a mechanism which can be used to
embed georeferencing information in TIFF images. By incorporating a
series of tags in a TIFF image, it is possible to correctly position a map,
for example, onto a given coordinate system. While WinGLink cannot
yet be used to create GEOTiff images, images created using other
software packages can be correctly positioned onto map documents in the
IVM program.
For details on the GEOTiff specifications, see:
http://remotesensing.org/geotiff/spec/geotiffhome.html
Numerous third-party software houses have developed and sell software
packages which can be used to generate GEOTiff images.

Creating GEOTiff Map Layers

As the name implies, this type of layer can be inserted only Map
documents only. Theses layers are created much in the same way as other
layers:
To create a station layer:
1. Right-click the mouse anywhere on the document window or
right-click the document title in the Layer Navigator window to
open the shortcut menu. Then position the mouse over the New
Layer command to open the submenu; select the GEOTiff Map
item:

2. The GEOTiff selection window opens. All files with a .TIF or

.TIFF extension which are located in the images folder located
in the same directory as the current database are listed. Note,
however, that only .TIF images which fulfill the GEOTIFF

A guide to using WinGLink

24BInterpreted Views and Montage 25-37

specifications may be inserted into a GEOTiff Map layer:

3. After clicking OK, a progress window opens indicating that the

georeferencing data are being read from the tiff file. Once
complete, the image is positioned at the correct coordinates on
the map.

Tools: Pattern and Category Editors

The Pattern Editor
The pattern editor is used to create and edit fill patterns. Theses patterns
can be used, for example, to fill shapes used in cultural data layers or as
fill patterns to describe layers of vertically distributed data. Patterns
created in the fill editor are available in the property windows of all
elements which support fill patterns, both in IVM and in other WinGLink
modules. In the main WinGLink modules, this feature available only for
sections which contain well courses, e.g. X-Sections.
To open and use the Pattern editor:
1. Select the Tools | Pattern Editor command to open the Pattern
editor:

25-38 24BInterpreted Views and Montage

A guide to using WinGLink

2. To create a new pattern, position the mouse over the Editing

window, then click and hold down the left mouse button. Slide
the mouse across the edit window to create a pattern. You may
alternatively click individual squares to create a pattern. When
finished, click the save button.
3. To edit an existing pattern, open the Select Pattern dropdown
list. Make any changes to the pattern, then click the Save button
to overwrite the pattern with your changes, or Save As to
save your changes to a new pattern.
Note: The only color available in the pattern editor is red. When using
patterns as a fill, you may, however, select both foreground and
background colors.

The Category Editor

The Category Editor is available in IVM as well as the X-Sections, 2D
Inversion and Well Editor modules. The categories are centrally stored in
the database. Thus, regardless of the program in which categories are
edited or new categories created, the modifications are reflected
throughout the database.
Once categories, or types of layers, have been created, any time another
layer of that type is encountered in a section within the database,
WinGLink automatically performs filling.

To Assign Fill Patterns to Layer Data:

1. On the Tools menu of the X-Sections window, select the
Category Editor command to open the Category Editor:

Displayed in the Category frame are all existing categories.

Categories are created automatically when importing layer data
into WinGLink and can also be created using the Add New
button located at the bottom of the left column.

A guide to using WinGLink

24BInterpreted Views and Montage 25-39

The elements in the Item frame are the description elements

contained in layer-data files which were linked to the given
category type during import. New items can be created using
the New button located in the upper right corner of the
Category Editor.
2. Select a category and item with the mouse. The current pattern
type is displayed in the Pattern Type dropdown box.
3. Click the arrow at the right end of the Pattern Type dropdown
box to open a box containing all available fill patterns. Choose
back color and fore color for the filling using the provided
drop-down boxes.
4. The Pattern Editor, which can be opened using either the button
provided in the Category Editor or by selecting the Tools |
Pattern Editor command on the main menu, can be used to
create new patterns.
The Import function, which is called up using the Import button in the
Category Editor, provides a function for importing entire categories from
other databases. If you import a duplicate category, the Category Editor
can be used to merge the two categories together.

Upon closing the Category Editor, well courses are filled with the
appropriate fill patterns:

25-40 24BInterpreted Views and Montage

A guide to using WinGLink

The IVM Plates Module: Preparing Documents for

Printing
After either map or section documents have been created and saved in
Interpreted Views and Montage (IVM) they exist within the current
WinGLink database as independent objects. Using the IVM Plates
module, these documents can be combined with other IVM display
elements, e.g. scales, legends, text boxes, or even other maps or sections
to annotate documents for plotting. Once completed, plate documents can
be sent to either an installed printer or to a file (CGM or EMF).

Getting Started with the Plates Module

To open the Plates module, select the Document | Go To Plate Mode
menu option from either the Map or Section window in IVM:

A guide to using WinGLink

24BInterpreted Views and Montage 25-41

The yellow area in the center of the can be thought of as the layout area:
documents, legends, texts etc. are printed as they are positioned in this
area.
The size of the layout area, which is identical to the page size, can be set
by selecting the Plate | Page Setup command. In the Page Setup dialog
box which opens, select from a range of standard paper sizes. The page
size is reflected in the plate axes and the size of the layout area.

To Display a Document Object on a Plate:

1. Right-click the mouse anywhere in the layout area to open a
shortcut menu:

2. Position the mouse over the New command to open a

secondary menu containing all display elements. Click the
desired type to select it.
3. Depending on the type of element selected, the mouse pointer
may change to a crosshair, indicating that you are to use the
mouse to create the area on the plate into which the element is
to be inserted, or you may be prompted to select an image.
4. To insert a map or section document, select the Document
command. The mouse switches to a crosshair with a question
mark. Position the mouse pointer at the intended location of one
of the document corners; click the left mouse button and drag
the mouse across the screen, creating a black-framed box in the
process. When the box is approximately the correct size, release
the mouse. The box changes to a blue-framed box with an x
though it. This box may be repositioned by clicking the mouse
anywhere within its boundaries and dragging it to a new
location. It may also be resized by clicking any of the yellow
handles and pulling to a new location on the screen.

25-42 24BInterpreted Views and Montage

A guide to using WinGLink

5. After releasing the mouse, the Open Document window opens.

Select the desired document and click the Open button.

Note: The most recently viewed documents are listed in the
Recent tab. All other IVM map and section documents
contained in the current WinGLink database are available for
selection in the respective Map and Section tabs.
6. The document appears on the screen in the boundaries defined
by the blue-framed box in Step 4. The document may be
repositioned or resized using the same methods described in
Step 4.

Adjusting Document Properties

Depending on the size of the defining rectangle, the document may not be
displayed in its entirety. The view area, as well as other document display
properties, can be adjusted in the Document Properties window. This
window can be opened by double-clicking the document:

A guide to using WinGLink

24BInterpreted Views and Montage 25-43

The View area tab is available for both map and section documents. For
section documents, the two center tabs are Distances and Depths; for map
documents they are Metric coordinates and Geographic coordinates. Use
the settings in the two center tabs to set display features such as font,
grids, colors and frames. The Pattern printing options tab contains
options for scaling the size of any patterns used in the document. The
Axes Legends tab, which is available for Section documents only, can be
used to set legend texts and other display parameters.
Note: In order to display the axis legends, the View tickmark
checkboxes in the Distances and Depths tabs of the Document Properties
window need to be enabled.
To adjust the view area:
Use the four fields on the sides of the preview window and the scale
field(s) to adjust the display area. Note, however, that the function of
these fields varies depending on the selection states of the Keep scale
and Keep frame dimensions check boxes. Maps documents contain only
one scale field; section documents contain scale fields for both the
horizontal and vertical scales.
If the Keep scale and Keep frame dimension checkboxes are selected,
changes to the view area fields serve to pan the document within the
bounding rectangle. Changes to the scale fields zoom in or out on the
document (sections only), effectively adjusting the vertical exaggeration.
Click the Fit to Frame button to automatically center the document in
the bounding rectangle.
If the Keep frame dimension checkbox is not selected, scale is
maintained as the view area fields are changed. The size of the bounding
rectangle is, however, changed. Click the Fit to Frame button to
automatically center the document in the bounding rectangle.
If the Keep scale checkbox is not selected, the bounding rectangle
remains a fixed size. Changes to any of the view area fields are reflected
in the scale fields in the lower right corner. Likewise, changes made to
the scale fields are reflected in the view area fields. Click the Fit to
Frame button to fit the entire document in the bounding rectangle.

Other Display Elements

The other types of display elements which can be added to a plate are
typically associated with a single document. For example, a Scale Box
display element reflects the scaling used for a specific Document
element.
To create (non-document) display elements and assign them to specific
document elements:
1. As with document elements, right-click the mouse anywhere in
the layout area to open a shortcut menu:

25-44 24BInterpreted Views and Montage

A guide to using WinGLink

2. For example, to position a legend for layer data contained in a

section, i.e. well data, select the New | Legend | Layer Data
command from the shortcut menu:

3. After selecting a display element, the mouse switches to a

crosshair with a question mark. Use the same procedure as was
used to position a new document element on the screen to
create a box into which the legend (or other display element) is
to be placed.
4. Immediately after releasing the mouse, an info box opens
indicating that the element has not yet been linked to a
document:

A guide to using WinGLink

24BInterpreted Views and Montage 25-45

The Link Document Info message box serves only to inform

you that the element must be linked to a document before it can
be filled with the appropriate information. The lower box,
which contains the text No Document Linked, defines the
rectangle into which the element will be placed once the
element has been linked to a document.
5. Position the mouse within the boundaries of the new box and
right-click the mouse to open a shortcut menu:

Select the Link to Doc command.

6. The mouse pointer changes to a plain crosshair. Now, select the
document with which the given display element is to be
associated by clicking the document with the mouse. If the
document supports the element, it should now be displayed

25-46 24BInterpreted Views and Montage

A guide to using WinGLink

correctly on the screen:

7. The display properties, i.e. text color/size, frame width etc., for
each element can be modified by selecting the element with the
mouse, then right-clicking to open the shortcut menu. Select the
Properties menu item to open the Properties window, which
contains standard formatting options. You may alternatively
double-click a display element to open the Properties window.
Elements which are not supported by the document to which
they are linked are displayed as an empty, white box. These can
be deleted by right-clicking the element and selecting the
Delete command from the shortcut menu.
Other display elements which must be linked to documents include:

scale box: provides information about scaling, and, for

section documents, information about vertical exaggeration

color box: displays the same color range information as is

displayed in the original document (color range window)

legend: layer data: provides a visual link between fill types

and layer names for vertically distributed data

legend: symbols: provides a visual link between symbols

used to indicate measurement points for numerical data and
the corresponding symbol names for vertically distributed
data, i.e. temperature or pressure measurement points along
well courses

The remaining display elements, e.g. title box and frame, are for
document-independent annotation purposes and, thus, are not associated
with a specific document.

Printing Plates
Plates created within the IVM plates module are printed much as any
other document would be in a standard Windows program. One notable
difference, however, is the fact that documents can be printed to files of
types EMF and CGM.
To print to a file or to a printer other than your default printer:

A guide to using WinGLink

24BInterpreted Views and Montage 25-47

1. On the Plate menu, select the Printer Setup option to open the
Printer Setup dialog box:

2. To print to a file, click the Print to File checkbox in the

Options area of the screen, then select the type of file to which
you would like to print.
3. To change other printing options, e.g. printer name, print range,
proceed as you would with any other Windows program.
4. To send the plate to the selected printer or file, select the Plate |
Print command.
Important:
When printing to EMF of CGM files, note the following: Although
output is not sent to a physical printer, the paper properties of the printer
selected in the Printer section of the Printer Settings dialog are used. Each
output file can be considered to be a page of printer output. Because the
entire output is sent to a single file, however, you must ensure that the
paper size selected for the printer is large enough for the entire print area,
i.e. fits within the red border which defines the first page of output in the
Print Preview screen. Any information outside of the first page will be
clipped in the output file.

25-48 24BInterpreted Views and Montage

A guide to using WinGLink

26: Appendix A: TGF files

The TFG Format

In order to import vertically distributed data, including lithologic data,
into WinGLink, they must be contained in either columnar text files or in
TFG-format files. This description describes the TGF specification and
how to work with TGF files.
The TGF format is an expandable data format specified by Geosystem for
the purpose exchanging geophysical data across applications. A given
TGF file may contain station data for one or more stations, e.g. name and
coordinates, as well as data values for one or more values, e.g.
temperature and density.
TGF files may also link to other TGF files. In this way it is possible to
create a batch file of sorts. For example, the top-level file might contain
station data and links to several files containing different value types, e.g.
temperature, pressure and density.

Organizing Station Data in TGF-Format Files

TGF files are organized by block using markup tags in a way similar to
those used in standard markup languages such as HTML. Within the tags,
data are organized primarily as tabular data.
Example of a TGF file structure:
<TGF100>
; this is a comment
<TAG1=param1 param2>
(user data)
<TAG1>
</TAG2>
(user data)
</TAG2>
<TAG2>
(user data)
</TAG2>
<TAG_A>
(user data)
</TAG_A>

A guide to using WinGLink

25BAppendix A: TGF files 26-49

<INCLUDE="Stations.tgf">
<END>

The file MUST begin with the string <TGF100>. The 100 indicates
version 1.00 of the file format, allowing for future changes.
A TGF file consists of a series of <TAG></TAG> pairs, which
surround user data. All opening and closing tags, i.e. <TAG> and
</TAG>, must stand alone on a line. Opening tags may contain
parameters, i.e. <TAG= param1>.
Every TGF file must end with an <END> tag. Anything after this tag is
ignored.
There are two types of tags:
1. Multi-line tags, which act as data containers, primarily of
tabular data
Example:
<DATA=STAT_COORDS>

</DATA>
2. Single-line tags, which are used for less complex data. No
ending </TAG> is used for this tag type.
Example:
<INCLUDE="stations.tgf">

Valid Tags
TGF100

File type/version, must be on the first line. Without this tag the file will
be rejected.
Example:
<TGF100>

(rest of file)
WAIT

This tag instructs the importing program to stop interpretation of the file
until the user acknowledges a message displayed on the screen.
Example:
<WAIT=Press a key to continue> ; this will wait for
user

26-50 25BAppendix A: TGF files

A guide to using WinGLink

DATA=NAME

This is a general user data/table container. The type of data is specified

by the name. These are multi-line tags and must be formatted as follows:

One or more spaces or tabs must separate user data columns.

The decimal separator is "." (dot); no thousands separator is

allowed.

Numbers can be expressed in scientific notation.

Text data must be enclosed in " " (quotation marks).

Blank lines are ignored.

DATA=STAT_COORDS

Defines a group of stations

Table column definition is:
1. "Station name"
2. X (northing) [Km]
3. Y (easting) [Km]
4. Elevation [m]
Example:
<DATA=STAT_COORDS>
; This table builds station locations
"st 01"

34.456

21.451

500.2

"st 02"

31.456

13.455

534.7

"st 03"

24.456

43.552

400.9

"st 04"

14.461

65.952

840

"st 05"

74.556

28.457

510

</DATA>

DATA=VSAMPLE_TYPES

Defines a table of vertical sample names, with their attributes, and unit of
measure and number of decimals to display.
Table column definition is:
1. NAME
2. Unit
3. Ndec
Example:
<DATA=VSAMPLE_TYPES>
; This section defines the names of used vertical
vector types

A guide to using WinGLink

25BAppendix A: TGF files 26-51

"Resistivity"

"rho"

"Temp"

"C"

"Pressure"

"Kpa/cm"

</DATA>

DATA=VSAMPLE

Defines a vertical sample, its sample type and the reference for Z
coordinate.
means Z = 0 at sea level, positive upward

ZMODE="Elev"

means Z = 0 at station surface, positive downward

ZMODE="Depth"

STATION="Name" name of station to which station is to be associated

STYPE="Name"

join sample to sample type "name"

Table column definition is:

1. Z [m]
2. value [unit of vector type, if any]
Example:
<DATA=VSAMPLE>
ZMODE="Depth" ;depth or elev
STATION="st 02"
STYPE="Resistivity"
122.34

45.223

234.23

167.332

455.43

123.23

1120.34

145.223

1234.23

171.332

1457.43

231.23

2126.34

252.223

2634.23

167.332

2795.43

283.23

3120.34

458.223

3234.23

676.332

3455.43

532.23

</DATA>

<DATA=VSAMPLE>
ZMODE="Depth"
STATION="st 02"
STYPE="rho"

26-52 25BAppendix A: TGF files

A guide to using WinGLink

122

48.223

238

117.332

457

123.23

1100 175.223
1234 171.332
1437 231.23
2128 212.223
2654 117.332
</DATA>
INCLUDE

This tag allows the interpretation of another file before continuing with
the current one.
It is useful for keeping homogenous data in separate files.
Processing will continue with the external file and will resume execution
from the next line
Included files cannot call each other (circular reference). If "file A"
includes "file B" then "file B" can't include "file A"
Be careful!
If the included/called file has some tag present also in the calling file, the
data of the last tag read will be kept.
The include tag can be in any part of the file, but must be outside of other
tags.
Example:
; External links to other files
<INCLUDE="stations.tgf"> ;file stations.tgf will be
read and..
<INCLUDE="vectors.tgf"> ; then file vectors.tgf

END

This tag ends interpretation of file. It must be present

Example:

<END>

These lines are ignored

These lines are ignored
These lines are ignored
These lines are ignored

A guide to using WinGLink

25BAppendix A: TGF files 26-53

These lines are ignored

(Physical end of file)

Importing TGF Files into WinGLink

TGF data are imported into WinGLink using the Importing station data
command located in the main Database window.
To import TGF files into WinGLink:
1. On the File menu of the Database window, select Importing
station data, then specify External Files.
2. Next, select the project into which the data are to be imported.
For vertical data, the project must be of type Vertically
Distributed Data [VD], for wells of type Wells [WL]
3. In the <Files of Type> box, select TGF Files.
4. Browse the directories until you find the file(s) to be imported.
5. Select the name of each file to be imported
6. Click Next.
7. Click each of the stations which are to be imported.
Note: If no stations are listed, either no stations are contained in your
TGF file or your file is not conformant with the TGF specifications.

26-54 25BAppendix A: TGF files

A guide to using WinGLink

27: Index

Cascade Decimation
channel mapping 5-1
creating command files 5-1
getting started 5-1
input files 5-1
opening 5-1
output files 5-1
overview 5-1
processing data 5-1
processing types 5-1
program wizard 5-1
robust processing 5-1
time series selection 5-1
Category and Pattern editors 13-14
Category Editor
assigning fill patterns to layer data 13-14
Color fill
color scale 13-3
managing 13-3
range editor 13-3
showing 13-3
Color ranges
adding 13-4
defining 13-3
deleting 13-4
editing color palettes 13-6
editing range bounds 13-5
managing templates 13-7
selecting and calibrating color palettes
13-5
Color Ranges
defining the number of ranges 13-3
Common Functions
color fill 13-3
color scale 13-3

A guide to using WinGLink

display area 13-1

managing color fill 13-3
overview 13-1
pan function 13-1
range editor 13-3
setting the view area 13-2
view area 13-2
zoom function 13-1
Contour lines
displaying 13-8
formatting 13-9
major 13-8
minor 13-9
setting 13-8
setting number of decimals in annotations
13-9
Copying screen contents
copy to bitmap 13-12
copy to clipboard 13-12
Cross-Power Editor
editing cross-power files 6-1
getting started 6-1
loading a cross-power file 6-1
masking 6-1
masking a group of components 6-1
masking one component at a time 6-1
overview 6-1
saving 6-1
supported formats 6-1
D

Data Analysis
adding/subtracting 360 from phase 7-1
batch commands 7-1
common interactive editing commands
7-1
data display options 7-1

26BIndex I

decomposition 7-1
displaying the invariant curve 7-1
file selection 7-1
getting started 7-1
masking/unmasking data points 7-1
masking/unmasking tipper 7-1
opening 7-1
plot parameters 7-1
rotation 7-1
saving data 7-1
selecting data points to edit 7-1
setting TE and TM mode 7-1
smooth curves 7-1
spectral analysis 7-1
undo editing changes 7-1
viewing data 7-1
viewing parameter values 7-1
zooming in/out during editing 7-1
Data Import
generally applicable import methods 1235
getting started 12-1
importing a project from a WinGLink
database 12-35
importing data from Geolink projects 1236
importing EDI files 12-8
importing gravity/magnetic data 12-25
importing station coordinates 12-3
importing stations referenced to a
different coordinate system 12-37
importing TDEM data 12-21
importing TGF files 12-36
importing well data 12-28
initial steps 12-1
MT data 12-7
overview 12-1
station coordinates 12-3
DC Soundings
1D inversion
commands and graphics 21-9
batch commands 21-12
calculating smooth curves 21-10
edited curves 21-6
editing 21-6
guessing a layered model from the smooth
model 21-10
importing sounding data 21-5
interactive 1D model editing 21-11
opening overview 21-1, 21-2

II Table of Contents

opening stations from a map 21-3

printing 21-4
quick view 21-12
running a layered model inversion 21-11
setting log or linear plot scale 21-4
setting max and min plot values 21-4
setting ranges and scale 21-4
which data are saved in the database 212
E

EDI Utilities
combining EDI files 8-1
convert to EDI 8-1
dumping EDI files to text files 8-1
getting started 8-1
opening EDI tools 8-1
overview 8-1
split multi-site/EDI files 8-1
EM/DC Pseudo-Sections
changing station state 22-4
creating a new pseudo-section 22-1
displaying station dataset values 22-3
editing sounding data 22-3
gridding the profile data 22-2
masking selected station data points 22-3
overview 22-1
G

Gravity & Magnetic 2.75 Modeling

overview 24-1
Gravity & magnetic maps
aeromag maps 14-28
altitude 14-28
computing Bouguer anomaly 14-27
computing derivatives 14-29
computing free air anomaly 14-27
computing IGRF values for magnetic
stations 14-28
computing pseudo-gravity anomalies 1430
computing pseudo-magnetic anomalies
14-31
computing residual field 14-29
downward continuation 14-30
filtering 14-29
polynomial fitting 14-29

A guide to using WinGLink

reduction to the pole 14-31

removing IGRF from magnetic stations
14-28
removing regional field 14-29
transforming vertical to total field 14-32
upward continuation 14-30
Gravity and magnetic maps
station anomalies 14-27
Gravity Tools
computing observed gravity values 10-1
creating a survey database 10-1
creating and opening loops 10-1
defining meters 10-1
entering observed gravity values 10-1
exporting gravity values 10-1
gravity reduction program 10-1
opening 10-1
overview 10-1
plotting tide corrections 10-1
Gravity&Magnetic 2.75 modeling
editing menu and commands 24-7
Gravity&Magnetic 2.75 Modeling
adding bodies to a model 24-7
adding control by displaying a section in
the background 24-4
adding vertices to a body 24-9
clipping vertices 24-9
creating a new model 24-4
deleting a model 24-6
deleting vertices from a body 24-9
editing the properties of a body 24-10
entering body density 24-10
entering body susceptibility 24-10
loading anomaly values 24-3
moving the vertices of a body 24-9
observed anomaly values 24-2
opening a saved model 24-6
setting automatic or manual vertical shift
24-3
setting body strike and offset 24-10
setting label background 24-10
setting the body color 24-10
showing body parameters in labels 24-10
splitting a body 24-8
Gridding
gridding station data 13-10
I

Importing MT data

A guide to using WinGLink

2D forward responses 12-15

3D MT meshes 12-17
EDI files 12-8
importing text files 12-12
Importing station data
from single-site EDI files 12-8
Geolink 6.0 projects 12-36
impedance rotation 12-8
tipper rotation 12-8
Importing TDEM Data
Temix datasets 12-23
TemMerge files 12-21
USF files 12-24
Zonge AVG files 12-23
Importing Well Data
importing coordinate information 12-29
importing layer data 12-32
importing well courses 12-30
Interpreted Views and Montage 25-3
category editor 25-38
Contour Editor 25-15
Creating GEOTiff layers 25-37
creating layers 25-12
crossing traces 25-9
cultural data closed polylines 25-29
cultural data - images 25-29
cultural data - labels 25-23
cultural data - polylines 25-26
cultural data - shapes 25-24
cultural data - symbols 25-32
cultural data text boxes 25-24
cultural data layers 25-21
document types 25-1
document window 25-5
fill colors 25-16
GEOTiff maps 25-37
grid layers 25-12, 25-14
interpretation areas 25-34
Layer Navigator 25-6
legends 25-11
Mouse Locator 25-8
overview 25-1
pattern editor 25-38
plate mode 25-2
Plates - display elements 25-44
Plates - adjusting document properties
25-43
profile layers 25-21
station layers 25-17
toolbars 25-9

26BIndex III

topography shadowing 25-17

vector plots 25-19
vertical exaggeration 25-9
working with layers 25-12
zoom 25-8
Interpreted Views and Montage - Plates
overview 25-41
printing 25-47
M

Maps
adding or subtracting the values of two
maps 14-10
adding stations 14-15, 14-16
adding stations to a profile trace 14-4
creating 14-6
creating a new map 14-1, 14-9
creating and using profile traces 14-3
creating standard maps 14-7
datasheet 14-16
deleting stations 14-16
display 14-6
editing stations 14-15, 14-16
exporting grids 14-14
extracting a map from 3D MT meshes
14-24
extracting elevations 14-16
extracting station values from a grid 1413
getting started 14-1
gravity maps 14-27
gridding 14-11
gridding values 14-11
inserting stations along a profile 14-18
loading a saved map 14-11
magnetic maps 14-27
map definitions 14-8
map grids 14-13
MT maps 14-21
overview 14-1
profile traces 14-19
project types 14-11
resampling a map 14-12
stations 14-15
TDEM maps 14-26
terrain correction maps 14-33
value profiles 14-19
well maps 14-40
MT 2D inversion

IV Table of Contents

AMT data 18-23

computing synthetic forward modeling
results 18-23
creating amphibious models 18-4
creating marine models 18-4
creating models 18-2
damping factor for locked elements 1821
data errors 18-21
default mesh generation 18-6
display the model as mesh 18-24
displaying 1D models 18-27
displaying inversion reports 18-28
displaying inversion results as pseudosections 18-25
displaying model roughness 18-26
displaying multiple models for
comparison 18-26
displaying sensitivity maps 18-26
displaying well courses 18-28
editing meshes 18-8
error floor 18-19
executing batch inversions 18-29
exporting interfaces 18-29
exporting models 18-29
exporting sensitivity maps 18-26
extracting meshes 18-7
extracting meshes from resistivity section
18-7
filling a mesh with values from 3D MT
mesh 18-7
importing interfaces 18-30
importing models 18-30
inversion settings 18-15
inverting Hz transfer function 18-15
inverting specific modes 18-15
loading models 18-2
minimum and maximum resistivity values
18-15
model development 18-26
overview 18-1
preparing the input data 18-1
running the smooth inversion 18-22
setting fixed parameters 18-21
smooth inversion parameters 18-17
static shift 18-19
taking notes 18-28
tear, activating 18-21
MT 2D inversion model editing
changing rows or columns size 18-9

A guide to using WinGLink

defining tear areas 18-12

deleting rows or columns from the mesh
18-9
editing cells resistivity 18-9
editing columns resistivity 18-9
editing rows resistivity 18-9
locking cell resistivity 18-10
tear areas 18-12
unlocking cells resistivity 18-11
MT 2D sharp boundary inversion
editing sharp boundary resistivity
interfaces 18-13, 18-14
locking interface vertices 18-14
locking resistivity nodes 18-14
running a sharp boundary inversion 1822
setting sharp inversion parameters 18-21
MT 3D Modeling
3D mesh definition 19-2
3D meshes in WinGLink 19-2
3D models 19-1
about 3D meshes 19-2
anchor function 19-22
band selection 19-20
compass 19-13, 19-18
creating meshes 19-5
cut on topography 19-19
delete row/column 19-20
editing meshes 19-16
exporting 3D grid files 19-35
exporting EDI files 19-33
exporting meshes 19-10
fit mesh 19-15
flag 19-18
forward model calculation 19-31
importing meshes 19-4
lock/unlock cell values 19-18
mesh properties 19-28
move mesh 19-17
pan view 19-16
printing mesh views 19-30
Randy Mackie 3D mesh specification
19-36
redim row/column 19-20
remove air layers 19-25
remove isolated cells 19-24
remove isolated values 19-26
replace range 19-23
replace values 19-23
rotate mesh 19-17

A guide to using WinGLink

row/column selection 19-19

Select Interface Grid 19-27
select view 19-15
selecting a mesh 19-3
set cell value 19-19
show rho values 19-14
split row/column 19-20
station check 19-24
station data options 19-26
station decimator 19-25
station status editor 19-25
Swap Mesh 19-29
the Mesh Navigator 19-11
topography 19-11
undo/redo 19-16
using the MT 3D Modeling program 193
value editing 19-21
value shifting 19-20
view area editing 19-22
views 19-13
wide selection 19-19
zoom 19-16
MT maps
MT induction arrows 14-22
MT Maps
displaying 3D meshes 14-25
extracting maps from 3D meshes 14-24
extracting parameter values 14-23
miniature curves with resistivity and
phase 14-21
polar diagrams 14-22
MT Pseudo-sections
changing sounding TE/TM mode
assignment 17-7
MT Pseudo-Sections
adjusting static shift 17-6
changing station state 17-7
creating a new difference pseudo-section
17-8
creating a new pseudo-section 17-1
deleting pseudo-sections 17-5
displaying profile intersections 17-4
displaying station dataset values 17-4
exporting grids 17-5
gridding the station data 17-3
masking selected station data points 17-5
overview 17-1
MT Soundings
1D inversion

26BIndex V

commands and graphics 16-21

activating / deactivating stations 16-10
adding/subtracting 360 from phase 1618
common interactive editing commands
16-14
data editing
by spreadsheet 16-13
definition of ellipticity 16-4
displaying pseudo MT curve from TDEM
model during editing 16-19
displaying the invariant curve 16-10
editing 16-1
exporting MT data to EDI format via
batch procedure 16-27
exporting to EDI 16-9
impedance rotation 16-11
importing models from other stations 1624
importing sounding data 16-6
induction arrows 16-4
interactive 1D model editing 16-26
inverting edited or smoothed curves 1622
La Torraca decomposition 16-12
masking/unmasking data points 16-14
masking/unmasking tipper 16-14
miniature curves 16-32
opening overview 16-1
opening soundings 16-3
options for parameter viewing 16-4
polarization maps 16-32
printing 16-5
printing a selection of soundings 16-27
quick edit 16-31
quick view 16-30
ranges 16-5
reloading original curves 16-20
rotating MT impedances for selected
soundings 16-27
running 1D inversion for selected
soundings 16-27
running a layered model inversion 16-25
saving edited curves 16-13
Schmucker convention 16-4
selecting data points to edit 16-14
setting TE and TM mode 16-10
setting the parameters for viewing 16-4
smoothed curves 16-17

VI Table of Contents

smoothing the curves of selected

soundings 16-27
special menu commands 16-30
starting the 1D inversion module 16-20
static shifting 16-17
static stripping 16-16
tipper rotation 16-11
troubleshooting the data editing 16-19
undo editing changes 16-14
view options 16-5
viewing parameter values 16-10
Weise convention 16-4
which data are saved in the database 162
zooming in/out during editing 16-14
MT Tools
Data Analysis
fixing spectra packing 7-1
overview 7-1
supported formats 7-1
MT3D Modeling
overview 19-1
P

Pattern Editor
opening and using 13-16
Printing
CGM files 13-22
changing the printing scale 13-21
editing text items 13-20
editing the legend box 13-20
EMF files 13-22
loading a saved layout 13-22
margins 13-18
modifying print layout 13-19
moving print items 13-19
overview 13-17
page setup 13-18
PDF files 13-22
PostScript files 13-22
print layout 13-19
printing to file 13-22
saving the print layout 13-22
setting the printer 13-18
sizing print items 13-19
splitting pages 13-22
Profiles
adding traces 14-4
constructing sections 14-20

A guide to using WinGLink

exporting profiles 14-21

inserting stations 14-18
profile spectra 14-19
profile traces 14-3
xy graphs 14-19
S

Sections
creating a new 1D section 23-2
vertically distributed data 23-7
Soundings
opening stations from a map 16-3
printing curves and 1D models 16-5, 205, 21-4
setting log or linear plot scale 16-5, 20-4
setting max and min plot values 16-5,
20-4
tipper magnitude, displaying 7-1, 16-15
vertical scaling 7-1, 16-15
Soundings (MT)
static stripping 7-1
Stations
adjusting the display settings 13-12
displaying a value at each station 13-12
displaying the station name 13-12
displaying the station symbol 13-12
displaying the values of the station dataset
13-12
displaying well courses 13-14
inserting new stations along a profile
Trace 14-18
updating values by import 14-16
T

TDEM Maps
extracting parameter values 14-26
TDEM Soundings
1D inversion
commands and graphics 20-8
batch commands 20-11
calculating smooth curves 20-9
curve selection 20-9
display options 20-4, 21-4
edited curves 20-6
editing 20-6
exporting TEM-format files 20-5

A guide to using WinGLink

guessing a layered model from the smooth

model 20-9
interactive 1D model editing 20-11
opening overview 20-1, 20-2
opening stations from a map 20-3
printing 20-5
quick view 20-12
reloading original curves 20-7, 21-8
running a layered model inversion 20-10
setting ranges and scale 20-4
sounding properties 20-4
starting the 1D inversion module 20-8,
21-8
viewing resistivity curves 20-4, 21-4
which data are saved in the database 202
TemMerge
data records selection dialog box 9-1
display options 9-1
editing sounding curves 9-1
editing sounding records 9-1
getting started 9-1
importing free-format text files 9-1
importing system dump files 9-1
output format 9-1
overview 9-1
polarity inversion 9-1
saving merged soundings 9-1
selecting and merging soundings 9-1
timing 9-1
using TEM files 9-1
Terrain correction maps
about 14-33
calculating inner terrain corrections 1434
calculating outer terrain corrections 1436
calculating total terrain corrections 14-37
creating 14-33
importing and exporting terrain correction
data 14-38
The WinGLink Shell
adding projects 11-10
attaching a project to another project 1116
combining projects 11-15, 11-17
coordinate system settings 11-7
creating databases 11-3
database menu commands 11-7
database mode 11-2

26BIndex VII

database sharing 11-8

databases 11-1
deleting projects 11-11
editing project properties 11-12
integrated projects 11-17
overview 11-1
previewing project contents 11-12
projects 11-1, 11-10
setting database coordinates 11-3
setting topography source 11-13
Time Series
# of points 4-1
adaptive filtering 4-1
adding or removing frames 4-1
autoscale function 4-1
band selection 4-1
batch functions 4-1
changing channels to plot 4-1
channel difference 4-1
clearing frames 4-1
correlation 4-1
decimation 4-1
displaying time series 4-1
equipment selection 4-1
exporting time series 4-1
extracting segment from date 4-1
extracting segments 4-1
extraction 4-1
filtering 4-1
first difference 4-1
frames 4-1
getting started 4-1
info window 4-1
inverting polarity 4-1
multichannel extract segment 4-1
multichannel extraction table 4-1
multichannel time shift 4-1
notch filtering 4-1
opening 4-1
overview 4-1
plot selection 4-1
printing 4-1
raw correlation 4-1
raw spectra 4-1
spectrogram 4-1
stacked correlation 4-1
stacked spectra 4-1
supported formats 4-1
time series selection 4-1
time shifting 4-1

VIII Table of Contents

wavelet filtering 4-1

Tzx/Tzy, displaying 7-1, 16-15
V

Vertically distributed data

creating new 23-7
X-Sections 23-7
W

Well Data Editor

category editor 15-5
displaying sectional views 15-6
editing layered data 15-4, 15-5
editing well courses 15-2
importing well courses 15-3
starting 15-1
viewing layered data 15-4
viewing numerical data 15-5
viewing well courses 15-2
Well maps
creating 14-40
numeric well data 14-40
Wells
editing well courses 15-1
layered data 15-1
overview 15-1
using the well data editor 15-1
working with well data in WinGLink 157
WinGLink
overview 1-1
overview of manual structure 1-1
WinGLink Downloader
downloading and using 2-1
WinGLink installation
cleaning up an old installation 2-1
contents of shipping package 2-1
dongle driver 2-1
improving graphic quality 2-1
installation troublehsooting 2-1
installing the WinGLink dongle 2-1
installing WinGLink 2-1
minimum requirements 2-1
optimizing screen resolution 2-1
parallel port dongle 2-1
the users guide 2-1
uninstalling WinGLink 2-1

A guide to using WinGLink

USB dongle 2-1

warning messages 2-1
what to do if program will only run in
demo mode 2-1
WinGLink windows
copying color ranges 13-11
copying grid parameters 13-11
copying images to bitmaps 13-11
copying images to the clipboard 13-11
copying the view area 13-11
copying window size 13-11
Workflow
DC data 3-1
gravity | magnetic data 3-1
MT data 3-1
overview 3-1
TDEM data 3-1
wells 3-1
X

activating/deactivating stations 23-4

creating 23-2
displaying features and parameter values
23-5
exporting grids 23-4
gridding the station datasets 23-3
overview 23-1
profile intersections 23-6
section topography 23-6
viewing profile location map 23-5
viewing well courses and well layer data
in sections 23-6
working with vertically distributed data
23-7
Z

Zooming
moving the zoom window 13-2
zooming in 13-1

X-Sections

A guide to using WinGLink

26BIndex IX